THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


o. 

r  x  • 

• 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND 

A  COMPLETE  AND  SYSTEMATIC  EXPOSITION 

OF  PHONOGRAPHY,  BASED  ON  THE 

PITMANIC  ALPHABET 


FOR  USE  IN  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES 


1904 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress, 
in  the  year  1893,  by 

THE    PRACTICAL   TEXT   BOOK    COMPANY, 

In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress, 

at  Washington. 


(o  /p 


PREFACE. 


The  great  number  of  books  that  have  appeared  within  the 
last  few  years  on  the  Pitmanic  systems  of  shorthand  is  some 
evidence  of  the  widespread  protest  against  the  old  order  of 
arrangement.     While  these  books  present  few  radical  changes, 
they  all  show  certain  tendencies  which  are  the  direct  result  of 
the  impetus  given  to  shorthand  study  and  practice  by  the 
re-arrangement  of  the  old  forms  into  a  practically  new  alpha- 
bet   by   Isaac    Pitman,    and   the    many     invaluable   expedi- 
ents first  introduced  by  Mr.  Graham.     The  most  marked  ten- 
dency is  that  toward  a  happy  medium  between  the  cumbersome 
w   outlines  of  the  former  author,  and  the  extremely  abbreviated 
^   reporting  methods  of  the  latter,  which  is  seen  in  the  practical 
>•  work  of  the  active  reporters  of  the  country.     Although  short- 
|  hand  is  the  result  of  slow  growth  and  the  workings  of  many 
••  minds  rather  than  the  product  of  any  one  mind,  none  deserve 
the  honors  paid  them  by  stenographers  more  than  do  these  two 
men  for  the  good  they  have  done  the  English  speaking  people 
5*   in  furthering  the  study  and  uses  of  shorthand. 

We  have  endeavored  to  make  a  complete  book,  mechanic- 

*    ally  as  nearly  perfect  as  possible,  scientifically  accurate  in  all 

its  technical  statements  of  principles,  and  at  the  same  time,  to 

present  those  principles  so  plainly  as  to  smooth  the  way  to  an 

i   easy  and  progressive  mastery  of  the  science,  from  its  simplest 

3   elements  to  the  most  complex  forms  used  by  expert  writers. 

This  book  is  the  result  of  many  years'  actual  experience 
in  teaching  and  reporting.  We  are  confident  its  simple  and 
direct  .methods  will  make  better  stenographers,  eifect  a  great 
saving  of  time  and  effort  on  the  part  of  both  teacher  and  stu- 
dent, and  render  quite  unnecessary  the  enormous  outlay  of 
study  and  blind  practice  required  by  the  older  books. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

LESSON  I,   THE  CONSONANT  ALPHABET, 

LESSON  -    -     II,  OUTLINES  OF  WORDS, 
LESSON  III,   THE  VOWEL  ALPHABET 

LESSON  -     -  IV,   CIRCLES  AND  LOOPS,       ...        - 
LESSON  V,   WORD  SIGNS, 

LESSON  -     -  VI,   DIPHTHONGS, 
LESSON  VII,    PETOIDS, 

LESSON   -     VIII,  THE  LETTER  H, 

LESSPN  IX,   AR,  RAY,  LAY,  EL,  ISH,  SHAY,  Es  AND  ZEE, 

LESSON  -      -    X,   BRIEF  SIGNS  FOR  W  AND  Y,  60 

LESSON            XI,   INITIAL  HOOKS,        -  68 

LESSON  -        XII,   SPECIAL  VOCALIZATION,  75 

LESSON    -    XIII,   ENLARGED  INITIAL  HOOKS,  81 

LESSON         XIV,  TERMINAL  HOOKS  FOR  F.  V.  AND  N,  85 

LESSON  -    -  XV,   TERMINAL  HOOKS  FOR  SHUN  AND  TIVE,  92 

LESSON  -   -  XVI,   THE  ESHUN  HOOK,      -        -  96 

LESSON   -    XVII,   THE  SHADED  M,  99 

LESSON     XVIII,   THE  LENGTHENING  PRINCIPLE,  102 

LESSON         XIX,  THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE,       -  106 

LESSON           XX,   PREFIXES,                                       -  120 

LESSON  •       XXI,   AFFIXES,    -        -  127 

LESSON   -    XXII,   THE  ENLARGED  WEH  AND  YEH,  133 

LESSON     XXIII,   OMISSION  OF  LETTERS,  136 

LESSON  -  XXIV,   RECAPITULATION  OF  SPECIAL  PRINCIPLES,  141 

LESSON    -    XXV,    IMPLICATION  OF  WORDS,  145 

LESSON  -   XXVI,   OPTIONAL  PRINCIPLES,        -        -  148 

LESSON     XXVII,   PHRASING,  149 

LESSON  XXVIII,    PHRASE  LIST, 153 

LESSON  -  XXIX,    REPORTING  LIST,      ------  IGO 

WORDS  DISTINGUISHED,     --                169 

How  TO  FORM  CONTRACTIONS,      -        - 171 

METHOD  OF  PRACTICE,       -        -        -        -        -        -        -        -        -171 

READING  NOTES, ..-.  173 

ADVANCED  READING  EXERCISES, 175-194 

FAC-SIMILE  NOTES  OF  PROMINENT  REPORTERS,    -  195-200 

TRANSCRIPTS,                                 201 

CHAPTER  ON  PHONETICS,            -----_..  230 

GLOSSARY,         -------.        =        ._  238 


INTRODUCTORY. 


The  teacher  will  have  constant  occasion  to  observe  the 
necessity  for  absolute  accuracy  in  shorthand,  and  he  cannot 
too  strongly  impress  upon  the  minds  of  all  who  contemplate 
its  study,  the  importance  of  learning  to  think  and  to  observe 
accurately,  for  accurate  thinking  and  close  observation  are  the 
foundation  of  all  skill.  It  is  deplorable  that  the  majority  of 
candidates  for  the  study  of  shorthand  are  handicapped  with 
very  slovenly  mental  habits,  due  to  faulty  elementary  training. 
This  naturally  results  in  careless  methods  of  writing.  The 
ordinary  degree  of  accuracy  which  will  answer  for  the  every- 
day affairs  of  life  will  not  suffice  for  the  purposes  of  shorthand, 
where  exactness  is  essential.  The  law  has  made  an  extra- 
ordinary degree  of  carelessness,  ia  many  fields  of  labor,  a  crime, 
and  punishes  it  as  such ;  this  is  evidenced  by  the  frequency 
with  which  one  meets  the  phrase  "  criminal  negligence."  It  is 
quite  possible  for  a  shorthand  writer  to  become  criminally 
careless.  Many  young  people  have  been  so  accustomed  to 
careless  habits  of  reading  and  writing  that  it  is  hard  for  them 
to  realize  what  scientific  precision  is.  When  once  the  habit  of 
accuracy  is  formed,  it  is  as  easy  to  be  accurate  as  it  is  to  be 
slovenly. 

Owing  to  the  exigencies  of  rapid  work  and  the  consequent 
inability  to  make  the  characters  with  precision,  there  is  another 
principle  which  must  be  borne  in  mind  while  pursuing  the 


vi  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

study  of  any  art,  and  that  is  the  law  of  ease.  To  insist  upon 
an  absolutely  perfect  and  almost  artistic  formation  of  the  signs, 
and  at  the  same  time  to  cultivate  a  boldness  of  stroke  and 
confident  ease  and  freedom  of  movement  is  the  ideal,  which, 
perhaps  cannot  be  reached.  But  the  teacher  must  inspire  in 
his  pupils  a  sense  of  ease  and  confidence.  Facility  of  execu- 
tion comes  from  within  outwards.  The  ideal  form  must  be 
fixed  in  the  mind  before  it  can  be  transferred  to  paper ;  and 
the  law  of  ease  must  work  hand  in  hand  with  the  law  of  accur- 
acy. The  signs  -should  be  made  as  nearly  like  the  printed 
forms  in  the  book  as  possible.  Absolute  accuracy  is  a  desirable 
thing,  but  it  must  not  be  secured  at  too  great  a  sacrifice  of  ease. 
It  must  be  attempted,  but  it  cannot  be  attained  at  first,  for  it 
is  a  result  of  long  practice,  and  not  a  thing  with  which  we  can 
hope  to  start.  Ease  and  accuracy,  then,  must  be  cultivated  all 
the  way  through,  for  it  is  the  ease  of  writing  which  gives  speed, 
and  accuracy  which  gives  legibility. 

The  student' should  study  notes  taken  in  actual  reporting, 
and  the  teacher  should  write  much  for  him  in  an  easy,  facile 
manner,  that  the  pupil  may  know  exactly  how  it  is  done,  and 
be  inspired  by  the  spirit  of  fast  writing. 

Definite  instructions  will  be  found  with  reference  to  the 
best  representation  of  such  terminations  as  fer,  ver  ;  fen,  ven  ; 
ten,  den  ;  tel,  del ;  tary,  tory,  etc.,  mention  of  which  has  unfor- 
tunately been  overlooked  in  other  books.  These  terminations 
are  important,  and  unless  definite  instructions  are  given,  the 
student  is  in  doubt  as  to  which  of  the  different  outlines  that 
may  be  used  for  their  expression  is  preferable. 

The  engraved  illustrations  are  of  the  highest  quality  the 
most  skilled  engravers  can  produce,  and  are  entirely  free 
from  the  blurs  and  indistinct  lines  that  mar  and  disfigure  the 
pages  of  almost  every  shorthand  book  hitherto  published. 

The  glossary  is  an  interesting  feature  of  the  book,  and 
will  be  of  special  value  to  young  writers.  We  have  endeavored 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  vn 

to  compile  a  list  of  the  most  frequently  recurring  words,  the 
formation  of  the  correct  outlines  of  which  might  be  difficult 
for  the  beginner.  Our  plan  of  giving  the  nomenclature  of  the 
words  instead  of  the  engraved  outlines,  compels  a  valuable 
mental  effort  on  the  part  of  the  student  which  would  otherwise 
be  lost. 

Each  lesson  is  divided  into  three  parts :  (i)  a  statement  of 
the  principles,  (2)  a  transcribing  or  reading  exercise,  and  (3)  a 
writing  exercise.  Each  part  should  be  studied  in  its  proper 
order,  and  this  order  resolutely  adhered  to  throughout  the 
book. 

If  the  writing  exercise  is  attempted  before  the  statement 
of  principles  has  been  carefully  studied  and  thoroughly 
mastered,  and  before  the  reading  exercise  has  been  accurately 
transcribed,  the  student  will  become  confused  and  lose  much 
valuable  time.  With  a  clear  understanding  of  these  principles 
and  their  illustrations  as  given  in  the  reading  exercises,  writing 
becomes  easy  and  fascinating. 


VITI 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 
CONSONANTS. 


Character.        Name.  Sound  as  in          Character. 

\        -    -    Pee  -        -   cape  / 

V. .-.'...    Bee  -  -    -  /;ake  / 

^.   .    .    .    Et-  -        -  /ar 

V.  ...   Vee  -  -       t'im  iX 

I   -    -    -    Ar  -  -    -   arm  ' 

•>  . 


\ 


•'•'-.'-  Way  -  -  week 

-  -    -  Tee    -  -  -   wha£ 

-  -    -  Dee    -  -  -  heed 
.    .    .  Ith  - 


-    -    Thee  -    -   -   brea£/ie 
/    ...    Es  -    -    -    -   ask 
)    -   -   -   Zee     -   -   -  aero 


Name.  Sound  as  in 

-  Chay  -  -  -  church 

-  Jay    -  -  -  judt/e 

-  Ish     -  -  -  sAall 

-  Zhay  -  -  -  iwual 


-    Lay    - 

-   -   lake 

-    Yay    - 

-   -  i/es 

-    Kay   - 

-    -    ma/;e 

-    Gay    - 

-    -   yo 

-    Em     - 

-    -   come 

-    En 

-    -  ?tear 

-    Ing    - 

-   sung 

-    Ray   - 

-   reach 

-    Hay   - 

-    -   Aouse 

VOWELS. 


• 

- 

e  as  in 
eel 

a  as  iu 
ale 

a  as  in 
ah 

a 

i 

as  in       o 
iwe 

is  in       oo  as  in 
old            cool 

tasin 
it 

6  as  in 
met 

a  as  in 
at 

o  as  in        u  as  in        <><>  as  in 
on               up                foot 

DIPHTHONGS. 


t  as  in      <>i  as  in    ow  as  in   ew  as  in 
time  oil  owl          dew 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


LESSON  I. 


THE  CONSONANT  ALPHABET. 

i.  As  phonography  is  based  upon  phonetic  spelling  some 
slight  knowledge  of  the  nature  of  sounds  is  necessary,  but 
sufficient  explanations  will  be  made  from  time  to  time,  and 
especially  when  we  come  to  the  vowel  alphabet,  to  enable  the 
student  to  spell  phonetically.  A  full  analysis  of  the  sounds  of 
our  language  is  given  in  the  Appendix,  to  which  the  student  is 
referred  when  in  doubt  as  to  any  question  of  phonetics.  The 
first  duty  of  the  student  is  to  learn  thoroughly  the  consonant 
alphabet  which  is  given  below,  and  also  upon  the  page  opposite. 
The  student  will  be  assisted  in  committing  to  memory  the 
alphabet  by  observing  the  underlying  principles  given  in 
"  Remarks  on  the  Consonant  Alphabet."  (p.  1 1.)  These  prin- 
ciples should  be  clearly  understood,  and  the  reasons  for  things 
should  be  sought  for  in  shorthand  as  in  all  other  studies. 
Knowledge  of  principles  will  assist  efforts  at  memorizing  by 
showing  the  student  that  phonography  is  not  only  an  art  but  a 
science,  governed  by  law  at  every  step,  and  not  an  arbitrary 
arrangement  of  characters  eluding  the  memory  for  want  of 
connecting  principles. 


10  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

The  consonants  are  represented  by  simple  lines  called 
strokes  or  stems,  and  are,  owing  to  their  nature  and  mutual 
relations,  (See  Sec.  4)  divided  into  three  groups  as  follows : 

A \ui  JL  JL  .../.. 


P           b 

V  V^_ 

t 

( 

d 

( 

ch 

) 

j 
) 

k 
J    ' 

g 

J 

i  \ 
f  ~"V 

th 

th 

s 

z 

sh 

zh 

c 

x 

1  r 

ray 

ill 

11 

llg 

w 

y 

h 

STATEMENT  OF  PRINCIPLES. 

2.  The  Direction  of  the  consonant  stems  is  determined 
by  certain  definite  rules,  which  are  important  as  controlling  the 
position  of  certain  vowels,  explained  later  on.  Particular 
attention  should  be  given  to  the  direction  of  sk,  /,  ray  and  ch. 

All  stems  are  written  downward  or  from  left  to  right,  with 
the  following  exceptions : 

(a)  The  sign  for  sh  is  always  written  downward  when 
standing  alone ;  when  joined  to  other  stems  it  may  be  written 
upward  or  downward  to  suit  convenience.  When  written  down- 
ward it  is  called  Ish ;  when  written  upward  it  is  called  Shay  : 


Ish      Ish-Kay         Shay-Lay       Ef-Shay         Ef-Ish 

(b)  The  sign  for  /  is  always  written  upward  when  standing 
alone ;  when  joined  with  other  stems,  it  is  sometimes  written 
downward  in  accordance  with  principles  stated  in  a  subse- 
quent chapter.  It  is  called  L,ay  when  written  upward  and  El 
when  written  downward  ;  thus, 

Lay          Lay-Em  El-Em         Lay-Kay  El-Kay 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  11 

(c)  The  straight  sign  for  r  (called  Ray)  is  always  written 
upward,  and  is  thus  distinguished  from  ch  (Chay)  which  is 
invariably  written  downward.  When  standing  alone  they  are 
distinguished  from  each  other  by  the  difference  in  slope,  Chay 
inclining  at  an  angle  of  about  thirty  degrees,  and  Ray  at  an 
angle  of  about  sixty  degrees  from  a  perpendicular  line  ;  thus, 


Chay          Ray       Ray-Chay     Chay-Ray    Ray-Tee     Chay-Tee 

(d)     The  sign  for  h  (Hay)  is  always  written  upward. 

3.  The  consonant  stems  should  be  made  about  an  eighth 
of  an  inch  in  length  ;  this  enables  them  to  be  easily  distin- 
guished from  the  lengthened  strokes  on  the  one  hand,  and  the 
halved  characters  on  the  other,  which  are  explained  hereafter. 
The  beginner  is  apt  to  make  them  too  long.     The  length  given 
in  the  engraved  exercises  of  this"  book  is  a  good  standard  for 
actual  work.     The  light  strokes  should  be  made  very  light,  and 
the  shaded  ones  just  heavy  enough  to  distinguish  them  from 
the  corresponding  light  stems. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  CONSONANT  ALPHABET. 

4.  The  student  may  follow  whatever  method  he  deems 
best  in  committing  to  memory  the  alphabet.     While  he  can- 
not safely  depart  from  precise  rules,  yet  he  must  exercise  his 
own  independence  of  thought  and  bent  of  mind,  if  he  would 
achieve  results  most  rapidly.     The  following  underlying  princi- 
ples will  be  interesting  and  helpful  to  the  thoughtful  student  : 

The  idea  which  lies  at  the  basis  of  the  Pitmanic  systems  of  short- 
hand conies  from  a  natural  principle.  Every  elementary  line  is  based 
upon  a  natural  relationship  between  the  line  and  the  sound,  as,  for 
instance,  a  light  line  should  and  does  represent  a  whispering  sound,  a 
heavy  or  shaded  line  should  represent  a  sub-vocal  or  heavy  sound  ;  short 
and  abrupt  sounds  should  be  represented  by  short  straight  strokes, 
while  continuing  sounds  should  be  represented  by  curved  strokes,  etc. 


12  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

As  will  be  seen  from  a  study  of  the  sounds  of  the  consonant  alpha- 
bet, they  are  naturally  divided  into  three  groups.  The  first  group, 
called  ABRUPTS,  consists  of  eight  straight,  mated  stems,  representing 
the  cognate  letters,  p,  b,  t,  d,  ch,  j,  k,  and  g  hard,  thus  : 


These  letters  are  represented  by  short  abrupt  strokes  because  they 
represent  the  shortest  sounds  in  the  language.  The  straight  line  can 
be  written  in  only  these  four  directions  with  sufficient  distinctness  to 
insure  certainty  in  reading,  and  the  light  lines  naturally  stand  for  the 
light  sounds  or  aspirants,  and  the  shaded  lines  indicate  the  heavy 
sounds  or  sub-vocals.  So  it  becomes  natural  to  represent  p  with  a  light 
line,  and  b  with  a  heavy  line,  because  p  is  a  whispered  sound,  while  b  is 
a  sub-vocal  or  has  an  undertone.  The  letters  forming  this  group  are 
always  written  downward  except  Kay  and  Gay,  which  are,  of  course, 
always  written  from  left  to  right. 

(c)  The  second  group  called  CONTINUANTS,  consists  of  eight 
curved,  mated  stems,  representing  the  cognate  letters,  f,  v,  th,  th,  s,  z, 
sh,  and  zh,  thus  : 


These  are  curved  characters  because  they  represent  flowing  or  con- 
tinuable  sounds.  Half  of  them  are  made  light  because  they  represent 
whispering  or  aspirant  sounds,  while  the  other  half  are  shaded  because 
they  represent  heavy  sounds  or  sub-vocals. 

(d)  At  the  risk  of  repeating  somewhat,  and  to  sum  up,  we  have, 
then,  the  following  principles  : 

Cognate  letters  have  the  same  sign;  the  shaded  stroke  represents 
the  heavy  sound,  while  the  light  stroke  represents  the  light  sound. 
There  is  no  difference  between  the  sound  of  p  and  the  sound  of  b  except 
a  slight  undertone,  and  this  undertone  is  represented  in  shorthand  by 
shading  the  stroke.  So,  there  is  no  difference  between  the  sound  of  the 
word,  pay  and  the  sound  of  bay  except  this  undertone.  By  pronouncing 
the  words  slowly  the  student  will  see  how  closely  related  are  the  sounds 
of  p  and  b  ;  and  the  same  is  true  of  all  the  cognate  letters.  So,  too, 
with  the  sounds  represented  by  th  in  thin  and  th  in  then.  It  requires  no 
knowledge  of  phonetics  to  distingush  these  sounds  ;  the  one  is  a  whis- 
pered utterance,  while  the  other  is  a  vocal,  \yhispered  sounds  called 
Spirants,  are  represented  in  shorthand  by  light  lines,  while  those  letters 
which  have  a  slight  undertone,  called  sub-vocals,  are  indicated  by  shaded 
strokes. 

(e)  The  third  group  consists  of  eight  opposing  stems  ;  that  is,  not 
mated,  but  rather  correlative,  —  one  suggests  the  other.     They  are  called 
coalescents,  because  they  blend  easily  with  other  sounds  : 


({)  The  letter  x  does  not  appear  in  the  alphabet  because  it  is  not 
an  elementary  sound,  but  composed  of  the  sounds  of  k  and  s,  as  will  be 
seen  by  pronouncing  slowly  the  word  lax  (lacks). 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  18 

(g)  The  letter  h  occupies  an  anomalous  position  in  any  language, 
and  its  history  in  comparative  philology  is  very  interesting.  It  does 
not  occur  frequently  in  shorthand,  and  is  provided  with  a  special  stem. 

ORIGIN  AND  NATURE  OP  THE  CONSONANT  SIGNS. 

5.  The  consonant  alphabet  is  derived  from  the  circum- 
ference of  a  circle  and  its  diameter  written  in  four  directions, 
as  shown  by  the  following  diagrams : 


6.  These  diameters  divide  the  circumference  of  the  cir- 
cle into  eight  parts  or  arcs,  giving  us  the  curved  consonant 
signs.     The  radii  furnish  us  with  the  straight  stems,  with  the 

'exception  of  Hay  and  Ray.  By  observing  that  every  curved 
stem  is  a  quarter  of  a  circle,  and  every  straight  stem  is  a 
radius,  the  student  need  have  no  difficulty  in  determining  the 
slope  of  the  stroke  or  the  exact  amount  of  the  curvature. 

7.  The  Names  of  the  consonant  signs  must  be  early 
fixed  in  the  mind.     They  are  given  at  the  left  in  the  following 
exercise,  which  is  designed  as  a  copy  or  model  for  practice,  and 
should  be  repeatedly  copied  with  a  free,  steady  and  uniform 
motion  of  the  hand.     They  should  not  be  drawn  with  labored 
slowness  nor  made  in  nervous  haste,  but  with  an  easy  flowing 
style.     While  accuracy  of  outline  is  important,  the  endeavor 
to  acquire  it  should  not  be  carried  to  such  an  extreme  as  to 
develop  a  nervous,  trembling,  hesitating  movement. 

As  the  slant  or  angle  of  inclination  of  sloping  stems  is  of 
such  importance  in  making  notes  perfectly  legible,  we  have 
arranged  the  alphabet  into  four  groups  with  reference  to  their 
direction,  as  follows  : 


Left  oblique.  Perpendicular.    Right  oblique.      .   Horizontal. 


14  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

8.  The  grouping  of  the  consonants  together  in  this  man- 
ner is  to  furnish  a  standard  by  which  a  student  may  test  the 
accuracy  of  his  outlines  at  a  glance.  For  example,  the  first 
group  must  be  made  at  such  an  incline  that  a  stroke  exactly 
half  way  between  a  vertical  and  a  horizontal,  will  cover  the 
straight  strokes  and  touch  the  points  of  the  curves;  thus, 

\\v 


The  other  groups  may  be  tested  in  a  similar  manner,  using 
the  stroke  Tee  for  the  perpendiculars ;  the  stroke  Chay  for  the 
right  obliques ;  and  the  stroke  Kay  for  the  horizontals.  Hay 
and  Ray  should  be  slanted  a  trifle  more  than  Chay. 

9.  To  impress  these  characters  thoroughly  on  the  memory 
and  at  the  same  time  to  acquire  ease  and  precision  in  their 
execution,  it  is  necessary  to  write  them  over  and  over  again. 
The  following  method  of  practice  is  recommended.  Write  the 
names  of  the  first  group  at  the  left  edge  of  the  note  book  or 
paper,  then  write  across  the  page  the  signs  representing  the 
letters  at  the  margin,  at  the  same  time  repeating  aloud  their 
names.  The  characters  should  be  made  small,  neat,  and  uni- 
form in  size.  Make  the  light  strokes  like  hairs,  and  shade  the 
heavy  ones  just  enough,  and  no  more  than  is  necessary,  to 
distinguish  them  from  the  others.  Practice  the  signs  in  this 
manner  until  you  have  filled  at  least  a  page,  and  write  the 
other  groups  similarly.  Then  commence  again  with  the  first 
group  and  repeat  the  process  until  you  are  just  as  familar  with 
the  entire  series  as  you  are  with  their  longhand  equivalents. 

v> 
Pee  Bee      — - 


Ef  Vee       ~-i 

Ar  Way       .JSSSS^SSSSXS^^ 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  15 

\ 

10.  Remarks. — Phonography  is  best  written  on  ruled 
paper  with  single  red  lines.  Double  lines  are  confusing  to 
some,  and  are  of  no  special  advantage.  Either  pen  or  pencil 
may  be  used,  though  the  pen  is  preferable.  None  but  the  best 
writing  materials  should  be  used,  even  in  the  most  elementary 
practice.  The  pen  should  be  new,  and  have  a  smooth,  fine 
point.  The  paper  should  not  be  too  highly  glazed  or  calen- 
dered, but  of  a  good  quality,  and  of  a  velvety  surface,  so  that 
the  pen  will  not  slip  too  easily  over  it,  but  can  be  more  readily 
guided  at  will  by  the  hand.  The  ink  should  be  fresh,  free 
from  dust  and  other  impurities,  and  flow  freely.  No  effort 
at  speed  should  be  made  at  the  outset.  Perfection  and  delicacy 
of  outline  -should  be  the  chief  aim  of  the  beginner,  rather  than 
rapidity  of  writing.  Painful  accuracy,  however,  should  be 
avoided,  lest  it  beget  a  confused  mental  state,  with  resulting 
hesitation  and  lack  of  confidence,  which  are  the  bane  of  young 
writers.  The  hand  should  be  trained  to  move  with  confident 
ease  and  freedom;  accuracy  of  outline  will  come  with  the 
movement.  If  each  stroke  be  given  its  proper  direction,  shad- 
ing, length  and  position,  the  writing  will  be  legible  and  accu- 
rate. Elegance  of  form  may  come  in  later  on  with  the  attain- 
ment of  manual  skill,  and  there  is  a  certain  elegance  and  grace 
in  the  writing  of  every  expert,  though  to  the  unpracticed  eye 
it  may  not  appear.  The  curved  strokes  must  not  be  finished  up 
with  a  quick  nervous  motion  or  jerk  of  the  pen,  thus  forming 
a  little  flourish  or  twist  at  the  end,  but  should  be  made  with  a 
uniform  and  steady  movement.  In  making  the  shaded  curved 
characters,  the  shade  should  be  made  in  the  middle  only, 
gradually  tapering  to  a  fine  line.  Stenographers  differ  as  to 
the  best  method  of  holding  the  pen.  It  should,  however,  be 
held  in  a  more  upright  position  than  is  required  in  longhand, 
for  greater  convenience  in  making  the  characters  sloping  to 
the  left.  If  held  between  the  first  and  second  fingers  this  up- 
right position  is  insured,  although  some  freedom  of  movemen* 


16  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

is  thus  sacrificed.  The  elbow  should  be  thrown  out  a  little 
from  the  body,  so  that  the  backward  aud  perpendicular  strokes 
may  be  made  more  easily.  The  hand  should  glide  along  on 
the  nails  of  the  third  and  fourth  fingers,  strictly  avoiding  con- 
tact of  the  wrist  with  the  paper.  Let  the  muscles  of  the  left 
fore-arm  sustain  the  weight  resulting  from  the  forward  pres- 
sure of  the  body,  thus  leaving  the  right  hand  and  wrist  per- 
fectly free. 

The  Writing  .Exercises  found  in  this  book  will  afford  ample 
practice  on  the  principles  under  each  head,  and  the  student 
should  avoid  writing  any  words  except  those  found  in  the 
exercises  until  he  has  mastered  all  the  principles.  Very  little 
is  gained  in  attempting  to  write  unfamiliar  matter  until  the 
principles  are  well  understood. 


LESSON  II. 


OUTLINES  OF  WORDS. 

ii.  Phonography,  as  the  derivation  of  the  word  suggests, 
is  a  method  of  rep  resenting  the  sounds  of  a  language,  without  ref- 
erence to  the  current  spelling.  The  phonetic  principle  is  made 
use  of  to  secure  brevity  and  a  uniform  basis  for  a  system  of 
writing.  All  silent  letters  are  ignored  and  only  the  sounded  ele- 
ments of  language  are  expressed.  The  sounded  consonants 
making  up  a  word  are  first  written,  and  form  what  is  called 
the  outline  of  the  word.  The  sounded  vowels  are  afterwards 
inserted.  The  consonants  forming  the  outline  must  be  joined 
without  lifting  the  pen,  and  in  accordance  with  the  follow- 
ing principles. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  17 

12.  L,et  the  first  downward  or  upward  stroke  fall  upon 
the  line  of  writing,  the  following  stroke  or  strokes  falling 
below  the  line  if  need  be  ;  as, 


Pee-Tee  En-Jay  Chay-Tee  Kay-Er  Kay-En-Dee 


Hay-Tee  Lay-Hay 

13.  A  straight  stem  when  repeated  is  simply  lengthened; 
as, 

V       \         _  / 

\        \  / 

Pee-Pee  Bee-Bee  Tee-lee  Uliay-Chay   Kay-Kay 

14.  Curved  stems  are  repeated  as  shown  below.      They 
must  not  be  lengthened  to  repeat  the  letter : 


V 

Em-Em  En-En  Ef-Vee        Lay-Lay        Ar-Ar 

15.  When  light  and  heavy  straight  strokes  of  the  same 
direction  are  joined  they  must  gradually  blend,  and  not  be 
united  with  a  pause,  or  abrupt  movement  of  the  pen  ;  thus, 


Pee-Bee    Tee-Dee  Dee-Tee         Kay-Gay 

1 6.  An  angle  must  be  made  between  the  stems  Ef  and 
En,  Vee  and  En,  Ef  and  Ing,  Lay  and  Em,  for  reasons  which 
will  become  apparent  hereafter ;  thus, 


El-En  Vee-Eu  Ef-Ing  Vee-Ing  Lay-Em 

1 7.  No  angle,  however,  is  required  in  the  following  combi- 
nations. They  should  be  made  with  a  single  sweep  of  the  pen, 
the  first  stroke  flowing  into  the  second  in  such  a  manner  that 


18  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

the  point  of  junction  may  not  be  observable.  These  combina- 
tions furnish  a  good  manual  drill  for  the  student.  They  seem 
difficult  at  first,  but  with  the  proper  movement  of  the  hand 
they  become  the  easiest  and  swiftest  type  of  phonographic 
outline. 

\       \        £    -4      I       \      A     v_ 

v  ----  /—       V^x  \_>-  V^^  ^  —          —  \  -          —  A  - 

Pee-Eu      Bee-En      El-En        El-Ing      Dee-Ef   Pee-Es      Bee-Es    Ef-Kay 


Lay-Ar      Ef-Shay    Lay-Es        Lay-Way      Lay-Shay  Shay-Lay    Lay-Ish 

1  8.  The  beginner  must  bear  in  mind  that  in  shorthand, 
words  are  spelled  just  as  they  are  ordinarily  sounded  ;  hence, 
a  double  consonant  is  not  repeated.  The  outline  of  the  word 
funny  would  be  Ef-En  ;  of  dummy  would  be  Dee-Em  ;  of  shell 
or  shallow  would  be  Shay-Lay. 

NOTE  :  It  may  not  be  too  early  in  the  study  of  shorthand  to  say  a 
word  about  movement,  and  it  may  be  that  the  student  needs  no  hint  in 
this  direction  ;  but  a  free,  easy  and  uniform  movement  of  the  hand  is 
very  necessary  for  rapid  writing.  The  forms  must  not  only  be  so  famil- 
iar that  no  effort  of  the  mind  is  required  to  recall  them,  but  the  hand 
must  be  trained  to  move  like  an  automaton.  If  the  student  does  not 
possess  a  full  control  of  his  hand,  he  should  aim  at  the  outset  to  acquire 
it.  What  is  called  the  purely  finger  movement  should  be  discouraged, 
and  a  combined  movement  of  the  fore-arm,  hand  and  fingers  should  be 
aimed  at.  Constant  practice  on  phonographic  forms  will  drill  those 
muscles  of  the  hand  which  are  brought  into  play  in  shorthand  writing. 

19.  The  Reading  Exercises  throughout  this  book  contain 
no  outline  which  need  be  changed  even  by  the  most  advanced 
writer,  and  the  student  may  have  no  fear  of  learning  anything 
to  be  subsequently  unlearned. 

20.  The  following  Reading  Exercise  should  be  read  over 
several  times,  and  the  signs  called  by  their  proper  names  ;  as, 
Pee-Kay,  Kay-Pee,  Kay-Tee,  Tee-Em,  etc.     Be  careful  to  call 
the  upward  stroke  for  /  Lay,  and  the  downward  stroke  for  / 
El.     Do  not  allow  the  upward  stroke  for   sh  to  be  called 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


19 


anything  but  Shay.     Be  equally  exact  in  the  naming  of  all 
outlines  throughout  the  study. 


READING  EXERCISE. 


JA.. 


....U 


20  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

21.  The  following  outlines  are  not  to  be  memorized  as 
words,  but  the  exercise  is  designed  simply  as  a  drill  on  the 
consonant  alphabet,  and  in  the  formation  of  outlines.  The 
names  of  the  stems,  it  will  be  observed,  commence  with 
capitals.  There  are  certain  principles  determining  when  to  use 
L,ay  or  El  and  Ar  or  Ray  which  are  treated  of  in  a  subsequent 
lesson,  but  for  the  present  the  student  may  write  these  stems 
as  they  are  indicated  by  their  names.  When  the  outline  is 
not  given  write  these  stems  in  the  most  convenient  direction. 
After  this  exercise  has  been  neatly  written  it  should  be  read 
over  and  all  errors  noted  and  corrected.  It  is  not  enough  to 
notice  an  error,  but  it  must  be  corrected  immediately. 

(a)  Tick,  Tee-Kay ;  tug,  Tee-Gay ;  dock,  dike,  Dee-Kay ;  pity, 
Pee-Tee  ;  cub,  Kay-Bee  ;  keep,  Kay-Pee  ;  check,  Chay-Kay  ;  babe,  Bee- 
Bee  ;  cake,  Kay-Kay  ;  rate,  Ray-Tee  ;  rode,  Ray-Dee  ;  patch,  Pee-Chay  ; 
deep,  Dee-Pee  ;  ditch,  Dee-Chay ;  pop,  Pee-Pee  ;  tidy,  Tee-Dee ;  diary, 
Dee-Ray ;  duty,  Dee-Tee  ;  cheap,  Chay-Pee  ;  cherry,  Chay-Ray  ;  chum, 
Chay-Em ;  adage,  Dee-Jay ;  Dutch,  Dee-Chay ;  gaiety,  Gay-Tee ;  gap, 
Gay-Pee  ;  catch,  Kay-Chay  ;  ahead,  Hay-Dee  ;  beak,  Bee-Kay ;  job,  Jay- 
Bee  ;  page,  Pee-Jay ;  joke,  Jay-Kay  ;  tub,  tube,  Tee-Bee  ;  touch,  teach, 
Tee-Chay  ;  pitch,  Pee-Chay ;  judge,  Jay-Jay  ;  keg,  Kay-Gay ;  reap,  Ray- 
Pee  ;  robe,  Ray-Bee  ;  ridge,  Ray-Jay  ;  reach,  Ray-Chay  ;  haughty,  Hay- 
Tee  ;  bag,  Bee-Gay. 

(b)  Tame,  Tee-Em  ;  dumb,  Dee-Em  ;  chime,  Chay-Em  ;  comb,  Kay- 
Em  ;  fury,  Ef-Ray ;  vary,  Vre-Ray ;  thick,  Ith-Kay ;  thatch,  Ith-Chay  ; 
ship,  Ish-Pee ;  shake,  Ish-Kay ;  sheaf,  Ish-Ef ;  bath,  Bee-Ith  ;  bathe,  Bee- 
Thee  ;  fife,  Ef-Ef;  gem,  Jay-Em  ;  fare,  fire,  Ef-Ar  ;  veer,  Vee-Ar  ;  name, 
En-Em  ;  lash,  Lay-Shay ;  faith,  Ef-Ith  ;  Nash,  En-Ish  ;  knave,   En-Vee ; 
mail,  Em-Lay ;  harsh,  Ar-Ish ;  dare,  Dee-Ar ;  game,  Gay-Em  ;  ink,  Ing-Kay. 

(c)  Veto,  Vee-Tee  ;  thorough,  Ith-Ray  ;  aside,  Es-Dee  ;  chamois,  Ish- 
Em  ;  asthma,  Es-Em  ;  awning,  En-Ing  ;  avail,  Vee-El ;  valley,  Vee-Lay ; 

/ninny,  En-En;  lily,  Lay-Lay ;  error,  Ar-Ar ;  many,  money,  Em-En; 
among,  Em-Ing ;  shell,  shallow,  Shay-Lay ;  penny,  Pee-En ;  seeth,  Es- 
Ith  ;  also,  lassie,  Lay-Es  ;  leeway,  Lay-Way  ;  lower,  Lay-Ar ;  mazy,  Em- 
Zee  ;  massy,  Em-Es  ;  funny,  Ef-En  ;  honey,  Hay-En  ;  heavy,  Hay-Vee ; 
holy,  Hay-Lay ;  Emily,  Em-Lay ;  Lehigh,  Lay-Hay ;  early,  Ar-Lay ; 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  21 

awoke,  Way-Kay  ;  rally,  Ray-Lay  ;  ferry,  Ef-Ray  ;  hurry,  Hay-Ray  ;  knock. 
En-Kay  ;  maim,  Em-Em  ;  fish,  Ef-Shay. 

(d )  Dogma,  Dee-Gay-Em  ;    notary,   En-Tee-Ray ;   injury,   En-Jay- 
Ray  ;  miller,  Em-Lay- Ar ;  polish,  Pee-L,ay-Shay  ;    alarm,    Lay-Ar-Em  ; 
caloric,  Kay-Lay-Ar-Kay ;  bulfinch,  Bee-Lay-Ef-En-Chay ;  avenue,  Vee- 
En  ;   evade,  Vee-Dee  ;  equity,  Kay-Tee  ;  militia,  Em-L,ay-Ish ;  Toledo, 
Tee-L,ay-Dee  ;  Marietta,  Em-Ray-Tee  ;  catholic,  Kay-Ith-Lay-Kay  ;  comic, 
Kay-Em-Kay  ;  marriage,  Em-Ray-Jay  ;  demolish,  Dee-Em-Lay-Shay. 

Determine  the  outlines  for  the  following  words,  bearing  in  mind 
that  words  are  spelled  by  sound  in  shorthand,  and  only  the  sounded  let- 
ters are  written. 

(e)  (Words  of  one  stem).    Aid,  may,  edge,  etch,  alley,  icy,  eighty, 
ache,  yea,  easy,  Ohio,  gnaw,  ode,  oak. 

(f)  (Words  of  two  stems).      Talk,  chalk,  item,  chime,  data,  top, 
ink,  fame,  move,  mouth,  sheep,  faith,  palm,  shock,  chip,  dish,  ditch, 
joke,  peak,  calm,  tithe,  fetch,  latch,  match,  page,  peg,  keep,  deck,  peach, 
dock,  dodge. 

(g)  (Words  of  three  stems).     Baggage,  Canada,    Chicago,  Jacob, 
revenue,  abolish,  damage,  foliage,  dominoe,  deputy,  alarm,  marriage. 


LESSON  III 

THE  VOWEL  ALPHABET. 

22.  We  have  thus  far  presented  only  the  consonant  ele- 
ments of  language.  For  the  complete  representation  of 
speech,  vowels  are  necessary.  The  stenographer  in  active 
practice,  whether  in  the  office  receiving  dictation  or  in  the 
court  room  in  verbatim  reporting,  relies  almost  solely  on  the 
outlines  of  words,  vowels  being  only  occasionally  inserted  for 
greater  legibility.  The  reporter  and  the  amanuensis  use  almost 
identically  the  same  outlines,  varying  only  in  the  degree  of 
skill  in  forming  them,  and  differing  in  familiarity  with  steno- 
graphic material  and  the  use  of  special  expedients.  There  is, 
therefore,  in  actual  practice  no  such  distinction  as  corresponding 


22  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

and  reporting  styles.  The  term  Corresponding  Style  lias  been 
used  to  indicate  the  fully  vocalized  outlines  while  Report- 
ing Style  has  been  applied  to  partially  vocalized  outlines.  Be- 
cause the  reporter  relies  largely  upon  consonant  outlines,  the 
beginner  must  not  entertain  the  notion  that  vowels  are  unnec- 
essary or  unimportant.  Whoever  wishes  to  arrive  at  even 
ordinary  speed  must  be  willing  to  go  through  a  course  of 
thorough  drill  on  the  vowels  until  they  are  as  familiar  as 
ordinary  letters.  They  are  quite  as  important  as  the  con- 
sonants. 

23.  There  are  twelve  distinct  vowel  sounds  in  our  lan- 
guage, and  phonography  has  provided  them  with  twelve  dis- 
tinct signs. 

24.  The  Signs  for  the  vowels  are  dots  and  dashes  placed 
in  three  positions  beside  the  consonant  stroke  to  which  they 
belong.     The  following  table  will  indicate  clearly  the  position 
and  character  of  these  dots  and  dashes.     The  letter  Tee  is 
used  only  to  indicate  the  position  of  the  vowel. 


e  as  in 

a  as  in 

a  as  in 

a  as  in 

o  as  in 

oo  as  in 

eel 

ale 

ah 

awe 

old 

pool 

\ 

- 

t  as  in 

-  as  in 

a  as  in 

o  as  in 

u  as  in 

oo  as  in 

it 

met 

at 

on 

up 

foot 

25.  Phonetic  Spelling. — As  noted  in  Sec.  n,  sounded 
letters  only  are  written.  To  illustrate,  gnaw  in  shorthand 
would  be  spelled  n-aw;  etch  would  be  spelled  e-ch  ;  ache  would 
become  a-k.  The  ordinary  spelling  of  a  word  has  nothing  to 
do  with  the  phonographic  manner  of  writing  it.  If  the  student 
is  unfamiliar  with  phonetics,  and  is  in  doubt  as  to  the  exact 
sounds  composing  a  word,  let  him  pronounce  slowly  the  word 
to  be  written,  and  then  pronounce  separately  the  sounds  com- 
posing the  word.  In  other  words,  let  him  spell  the  word  by 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  23 

sound,  or  separate  the  word  into  its  constituent  sounds.  In 
that  manner  the  sounded  elements  only  are  likely  to  be  writ- 
ten. (See  Chapter  on  Phonetics.) 

26.  As  shown  in  the  foregoing  table,  a  heavy  dot  in  the 
first  position,  or  opposite  the  beginning  of  a  stem,  represents  the 
long  sound  of  e,  or  e  as  in  the  words  key,  lea,  see.     A  heavy 
dot  in  the  second  position,  or  opposite  the  middle  of  a  stroke, 
represents  the  long  sound  of  a,  or  a  as  in  pay,  may.     A  heavy 
dot   in    the  third  position,  or  opposite  the  end  of  a  stroke, 
represents  the  Italian  sound  of  a,  or  a  as  in  ah,  arm. 

A  light  dot  in  the  first  position  indicates  the  short  sound 
of  /,  or  i  as  in  it.  A  light  dot  in  the  second  position  indicates 
the  short  sound  of  e,  or  e  as  in  met.  A  light  dot  in  the  third 
position  represents  the  short  sound  of  a,  or  a  as  in  at.  In  like 
manner  the  heavy  and  light  dashes  represent  the  sounds  as 
indicated  in  the  foregoing  table. 

27.  The  Placing  of  vowels  to  stems  is  governed  by  cer- 
tain principles  given  below.     They  are  inserted  always  after 
the  consonant  outline  has  been  made. 

28.  Reading. — The   order    of    reading   consonants    and 
vowels  is  the  same  as  in  longhand.     Read  that   first  which 
comes  first,  or  read  from  left  to  right,  and  from  above  down- 
ward.    In  other  words,  if  a  vowel  is  placed  at  the  left  of  a 
stroke  it  is  read  before  it ;  if  it  is  placed  at  the  right  of  a  stroke 
it  is  read  after  it.     If  a  vowel  occurs  above  a  horizontal  stem, 
as  Kay  or  Em,  it  is  read  before  the  stem.     If  it  is  found  below 
a  horizontal  stroke  it  is  read  after  the  stroke.     Besides  the 
following   illustrations  see  the   Reading   Exercise   connected 
with  this  lesson. 

_:l L _...< (-.. ^ ._-_ 

aid     day     oath    though    egg      go 

29.  The  Position  of  a  vowel  is  reckoned  from  the  begin- 
ning of  a  stem.     The  stems  which  are  made  upward   (L,ay, 


24  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

Ray,  Shay  and  Hay)  commence  on  or  near  the  line  of  writ- 
ing, and  a  first-place  vowel  would  accordingly  be  written  at 
the  beginning  of  the  stem;  as, 


law          raw  ill  lay        shawl         hoe 

30.     When  vowels  occur  between  two  consonant  strokes 
they  are  written  in  accordance  with  the  following  principles  : 

I.  All  first-place  vowels  are  written  beside  the  first  stem; 
as, 

___________  V  .......  U  ......  £  .........  L  .._._<rV~...._>TT_  ..... 

beam          dim        chalk        dock  mill  lock 

II.  Second-place  vowels  are  written  beside  the  first  con- 
sonant when  long  ;  beside  the  second  consonant  when    short  ; 
thus, 


pore       purr       bale         bell  cake  keg  bake        beck 

III.     All  third-place  vowels  are  written  beside  the  second 
consonant  ;  thus, 


rack  bar        doom  cap       pack         lack 

REMARK.  —  The  object  of  the  first  and  third  rules  is  to 
avoid  the  placing  of  vowels  in  angles.  This  secures  greater 
legibility  in  the  reading  of  certain,  words.  For  instance,  if  the 
word  pack  be  written  thus  —  -\;  —  -  by  placing  the  third-place 
light  vowel  in  the  angle,  it  might  be  read  for  pick,  the 
vowel  being  mistaken  for  a  light  first-place  belonging  to 
Kay.  Hence  the  reason  for  the  third  rule.  The  object  of  the 
second  rule  is  to  distinguish  more  surely  between  the  light 
and  heavy  vowels  when  imperfectly  made,  as  a  hea\y  vowel 
would  then  not  be  found  immediately  preceding  a  second 
stem,  nor  would  a  light  second-place  vowel  be  found  after  the 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  25 

first  stem.     The  student  will  bear  in  mind  these  rules  have 
reference  to  vowels  occurring  only  between  stems. 

31.  The  following  illustrations  will  show  the  learner  the 
difference  between  certain  vowel  sounds  which  an  untrained 
ear  may  at  first  confuse. 


-v^- 


pa       paw       far        for          pnll  pool  luck          look 

32.  It  is  sometimes  difficult  to  distinguish  between  the 
sound  of  the  heavy  third-place  dot  and  the  sound  of  the  light 
first-place  dash.  The  heavy  third-place  dot  does  not  occur 
very  often,  and  it  is  always  represented  by  a,  as  in  ah,  far, 
calm,  and  is  a  longer,  heavier  sound  than  the  short  sound  of 
o,  as  in  doll,  represented  by  a  light  first-place  dash>  When  the 
sound  is  represented  by  a,  in  common  orthography  use  the 
heavy  dot  third-place;  when  it  is  represented  by  o,  use  the  light 
first-place  dash. 


calm  balm         doll  fop     shock 

33.  The  consonant  r  has  a  peculiar  power  of  modifying 
any  vowel  sound  immediately  preceding  it,  which  gives  rise  to 
some  difficulties  for  the  beginner,  especially  with  a  preceding 
r,  as  in  air,  dare,  there.     As  the  sound  of  this  vowel  in  most 
parts  of  the  country  more  nearly  approaches  the  short  sound 
of  a  (as  in  a/),  pupils  will  rightly  use  the  third-place  light  dot. 
Pupils  from  England  and  the  eastern  parts  of  the  country  give 
it  a  more  open  sound  approaching  long  a  (as  in  ale),  and  will 
represent   it  by  the  heavy   second  place  dot;   and  it  is  thus 
generally  represented  throughout  this  book. 

34.  In  such  words  as,jftr,fur,  berry,  bury,  some  teachers 
adopt  the  plan  of  vocalizing  with  a  light  second-place  dash 
when   the  sound  is  represented  in  longhand  by  «,  and  when 


26  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

the  sound  is  represented  by  any  other  vowel  than  u  the  light 
second-place  dot  is  used.  Other  teachers  follow  the  sound  as 
they  conceive  it  to  be,  and  use  the  sign  which  most  nearly 
represents  it. 


fur  burr         fir  per  myrr 

35.  Beginners  must  bear  in  mind  that  words  are  written 
as  they  are  sounded,   not  as  they  are  spelled.     Double  conso- 
nants are  not  repeated.      To  illustrate  with  the  word  funny; 
the  double  consonant  is  not  repeated,  and  the  final  y  has  the 
sound  of  short  i. 

Caution  :  Place  vowels  exactly  where  they  belong.  Avoid 
placing  them  midway  between  two  positions  so  that  it  is 
impossible  when  reading  them  to  tell  for  what  position  they 
were  intended. 

THE  RULE  OF  POSITION  FOR  WORDS. 

36.  There  are  three  positions  for  the  consonant  outlines, 
corresponding  with  the  vowel  positions.     An  outline  is  said  to 
be  in  the  first  position  when  its  first  perpendicular  or  inclined 
stroke  is  half  a  consonant  length  above  the  line  of  writing  ;  it 
is  in  the  second  position  when  its  first  perpendicular  or  inclined 
stroke  rests  on  the  line  of  writing  ;    and  it  is  in  the  third  posi- 
tion when  its  first  perpendicular  or  inclined  stroke  is  written 
through   the   line   of    writing.      When   the   outline    consists 
wholly  of  horizontal  characters,  it  must  be  written  nearly  the 
height  of  a  consonant  stroke  above  the  line   of  writing  for 
the  first  position  ;  on   the  line  for  the  second  position,  and  a 
slight  distance  below  the  line  for  the  third  position. 

37.  The    Accented    Vowel    of  a   word   determines    its 
position.      If  the  accented  vowel  is  first  place,  the  outline  of 
the  word  is  written  in  the  first  position  ;  if  the  accented  vowel 
is  second-place,  the  outline  is  written  in  the  second  position  ; 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  27 

if  the  accented  vowel  is  third-place,  the  outline  is  written  in  the 
third  position.  This  rule  secures  greater  legibility,  for  if  the 
vowel  be  omitted,  it  would  not  be  difficult  to  determine  it  by 
the  position  of  the  outline. 

NOTE.  —  An  exception  to  this  rule  is  found  in  a  few  drivatives 
where  legibility  requires  them  to  follow  the  position  of  the  primitive, 
without  regard  to  the  rule  of  position. 

PUNCTUATION. 

38.     The  marks  of  punctuation  used  in  Phonography  are 
as  follows  : 

Perlod  -Y--  Laughter  -~<- 


Dash                ...^r.....  , 

Paragraph  jf  Ot    I, 

?               /  "~" 
Interrogation  ......  »  ____________  .L  ___ 


Exclamation  ........  L_  ApPlaUSO 

Doubt  _____  GL 

Hissing 

Hyphen 


39.  Very  little  use  is  made  of  punctuation  in  phonographic  writing. 
The  period,  the  dash,  and  the  indication  of  capitals  are  the  only  ones 
frequently  used,  as  the  reporter  has  no  time  to  indicate  the  minor 
pauses.  At  times,  however,  the  comma,  colon,  and  semi-colon  are  used 
when  the  reporting  is  not  too  rapid,  and  a  correct  interpretation  of 
the  meaning  of  the  speaker  in  transcribing  would  demand  it.  When 
the  reporter  has  not  time  to  insert  even  the  period,  it  is  indicated 
by  leaving  in  the  notes  a  considerable  space,  to  correspond  with 
the  pauses  of  the  speaker's  voice.  Many  writers  are  in  the  constant 
habit  of  indicating  a  semi-colon  in  the  same  manner.  The  length  of 
the  space  thus  left  will  vary  according  to  the  relative  size  of  one's  char- 
acters, but  if  the  reporter  writes  as  large  a  "  hand  "  as  the  engraved 
exercises  herewith,  the  space  left  should  be  about  three-quarters  of  an 
inch. 

If  the  signs  for  the  interrogation  and  exclamation  marks  are  made 
in  the  ordinary  way  they  might  be  mistaken  for  shorthand  characters, 
hence,  it  is  best  to  use  the  cross  instead  of  the  dot  in  making  them. 

The  Dash  is  made  double  to  avoid  its  being  mistaken  for  Kay. 


28  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

40.  Emphasis  is  indicated  by  the  sign  used  for  capitali- 
zation or  by  the  usual  underscoring  sign  used  in  longhand. 

41.  Initials   of  proper  names  are  best  written  in  long 
hand.     If  there  is  not  time  for  this,  such  characters  should  be 
selected  as  will  indicate  the  common  and  not  the  phonetic 
initial,  as  Pee  not  Ef  should  be  used  as  an  initial  for  Philip. 
When  practicable  it  is  best  to  write  proper  names  in  both  short 
and  long  hand,  especially  if  the  name  be  an  uncommon  one. 

The  stenographic  characters  do  not  indicate  the  spelling  of 
a  name,  but  what  is  quite  as  important,  they  give  its  pronun- 
ciation, which  the  spelling  does  not  give.  Proper  names  when 
written  in  shorthand  should  be  fully  vocalized.  The  following 
alphabet  may  be  used  in  reporting  when  there  is  not  sufficient 
time  to  write  the  initial  in  longhand : 

.  \  )'  I  :  ^..— .. .^  v ./. 

ABCDEF        G        H        IJ 

,^.r..^._^_.  ,_\..-^  .£j..~.x;x..-~ ./.)_ 

K      L   •     M          N        0    P       Q      R       S      T     U      V      W       X         Y     Z 

42.  6"  and  R  are  very  likely  to  be  misread,  and  the  char- 
acter for  6"  should  invariably  be  written  in  longhand. 

43.  Importance    of   the    Reading     Exercises. — Ample 
attention  should  be  given  to  the  following  and  all  subsequent 
engraved  Reading  Exercises,  for  they  are  fully  as  important  as 
the  Writing  Exercises  which  follow  each  lesson.     They  should 
not  be  hurried  through  but  read  leisurely  and  thoroughly,  and 
also  transcribed  into  longhand.    No  amount  of  mental  quickness 
will  compensate  for  lack  of  thorough  drill  in  reading.     The 
following   exercise  is  designed  as  a  drill  on  the  vowels,  and 
the  student  will  remember  that  when   they    occur    between 
stems,  all   first-place    vowels    belong  to  or  are  written  after 
the  first  stem ;  second-place  vowels  belong  to  the   first  stem 
when  they  are  long,  and  to  the  second  stem  when  they  are  short ; 
and  that  all  third-place  vowels  belong  to  the  second  stem. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 

/\  |.  /*C  ^   J~  )">  ).(_      ^  _. 

P      UPWARD jSTROffE'S      _*  <<  X 

5V^"           /^"  I-         I  i         I* 
V__        ' F^N  _  M>,    _  k~\    i 

U 

?_.CT_.5C-V"  ^r 

<?__\_.(__i_\ .. 

s_.. ,  ____. 

/o  3  L1' a 
// 


29 


cr 


'--^ 


v 


30  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

VOWEL  WRITING  EXERCISE. 

44.  In  the  following  and  succeeding  Writing  Exercises 
the  learner  must  adhere  strictly  to  the  rule  of  position.  Words 
containing  first-place  vowels  must  be  written  above  the  line; 
words  with  second-place  vowels  on  the  line ;  and  words  of 
third-place  vowels  through  the  line.  If  the  word  contains 
more  than  one  vowel,  then  the  accented  vowel  determines  the 
position  of  the  word- 

(a)  Tame,  fame,  team,  deep,  cage,  peak,  boom,  knave,  poke,  peach, 
poach,  leap   (Lay-Pee),  foam,  teeth,  teach,  name,  fear,  four  (Ef-Ar),  mar 
(Em-Ray),  doom,  leaf  (Lay-Ef),  cape,  pail  (Fee-Lay),  both,  meek,  chalk, 
mole  (Em-Lay),  leak  (Lay-Kay),  beam,  tape,  comb,  calm,  tar  (Tee-Ar), 
cheap,  sheaf,  reach,  nail  (En-El),  cheek,  choke,  Job,  coach,  cake,  coke, 
game,  faith,  vogue,  sheep,   shape,  pope,  robe   (Ray-Bee),  joke,  daub, 
gauge,  coop,  cope,  theme,  maim. 

(b)  Mop,  top,  cap,  tip,  shock,  cup,  vim,  neck,  thumb,  gum,  chip, 
cash,  pack,  pick,  peck,  check,  path,  badge,  shook,  fag,  fig,  nap,  gem, 
pop,  king,  nip,  mock,  muck,   mack,  knack,   pith,    patch,  pitch,  fetch, 
thick,  fish,  gash,  ink,  tag,  tug,  tub,  touch,  dip,  dog,  dumb,  chap,  chop, 
jib,  judge,  Jack,  jug,  gig,  gang,  miff,  moth,  niche,  knock,  ship,  shop, 
earl  (Ar-Lay). 

(c)  Pay,  paw,  dough,  toe,  go,  caw,  eight,  edge,  law,  gnaw,  no,  shoe, 
sew,  ah,  bow,  ache,  oak,  ape,   obey,  abbey,  eddy,  eighty,  oath,  thaw, 
pshaw,  show,  eel,  ale,  awl,  aim,  woe,  woo,  yea,  hoe,  eke. 

(d)  Bake,  beck;  cope,  cup;  make,  muck;  nail,  knell  (En-El) ;  poke, 
puck ;  beak,  back ;  take,  tuck ;  choke,  check. 

(e)  Bathe,  bath ;  boothe,  booth ;  tooth,  toothe. 

(f)  Veto,  meadow,  shaggy,  shabby,  bevy,  funny,  haughty,  honey, 
Hannah,  boquet,   Mattie,   mummy,   many,  copy,   Kittie,   Cuddy,   pity, 
petty. 

(g)  Fathom,  anthem,  damage,  depth,  effect,  comic,  invoke,  beneath, 
fagot,  cabbage,  Jacob,  enigma,  topic,  vacate,  picnic,  demagogue,  Anthony, 
Timothy,  antique. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  81 


LESSON  IV. 

CIRCLES  AND  LOOPS. 

45.  We  have  thus  far  presented  an  alphabet  by  which 
any  word  in  the  language  may  be  expressed.     Briefer  forms 
are,  however,  necessary  for  the  requisite  speed,  and  from  this 
point  on  the  learner  will  deal  with  successive  steps  of  abbre- 
viation embodied  in  circles,  loops,  hooks,  and  other  devices 
which  afford  means  for  contracting  words,  and  at  the  same 
time  securing  their  full  expression.     Some  of  these  devices 
are  very  old.     The  circle,  for  instance,  is  said  to  have  been 
used  for  the  sound  of  s  by  Mason  in  England  in  1703.     Most 
of  the  hooks  have  been  used  for  one  sound  or  another  for 
many  years,  although  to  Mr.  Graham  and  Mr.  Pitman  belongs 
the  credit  of  the  present  use  of  the  circles  and  hooks. 

46.  The  sibilants  s  and  z,  and  the  sounds  of  st,  str  and  ses, 
are  furnished  with  the  brief  signs  shown  below,  joined  to  the 
stem  Tee. 


.......  I  ____  1  _______  i  __________  k_ 


t-s  t-st          t-str          t-ses 

47.  The  Name  of  the  small  circle  for  s  or  z  is  Iss,  while 
the   name   of  the  stem  sign,  it  will  be  remembered,  is  Es. 
When  joined  to  a  stem  the  circle  may  be  named  in  conjunction 
with  the  stem  ;  as  Pees  instead  of  Pee-Iss. 

48.  The  joining  of  the  circle  to  consonant  stems  seems 
such  an  easy  matter  as  to  require  no  explanation,  but  certain 
rules  are  to  be  observed  to  secure  accuracy  in  reading.     These 
rules  are  as  follows  : 


32  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

(a)  To  straight  steins  the  circle  is  joined  on  the  right 
hand  side,  except  to  Kay,  Gay,  Ray  and  Hay,  to  which  they 
are  written  on  the  upper  side.     In  other  words,  the  circle  is 
joined  by  a  motion  from  left  to  right,  the  same  as  used  in 
writing  the   long  hand   (D.     The  following  illustrations  will 
show  the  method  of  joining  the  circle  to  straight  stems  : 

_____  __\B  _________  .  O—  —  o  _______  6     __  _  ___  o/_  _________  C.  _________  .£»--_  ________ 

Specs  Skays  Iss-Chays       Iss-Rays    Hays          Iss-Hay 

NOTE.  —  This  rule  must  be  carefully  followed,  because  the  circle  has 
a  different  signification  when  written  on  the  other  side  of  straight 
strokes. 

(b)  The  circle  is  joined  to  curved  stems  on  the  inside  of 
the  curve,  or,  in  other  words,  the  circle  must  follow  the  direc- 
tion of  the  curves  ;  thus, 


Sets  Sems        Slays       Iss-Iths        bways 

(c)  Between  two  straight  stems,  both  of  which  are  written 
ia  the  same  direction,  the  circle  should  be  joined  on  the  right- 
hand  side,  or  upper  side  ;  as, 


v h 


Pees-Pee    Tees-Tea       Kays-Kay          Rays-Ray        Hays-Hay 

(d)     The  circle  is  joined  on  the  outer  side  of  two  straight 
stems  that  form  an  angle  at  their  junction  ;  thus, 


Tees-Kay       Pees-Kay       Pees-Chay     Ef-Stay-Tee          Efs-El 

(e)     If  a  circle  occurs  between  a  straight  and  a  curved 
stem,  it  is  joined  on  the  inner  side  of  the  curved  stem  ;  thus, 


Tees-Ef        Fees-En  Tees-En  Ems-Pee 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  33 

(f)     Between   two   curved  stems  the  circle   is   generally 
turned  on  the  inner  side  of  the  first  stem  ;  thus, 


Ems-En  Eiis-Em  Ems-Vee 

49.  Vocalization    of    Stems    With    Circles    Attached. 

When  a  circle  begins  an  outline  it  is  read  before  the  vowel  or 
stroke,  as  in  lines  i  and  2  of  the  Reading  Exercise  of  this  les- 
son, (b)  When  a  circle  ends  an  outline  it  is  read  after  the 
vowel  and  stroke,  as  in  line  3  of  the  Reading  Exercise.  •?• 

To  illustrate  this  more  fully,  take  the  word  cities 

and  it  will  be  found  that  the  initial  circle  is  read  first, 
then  the  vowel  before  the  stem,  then  the  stem,  then  the 
vowel  after  the  stem,  and  lastly  the  final  circle. 

50.  A  Small  Loop  is  used  to  represent   the   sound  of 
st  initially,  and  zd  as  well  as  st  finally,  and  is  made  by  length- 
ening the  small  circle  into  a  loop  extending  less  than  half  the 
length  of  the  stem  ;  thus, 

: s^_XL         .^.wL..A. .. 

step       past         steam  nest       haste  rest       raised 

5 1 .  The  Name  of  the  small  loop  is  Stey.    It  may  also  be 
named  in  conjunction  with  the  stem,  as  Peest  instead  of  Pee- 
Stey. 

52.  The   Stey   loop   should  not  be  used  when  a  vowel 
comes  between   s  and  t ;  nor  when  /  is  followed  by   a  final 
vowel,  as  in 


A ra 


satiny          visit  receipt          bestow        musty 

53.  The  Large  Loop,  extending  about  two-thirds  the 
length  of  the  stem,  and  somewhat  wider  than  the  Stey  loop,  is 
used  to  represent  the  sound  of  str,  when  it  is  a  final  syllable. 


84  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

It  may  also  represent  any  vowel  sound  that  may  occur  between 
the  /  and  r  ;   thus, 

—  ^  n  '  n 

coaster         castor  muster  roaster       Hester        Nestor 

54.  The  Name  of  the  large  loop  is  always  formed  in  con- 
nection with  the  stem,  as  Peester.      When  this  loop  is  spoken 
of  or  referred  to  among  stenographers,  or  between  teachers 
and  pupils,  it  is  entirely  unaccented.      The   first  syllable  is 
accented  to   distinguish  it  from   another  combination  of  sir 
which  is  presented  later  on.    This  loop  is  never  written  initially 
nor  medially,  but  always  finally. 

55.  The  Large  Circle  represents  ses,   sez,   zez,   zes;  as, 


bases          losses  roses  chases  hisses     possessed 

56.  As  shown  above,  the  large  circle  represents  the  sylla- 
ble ses  with  the  short  sound  of  e.     It  may  be  vocalized  for 
other  vowels  by  writing  the  vowel  sign  within  the  circle  ;   thus, 

._  ........  No  ..........  V.  .......  __..a^  ..........  ^  ......  _..... 

basis        season  Sussex          schism 

57.  The  Name  of  the  large  circle  is  Ses. 

NOTE.  —  See  Sec.  112  for  rules  governing  the  use  of  Es  and  Zee. 

58.  Iss  may  follow  Stey  or  Ster  or  Sez  : 


masts  casts  castors  recesses  diseases 

59.     The  following  Reading  Exercise  will  render  familiar 
the  method  of  joining  the  circles  and  loops : 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  35 

READING  EXERCISE. 


*$JL& '^^JLSL 


r 


jfUUi ±.NQ_±L.^I__-^ 

,q-  i  •  ^ 


14. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

60.  (a)  Seat,  Stee;  such,  Iss-Chay;  seek,  Skay;  safe,  Sef;  save, 
Tss-Vee;  soothe,  Iss-Thee;  sash,  Iss-Ish;  lays,  lace,  I/ays;  gnaws,  Ens; 
hose,  Hays;  amaze,  Ems;  sashes,  Iss-Ish-Iss;  suppose,  space,  Specs; 
gasp,  Gays-Pee  ;  exceed,  Kays-Dee  ;  visit,  Vees-Tee  :  chasm,  Kays-Em  ; 


36  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

mask,  Ems-Kay;  deceit,  Dees-Tee;  beseech,  Bees-Chay;  Joseph,  Jays- 
Ef;  spasms,  Spees-Ems;  hasten,  Hays-En. 

(b)  Post,   Pee-Stey   or   Peest ;   toast,  Teest ;   chest,  Chayst ;   coast, 
Kayst ;   nest,  Enst ;  mast,  Ernst ;   lost,  L,ayst ;   erased,  Arst ;  stop,  Stey- 
Pee  ;   state,  Stey-Tee ;  stitch,  Stey-Chey ;   stage,  Stey-Jay ;   steel,  Stey- 
Lay  ;   star,  Stey-Ar  ;   stem,  Stey-Em  ;  stomach,  Stey-Em-Kay. 

(c)  Poster,  Peester  ;  Chester,  Chayster  ;  faster,  Efster ;  vaster,  Vees- 
ter  ;  lustre,  Layster ;  muster,  Emster  ;  Hester,  Hayster ;  roaster,  Rayster. 

(d)  Pieces,  Peeses ;  bases,  Beeses  ;  tosses,  Teeses  ;  chases,  Chayses ; 
gazes,  Gayses  ;  faces,  Efses  ;  vases,  Veeses  ;  ceases,  Esses  ;  laces,  Layses ; 
erases,  Arses ;   Moses,  Emses ;   nieces,  Enses ;  hisses,  Hayses ;  roses, 
Rayses ;  timorous,  Tee-Em-Rays. 

(e)  Soap,  sub,  sob,  sit,  sage,  obese,  sick,  salve,  piece,  apes,  pace, 
pose,  pause,  lees,  loss,  laws,  aims,  paused,  teased,  chased,  just,  casts, 
honest,  most,  lists    hissed,  stoop,  stub,  steel,  stole,  steam,  stem,  pastor, 
posters,  Lester,  master,  jester,  Rochester,   coasters,   toasters,  masters, 
possess,  excesses,  molasses. 

(f)  Passive,  basin,  massive,  besiege,  gossip,  testy,  pasty,  beset,  de- 
ceit, justice,  gazette,  faucet,  gusty,  necessity,  possessive,  excessive,  de- 
sist, Mississippi. 


LESSON  V. 
WORD    SIGNS. 

61.  Brief  and  suggestive  characters  called  word  signs 
are  employed  for  all  the  more  common  words.  They  are  not 
arbitrary  characters,  but  abbreviated  forms,  expressing  one  or 
more  of  the  principal  sounds  of  the  words  they  represent,  and 
in  most  cases  that  part  of  the  outline  is  chosen  which  is  sug- 
gestive of  the  full  word.  Before  one  'can  report  he  must  be 
able  to  write  every  word  that  he  hears  without  the  slightest 
hesitation.  He  must  be  able  to  write  the  outline  of  an  un- 
common word  with  nearly  as  much  ease  as  the  simplest  word 
sign,  and  the  highest  speed  in  any  system  is  reached  only 
when  every  word  in  the  language  becomes  practically  a  word 
sign.  There  is  little  time  to  stop  to  analyze  a  word,  no 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  87 

matter  how  swift  the  mental  process  of  analysis  may  be.  It 
is  true  this  requires  a  vast  amount  of  labor,  but  it  is  a  labor 
which  grows  more  delightful  as  one  proceeds  in  it. 

Although  strictly  speaking  many  forms  in  the  following 
list  are  not  word  signs,  but  unvocalized  outlines,  yet  they 
occur  so  frequently  that  they  are  put  into  a  Hst  to  be  learned 
by  rote  and  perfectly  familiarized  in  connection  with  the  Writ- 
ing Exercises  following. 

62.  The  Position  of  the  word  sign  is  shown  in  the  fol- 
lowing list  by  the  dotted  line.     When  no  line  appears  the  sign 
is  to  be  placed  in  the  second  position.     The  rule  of  position 
explained  in  Sec.  36  is'not  strictly  adhered  to  in  the  formation 
of  word  signs,  as  it  is  sometimes  necessary  for  the  sake  of  dis- 
tinction between  words  having  the  same  outline  to  place  one 
of  them  out  of  position.     Thus,  do  is  placed  on  the  line  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  had,  both  belonging,  according  to  the  rule,  in 
the  third  position.     So  the  sign  for  which,  is  placed  on  the 
line  to  distinguish  it  from  each.     When  position  must  be  thus 
disregarded,  the  word  with  the  light  vowel,  rather  than   the 
word  with  the  heavy  vowel,  is  placed  out  of  position,  and  that 
with  a  heavy  vowel  rather  than  a  word  with  a  diphthong. 

63.  Where  a  hyphen  and  added  letters  occur,  as  thank-edt 
it  indicates  that  the  same  sign  stands  for  both  words. 

64.  The  student  may  follow  his  own  method  of  learning 
the  word  signs.     There  is  no  specially  easy  way.     The  con- 
stant  reading   and  writing  of  them  is  indispensable  to  any 
method.    It  is  important  that  they  should  be  thoroughly  fixed 
in  the  mind,  and  they  are  placed  thus  early  in  the  study  that 
the  student  may  make  frequent  reviews  of  them  at  intervals 
between  the  other  exercises  or  in  connection  with  them      If 
the  sign  with  its  position  is  spoken  by  the  student  at  the  same 
time  it  is  made  with  the  pen,   it  will  help  to  fix  it  in  the 
memory;  thus,  Dee1,  dollar;  Dee2,  do;  Dee3,  had,  etc. 

448464 


as 
i 


-4- 


SIMPLE  CONSONANT  WORD  SIGNS. 

.._.}.— \ _  hope,  party,  happy 


these 
this 

those,  thus 


see,  saw 

say.  so 
us,  use 


\   \  be,  object 


Y 


was 
..\ use  (verb) 


to  be 


subject 


,                        she,  wish 
J  }    ,                          shall 
&f_l  issue                 l_ 

,                                \  | 

^f.                    usual-ly                                      1 

time 
take,  it 
took,  at,  out 

dollar 
do 
had 

x-                       wil1                                       /  / 
f       s~                  allow,  whole                        /     / 

each 
which,  change 

~~T                                                                   7 
^                       here,  hear,  her 

1     ^N                                                   arC                                                          / 

)   7\  ,              our                           /  / 

me,  my 
may,  am,  Mm 
/^  %                                home 

advantage 
large 

common,  kingdom 
—                           come,  country 

In,  any,  never 
know,  no 
X  s                                             own 

because 

v_3                       influence                               
^5,                     next 

give-n 
go,  together 

thing 
^^                           language                          V^    i 
^^s                      long,  along                  '    \^ 

if 
i        for,  fact, 
V                    few 

1     ->.                   way                                   V.      i 

j       ^v            away                                        v 
-^-, 

s-     s-             your                                             p 
f       6                     yes,  yours                              V 

ever 
have, 
Ste_J^_          however 

several 

o                     is,  his                                     / 
o                    as,  has                            ^       / 

think 
;                thank,  thousand 

Is  his,  is  as,  his  is,  his  has 
O              as  his,  as  has,  has  his,  has  as        , 

O    J?                  first          ( 

(they,  them, 

PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  39 

65.  When  two  or  more  words  have  the  same  sign,  as  hope, 
party,  or  is  and  his,  the  context  will  readily  enable  the  writer 
to  distinguish  between  them. 

66.  The  plural  number  and  the  possessive  case  of  nouns 
is  indicated  by  adding  Iss  to  the  word  sign  ;  as, 


_____________  v 

N» 

parties        things  homes  subjects 

67.  The  third  person  of   the  singular  number  and  the 
perfect  participles  of  verbs  are  expressed  by  the  addition  of 
Iss,  Ses,  or  Stey  ;  as, 

_JL_  ..........  L  _______  ^  ......  ^i*L_  ......  -  ........ 

takes          thinks  influences  influenced     commonest 

68.  Iss  and  Ses  are  also  used  to  add  self  and  selves  to  pro- 
nouns; as, 


myself      himself  herself     yourselves    ourselves 

69.  Ses1  may  also   represent  is  as,  and  his  has  ;  and  Ses2 
is  used  for  as  is,  and  as  his. 

70.  Derivatives  from  the  words  of  this  list  may  be  formed 
by  writing  the  character  representing  the  derivatives,  either 
joined  or  disjoined  to  the  word  signs  ;  as, 


uncommon       commoner        commonly       happier      subjected 

NOTE.  —  Sometimes  when  words  are  written  in  full  it  is  necessary  to 
disjoin  a  letter  to  form  the  suffix,  as,  cautiously.  In  phonographic 
nomenclature  the  colon  is  used  to  indicate  that  the  stems  are  to  be  dis- 
joined. 


40  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

71.  Word  Signs.  Advantage,  allow,  along,  am,  any,  are,  as.  as 
has,  at,  away,  be,  because,  by,  charge,  charged,  come,  common,  com- 
monest, commonly,  country,  do,  dollar,  each,  ever,  fact,  few,  first,  for, 
give,  given,  had,  has,  has  as,  have,  hear,  her,  here,  him,  his,  hope,  how- 
ever, if,  in,  influence,  is,  is  his,  it,  its,  it  is,  kingdom,  know,  language, 
large,  long,  may,  me,  much,  my,  never,  no,  our,  out,  next,  own,  see,  sev- 
eral, she,  shall,  so,  subject  take,  time,  thank,  them,  these,  they,  thing, 
think,  this,  those,  thousand,  thus,  to  be,  together,  up,  us,  use  (noun),  use 
(verb),  usual,  usually,  was,  way,  which,  whole,  why,  will,  wish,  yes,  your. 

Derivatives. — Hopes,  parties,  subjects,  times,  takes,  its,  it  is,  itself, 
does,  advantages,  kingdoms,  countries,  country's,  comes,  gives,  facts, 
thinks,  thanks,  thousands,  this  is,  this  has,  themselves,  sees,  uses  (noun), 
uses  (verb),  wishes,  hers,  herself,  ourselves,  myself,  himself,  knows, 
owns,  influences,  influenced,  language,  yours,  yourself,  yourselves. 

Sentences. — i.  It  may  be  seen  at  any  time  in  my  niece's  home.  2. 
Several  think  it  will  be  given  away.  3.  Why  will  she  use  her  influence 
for  them  in  this  way?  4.  Joseph  will  this  day  take  the  last  stage  for 
home.  5.  They  will  come  out  here  together.  6.  Her  influence  will 
do  much  for  them.  7.  Your  income  will  be  large.  8.  Which  are  to 
to  be  given  away?  9.  She  may  think  so.  lo.  Are  they  home?  II. 
Will  they  go  our  way?  12.  Why  do  they  buy  so  many?  13.  Will 
they  allow  it  to  be  given  away?  14.  If  she  is  here  she  will  have  her 
own  way.  15.  Such  things  are  common  enough  in  this  country.  16. 
She  uses  our  language  in  her  own  way.  17.  It  is  usual  for  them  to  be 
»een  together. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  41 

* 

LESSON  VI. 
DIPHTHONGS. 

72.  A   diphthong  is   the  union  in   one  syllable  of  two 
eowels   both   of  which  are  sounded-     There  are  four   diph- 
thongs in  English,  and  they  are  found  in  the  words  by,  oil, 
bow,  few, 

73.  In  shorthand  they  are.  represented  by  the  following 
angular  marks  :        v 


t'asin      01  as  in    owasiu   eioasiii 
time  oil  owl          dew 

74.  The  placing  of  these  diphthong  signs  to  consonant 
outlines  is  governed  by  the  same  rules  as  given  for  vowels. 
The  direction  of  these  signs,  unlike  the  dash  signs   for   the 
vowels,  is  never  changed  to  correspond  with  the  direction  of 
the  consonant  signs  : 

Jv_.;  .JA 

/ — ""\       i< 

< 

tie  my  coy        toy        mew         due 

75.  The  sound  of  u  immediately  preceded  by  an  r,  as  in 
rude,  bruise,  etc.,  is  not  properly  a  diphthong,  but  a  vowel, 
and  the  third-place  heavy  dash  is  used  to  represent  it. 

76.  The  sound  of  uo   in   buoy  may  be  represented  by 

shading  the  character  for  ow ;  thus, \. _buoy. 

VA 

77.  There  are  a  few  words  in  which  two  vowel  signs  are 
required  to  be  written  to  one  stroke,  in  which  case  the  vowel 


42  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

which   is   sounded  next  to  the  consonant  should   be   placed 
nearer  thereto  ;  as, 

T          \     A 

•         -  -  —    .....  c 


idea     genii    payee      Ohio 

78.     When    convenient    the    diphthong    signs    may    be 
joined  ;  as, 


iota       eyed        bow          cue 

SECOND  LIST  OF  WORD  SIGNS. 

79.  In  the  following  list  a  few  word  signs  involving  the 
halving  principle  are  placed  out  of  their  logical  order  that  we 
may  avail  ourselves  of  their  use  in  the  Reading  and  Writing 
Exercises  which  follow. 


X 

I,  high 

aye            how 

he 

new,  knew 

now 

^ 

v/"                \P 

- 

( 

(- 

I  will,  highly 

higher      highest 

not 

that 

without 

\ 

\ 

So 

f 

/° 

\ 

1 

Saturday 

speak    expect-ed-ation    special-ty    business     satisfy-ed     suggest-ed-ion 

satisfactory 


single  similar  some         consume   United  States  necessary 

80.  I-Tick.  —  A  small  initial  tick  in  the  direction  of  the 
Pee,  Chay  or  Ray,  joined  to  the  following  word,  is  used  to 
represent  the  pronoun  //  thus, 

Z  ............  ....1  ....... 

I  will  I  am  I  do          I  think       1  know     I  shall 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


43 


"V 


v^-f 


^.t£:t.&.^.^.^^-%« 

^.^...^..W^..^..^.-^.-^.. 

£  >>  ^  >-*  Arxf '  X  c  tfe  ^  >i 


/  ^«^^       x X  .^-          |  I  /*     x    /     I  -- ,      %          •*^p"«        y^ ^ 

..  ..  C- 1-  --^--I-CA >  - 


44  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

81.  (a)  Pie,  pies,  vie,  vies,  die,  dice,  sigh,  high,  alley,  arise  (Arsj, 
sign,  sky,  Silas,  styles,  cite,  sight,  side,  nice,  nicer  (Ens- Ray),  nicest, 
ice,  eyes,  spice,  chime,  rhyme  (Ar-Em),  slices,  sliced,  enticed,  piety,  lyre 
(Lay-Ar),  abide,  desire  (Dees-Ar),  deny,  tyro  (Tee-Ray),  virus  (Vee-Rays), 
dignify,  terrify. 

(d)  Boys,  coy,  poise,  toys,  toil  (Tee-Lay),  voyage,  enjoys,  oil,  spoil 
(Spec-Lay),  soil,  alloy,  decoy,  noise,  noised,  noises,  ahoy,  hoist,  hoists, 
envoy,  joist,  voice,  voices,  Savoy. 

(c)  Bow,  vow,  vows,  mouse,  sour  (Iss-Ar),  cow,  stout,  thou,  Dow, 
owl,  cowl  (Kay-Lay),  vouch,  conch,  scow,  endow,  south,  house,  arouse 
(Ars),  aroused  (Ar-Stey),  ounce. 

(d)  Pews,  views,  sue,  accuse,  accused,  accuses,  yews,  Jews,  cube, 
dnpe,  fuje,  effuse,  effuses,  effused,  fume,  lure  (Lay-Ar),  hue,  muse,  ruse 
(Rays),  suit,  stew,  nephew,  puny,  refuse  (Ray-Efs),  sinew,  venue,  ensue, 
rescue  (Rays-Kay),  bureau  (Bee-Ray),  obtuse,  Mayhew. 

(e)  Unite,  Tioga,  Cayuga,  occupy. 

(/)    Tower  (Tee-Ar),  shower  (Ish-Ar),  Ohio,  idea,  iota,  ivy. 

(g)  Word  Signs. — Aye,  eye,  he,  highly,  how,  knew,  new,  now,  that, 
high,  higher,  highest,  speak,  expect,  special,  suggest,  satisfy,  Saturday, 
expected,  expectation,  satisfied,  suggestion,  single,  United  States,  neces- 
sary, similar,  business,  some,  consume. 


LESSON  VII. 

PETOID  WORD  SIQN5. 

82.  A  Petoid  is  a  quarter  length  Pee ;  Tetoid,  a  quarter 
length  Tee,  and  so  with  the  other  straight  stems.  Hence,  the 
following  word  signs  are  called  Petoids.  These  names  are 
convenient  in  referring  to  these  signs;  as,  Betoid1,  for  instance, 
is  the  name  of  the  word  sign  for  all. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  45 

83.  They  are  also  called  vowel  word  signs,  as  they  are 
the  vowel  signs,  written  in  changed  directions,  for  the  respec- 
tive words.  The  signs  for  of  and  all  are  in  the  first  position 
because  their  vowels  are  first-place  vowels.  As  the  vowel 
signs,  when  not  written  beside  a  consonant  stroke,  can  be 
written  conveniently  in  but  two  positions,  all  the  first-place 
vowels,  when  used  as  word  signs,  are  retained  in  their  proper 
positions,  while  the  second  and  third-place  vowel  signs  are 
written  on  the  line.  Hence,  the  reason  for  the  positions  of 
the  word  signs  composing  this  group.  In  actual  work  these 
signs  are  a  trifle  longer  than  one-quarter  of  a  stem,  but  care 
should  be  used  not  to  make  them  too  long,  as  they  might  be 
mistaken  for  half  sized  characters,  explained  later  on. 

(Third  List.) 

VOWEL  WORD  SIGNS. 


of 

all 

to 

two 
too 

or 

already 
awe 

but  oh  on          ought          should  who-m 

owe 


a-n  and  the 

84.  All  the  above  word  signs  should  be  written  down- 
ward with  the  exception  of  on  and  should,  which  should  gen- 
erally be  written  upward. 

85.  The  Tick. —  The  is  joined   as  a  final  tick,  sloping 
upward  or  downward  in  the  direction  of  Pee,  Chay,  or  Ray. 
It  is  preferable,  however,  to  select  the  tick  which  when  joined 
makes  the  sharpest  angle.     It  should  not  be  used  as  an  initial 
tick.     When  the  cannot  be  conveniently  expressed  by  the  tick 
the  dot  sign  should  be  used. 


46  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

I  *»-/  /O 


,-JL ~.. 

which  the  in  the  is  the  it  is  the  may  the 


should  the          who  the        as  the 

(/ .    _V 

of  the  all  the  but  the        owe  the  on  the  ought  the 

86.     When  this  tick  follows  the  Stey  loop,  it  should  not 
cross  the  stem,  but  should  be  made  as  illustrated  below: 


post  the         cast  the        master  the        just  the 

87.  A-An-And  Tick. — A  small  horizontal  or  perpendic- 
ular tick  is  used  to  express  a,  an,  and: 

] ^ .t ±* Z_ T  . 

and  do         and  in  and  is  and  since          a  check          a  boy 

88.  For  ease  and  certainty  of  reading  this  tick  should  be 
made  initially  only,  although  it  is  sometimes  used  as  a  final 
tick,  where  an  initial  joining  is  impracticable,  and  when  used 
as  a  final  tick,  Ketoid  should  be  used  rather  than  Tetoid,  as  in 
the  phrase, 

Because  a  stop  was  necessary. 

Some  writers,  however,  prefer  to  make  it  initial  only, 
using  the  dot  sign  for  a,  an,  and,  when  it  cannot  be  joined 
initially,  and  this  practice  we  strongly  recommend. 

89.  When  the  tick  for  he  stands  alone  or  begins  a  phrase 
it  must  rest  on  the  line,  and  is  generally  written  downward  to 
distinguish  it  from  should.       It  is  sometimes  made  final,  in 
which  case  the  context  must  distinguish  it  from  the. 

The  initial  tick  for  /  is  always  in  the  first  position. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  47 

90.  These  ticks  have  no  position  of  their  own,  but  take 
the  position  of  the  words  to  which  they  are  joined,  with  the 
exception  of  and  the,  and  a,   which,    when    standing   alone, 
should  have  the  first  stroke  rest  upon  the  line   of  writing. 
They  are  thus  distinguished  from  and  should,  and  but,  in  which 
phrases  the  second  stroke  falls  upon  the  line  of  writing;  as, 

.......  ....-?.....  ..........  -7.  ........  -  ..........  rt..-  ......  -  .....  -,  ____  ..................  _  ..........  V  ..........  Jf  ...................  f. 

and  the  and  should  and  but        and  a        and  I        said  he    he  said       I  said 

91.  Phrasing.  —  The  student  may  learn  at  this  point  that 
simple  words  are  frequently  joined  into  phrases.     Not  being 
accustomed  to  join  words  in  longhand  writing,  phrasing  may 
seem  awkward  at  first,  but  the  practice  soon  becomes  one  of  the 
most  fascinating  features  of  shorthand,  as  it  increases  both 
speed  and  legibility.     Something  more  will  be  said  upon  this 
subject  later  on  ;  for  the  present  it  is  enough  to  know  that 
only   those  words   which   belong   to   the   same   grammatical 
phrase  should  be  joined.     In  other  words,  if  a  pause  inter- 
venes between  the  words,  they  should  not  be  phrased.    Some- 
times the  same  words  are  joined  in  a  phrase  which  at  other 
times  would  be  separated.     The  following  will  illustrate  the 
method  of  joining  word  signs  into  phrases  : 


it  may         do  they  in  these  in  this  in  those 

92.  Word  signs  are  sometimes  vocalized  when  phrased  to 
secure  very  clear  distinctions  ;   as, 

.....  UN  ............  U  .........  ..U  .........  .7^?.  .......  7C. 

it  may  take  me  take  him  give  me  give  him 

93.  The  circle  Iss  is  often  joined  to  add  is,  his,  as,  has 
or  us.     Some  judgment  must  be  exercised,  however,  in  join- 
ing the  circle  to  add  these  words,  as  they  sometimes  conflict. 


48  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

Thus,  ~~°  ^  may  stand  for  gives,  give  his  or  give  us-  When 
the  context  is  not  likely  to  determine  which  is  meant,  the  signs 
must  be  disjoined  and  the  stem  Es  must  be  used  for  us. 

94.  The  first  word  of  a  phrase  generally  determines  its 
position.     Thus  phrases  beginning  with  /  or  any  first  position 
word  sign,  must  commence  above  the  line.      Phrases  begin- 
ning with  he  must  commence  on  the  line.     Phrases  commenc- 
ing with  how  must  begin  under  the  line,  as  will  be  seen  by  the 
accompanying  Reading  Exercise. 

95.  Prefixes  and  Affixes  will  be  fully  treated  in  a  sub- 
sequent chapter.      A  few  occur  so   frequently  it  is  deemed 
best  to  present  them  at  this  point,  that  we  may  have  a  greater 
variety  of  words  to  draw  from  in  the  illustration  of  subsequent 
principles.     CON  or  COM  is   expressed  by  a  light  dot  at  the 
beginning  of  a  word  ;  as, 

_i£  ____  1  __________  \. 

conscious         committee         compose 

(a)  The  reporter  generally  implies  con,  com  or  cog  by 
writing  the  remainder  of  the  word  under  the  preceding 
word;  as, 


I  will  concede. 

96.     Ing  is  expressed  by  a  light  dot  at  the  end  of  a  word  ; 
as, 


doing       seeing        talking 


97.  When  it  is  desirable  to  distinguish  ing  from  ings  the 
dot  may  be  repeated  for  ings.  There  is  nothing  to  prevent  the 
writer  from  using  the  stroke  for  Ings,  if  he  so  desires,  and, 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  49 

indeed,  it  should  be  used  when  this  affix  forms  part  of  a  noun, 
or  when  it  follows  the  iss  circle  ;  thus, 


doings  misgivings  sayings  etchings         causing 

98.  -ing  the.     The  affix  ing  and  an  immediately  follow- 
ing the  is  expressed  by  disjoining  the  tick  for  the,  and  writing 
it  in  the  place  of  the  ing  dot ;  thus, 

U       ^         \        \        r 

/ V-  / •/ 

taking  the         showing  the  posting  the      subjecting  the       selling  the 

99.  -ing-a-an-and.     The   affix  ing  and  an  immediately 
following  a,  an  or  and  is  expresssed  by  disjoining  the  tick  for 
a-n-d,  and  writing  it  in  the  place  of  the  dot  for  ing ;  thus, 

*-"  (  1 

0    x__  _ 

singing  a-n-d          thinking  a-u-d          giving  a-n-d 

100.  When  /  occurs  between  two  words  closely  related 
it  may  be  joined  by  a  straight  tick,  that  is,  in  the  direction  of 
Tee  or  Kay.     It  will  not  conflict  with  the  a-tick,  but  it. must  be 
Ketoid  or  Tetoid  to  distinguish  it  from  the  he-tick  which  is 
always  slanting  : 

If. If.    .  CLO  of 

1  T~-, 1 T~ 

so  I  said  so  he  said  as  I  said  as  he  said 

101.  In  accordance  with  a  principle  stated  later  on,  to  a 
may  be  represented  by  Tetoid  under  the  line  and  to  the  by 
Petoid  under  the  line.     Retoid  under  the  line  represents  how. 


to  the      to  a          how 


50 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


—  9     p         \\ 


\ 
v...^'.'./.'..™....j 


.I.-.^T. 


i 


i 

._.  ..../_................    /.y?  L_/...(°...-P  _______  £.(*_.  f>...fT^..f...  . 

,5__    /-TICK.  A....1.._1.4...77._t  J.  (  ...?..1A..^.^..^  J..  A. 


-i..  +..  *...*. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  51 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

102.  (a)  Of,  all,  to,  two,  too,  or,  already,  but,  oh,  owe,  on,  ought, 
should,  who,  whom,  a,  an,  and,  the. 

(b)  Up  the,  hope,  by  the,  be  the,  to  be  the,  subject  the,  take 
the,  time  the,  at  the,  it  is  the,  do  the,  had  the,  each  the,  which  the,  much 
the,  because  the,  give  the,  if  the,  or  the,  ever  the,  have  the,  think  the, 
thank  the,  that  is  the,  this  is  the,  see  the,  so  the,  use  the,  was  the,  is  the, 
as  the,  wish  the,  shall  the,  hear  the,  are  the,  here  is  the,  may  the,  in  the, 
know  the,  own  the,  influence  the,  why  the. 

(c)  Save  the,  sing  the,  wishes  the,  stop  the,  back  the,  knows  the, 
post  the,  stole  the. 

(d)  And  do,  and  may,  and  say,  andjthink,  and  several,  and  give,  and 
of,  and  or,  and  already,  and  but,  and  owe,  and  on,  and  ought,  and  should, 
and  who,  and  a,  and  the,  a  thing,  a  way,  a  book,  an  hour,  an  oar,  an 
advantage. 

(e)  Doing  the,  thinking  the,  showing  the,  asking  the,  wishing  the, 
hoping  the,  composing  the,  comparing  the,  committing  the,  confessing 
the,  buying  a,  oiling  a,  seeing  a,  reaching  a,  hearing  a. 

(f )  It  may,  which  may,  they  may,  each  may,  much  may,  she  may, 
will  do,  will  be,  will  have,  will  think,  give  them,  give  this,  give  that, 
give  those,  give  him,  give  me,  give  my,  take  them,  take  him,  own  them, 
see  him,  charge  him,  know  them,  hear  me,  hear  them,  in  them,  by  me, 
by  them,  it  is,  it  was,  shall  be,  by  me,  shall  have,  if  they,  shall  do. 

Commence  the  following  phrases  above  the  line  :  I  hope,  I  shall,  I 
do,  I  had,  I  take,  I  charge,  I  come,  I  give,  I  think,  I  thank,  I  see,  I  say, 
I  was,  I  use,  I  will,  I  hear,  I  am,  I  know,  I  never. 

Commence  on  the  line  of  writing  :  He  hopes,  he  takes,  he  charges, 
he  conies,  he  gives,  he  thinks,  he  has,  he  shall,  he  will,  he  may,  he 
knows,  who  may,  who  will. 

Commence  under  the  line  :  How  it,  how  do,  how  much,  how  easy, 
how  are,  how  many. 

(g)  i.     It  may  be  ready  (Ray-Dee)  in  time  for  the  next  mail  (Em- 
Say).     2.     Give  my  best  wishes  to  the  boys.    3.     It  was  of  some  advan- 
tage to  us  all.    4.     I  hope  you  will  use  your  influence  for  them.     5.     I 
shall  take  charge  of  these  things  for  some  time  to  come.    6.     This  may 


52  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

seem  to  be  too  large.  7.  I  hope  they  will  soon  take  .-  ^vantage  of  it. 
8.  I  know  it  will  be  given  away.  9.  I  will  give  them  to  him  in  time 
for  the  first  mail  (Em-Lay).  10.  The  study  of  this  language  is  new  to 
us  and  takes  up  much  of  our  time.  n.  Now  they  will  see  life  (Lay-Ef) 
as  it  is  in  a  large  city.  12.  It  will  be  of  much  advantage  to  them  13. 
They  will  not  allow  him  to  go  away  just  now.  14.  This  is  no  reason  why 
they  should  charge  so  much.  15.  It  is  not  so  cheap  as  it  seems  at  first, 
16.  I  think  it  will  last  a  long  time.  17.  I  have  seen  many  changes 
since  I  came  here  last  season.  18.  I  will  look  (Lay-Kay)  for  them 
early  (Ar-Lay)  in  the  day.  19.  I  saw  them  pass  by  in  a  new  buggy. 
20.  I  have  not  said  all  I  desire  (Dees-Ar)  to  say  on  this  subject.  21. 
He  may  not  know  how  to  use  them  to  advantage.  22.  I  see  no  reason 
why  you  should  change  your  way  of  thinking.  23.  I  will  allow  him  so 
much  for  his  house. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  53 

LESSON  VIII. 
THE  LETTER  H. 

103.  The  letter  h  represents  only  a  whispered  utterance, 
a  slight  blowing  or  expulsion  of  the  breath,  and  hence  is 
called  an  aspirate.  To  aspirate  a  vowel  is  to  sound  h  before  it. 
The  sound  of  h  is  most  frequently  represented  by  writing  a 
light  dot  before  the  vowel  or  diphthong  which  follows  it  ;  as, 


hate  homely  hall  whist 

NOTE.  —  In  the  combination  wh,  this  method  of  representing  h  is 
not  phonetic,  but  follows  the  method  of  the  common  orthography. 
(See  Appendix). 

104.  Uses  of  the  Hay  Stroke.  —  It  may  be  stated  as  a 
general  rule  that  Hay  is  used  only  when  it  is  necessary  to  afford 
a  position  for  a  vowel,  as  in  writing  the  words,  hoe,  hay,  Hugh, 
etc.  Specific  rules  may  be  given  as  follows  : 

(a)  Use  Hay  when  it  is  the  only  consonant  stroke  in  the 
word,  as  haw,  haste,  house. 

(b)  Use  Hay  when  h  follows  an  initial  vowel,  as  ahead. 

(c)  Use  Hay  in  words  of  two  or  more  syllables  when 
initial  h  forms  a  syllable  with  a  following  vowel,  as  haughty, 
hasten,  but  not  homely  . 

(d)  The  Name  of  the  h-dot  is  Heh. 

NOTE.  —  The  letter  h  usually  proves  troublesome  to  beginners, 
especially  if  they  attempt  to  write  general  matter  before  they  have 
learned  all  the  principles,  and  yet  to  the  practiced  writer  it  is  easy  of 
representation.  Some  writers  provide  a  small  tick  written  in  the  direc- 
tion of  Chay  for  the  aspirate,  but  which  is  generally  discarded  by  the 
active  reporter  or  the  amanuensis.  We  regard  this  use  of  the  tick  at 
any  time  of  doubtful  utility,  as  the  two  methods  given  above  are 
ample  for  all  purposes.  Ticks  are  so  frequently  used  for  such  words  as 
/,  he,  the,  and  the  oid  word  signs,  that  it  is  not  well  to  extend  its  use  to 
the  letter  h.  Experience  and  observation  will  soon  teach  the  student 
to  quickly  and  surely  determine  when  to  use  the  dot  and  when  the 
stem. 


54 


READING  EXERCISE. 

........  1  ..........  a  .......  ........  ^  ........  } 


r... 


.<±<^£3L ^k <tl <i 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  55 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

105.  (a)  Heap,  hope,  heat,  hate,  hitch,  hatch,  hedge,  hath,  hash, 
hush,  hail,  hall,  howl,  hire,  Horr,  hair  (Ar),  hang,  highway,  hugely,  whiz, 
whistle,  whist,  heath,  hood,  Hoyle,  Hudson,  hulk  (El-Kay),  hammock, 
humility,  hymn,  Hindoo. 

(b)  Hug,  hog,  hack,  hiccough,  hawk,  hoax,  hoggish,  hearse,  horse, 
hoarse  (Ars). 

(c)  Use  the  stem  sign  in  the  following  words:    Hiss,  ahoy,  haste, 
holy,  hollow,  hilly,  hallow  (Hay-Lay),  hasty,  hero,  hurry,  Harry  (Hay- 
Ray),  hyena,  honey,  heavy,  hobby,  husky,  haughty,  house-dog,  house- 
keeping, hubbub,  high,  huffy,  huzzy,  hustle  (Hays-Lay),  hyacinth,  hie, 
harvest,  (Hay-Ray-Veest),  hassock,  hawser  (Hays- Ray),  hyssop. 


LESSON  IX. 
DIFFERENT  USES  OF  AR,  RAY,  LAY  AND  EL, 

ALSO  ISH,  SHAY,  Es  AND  ZEB. 

1  06.  It  is  a  general  principle  that  the  downward  stroke 
of  these  stems  is  used  to  indicate  a  preceding  vowel,  and  the 
upward  stroke  is  used  to  indicate  that  the  word  begins  with  a 
consonant  and  not  with  a  vowel.  Thus,  air,  oar,  ark  and  irregu- 
lar are  written  with  the  downward  character,  called  Ar  ;  while 
rye,  row,  rise,  robe  and  regular  are  written  with  the  upward 
character,  Ray.  The  following  specific  rules  are  of  quite 
general  application  and  cover  most  of  the  words  in  which 
these  stems  occur.  They  also  increase  legibility  by  securing 
a  variety  of  outlines  for  words  containing  the  same  stems. 

107.  General  Use  of  Ar.  —  Use  Ar  when  preceded  by  an 
initial  vowel,  or  when  r  ends  a  word  ;  as, 


poor      bar 


56  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

Except, 

I.     Always  use  Ray  preceding  Tee,  Dee,  Chay,  Jay,  Ith, 
En  or  Sen;  as, 


aright      arrayed      arch  urge        arena 

II.     Always  use  Ray  following  Ith,  Em  or  Ray ;  as, 


Thayer  mire  rare 

III.  The  sound  of  final  r  preceded  by  iss  or  ses  in  the 
majority  of  words,  is  expressed  by  Ray,  because  it  joins  with 
greater  facility  ;  as, 


answer          officer        successor    possessor 

1  08.     General  Use  of  Ray.  —  Use  Ray  when  r  begins  a 
word  or  when  it  is  followed  by  a  final  vowel  ;  as, 

_kL  .w      \L 

V 

rate  rich  barry  berry 

Except, 

Always  use  Ar  before  M  ;  as, 


arm         room 

109.  General  Use  of  Lay. — L,ay  is  used  at  the  begin- 
ning of  words  whether  preceded  by  a  vowel  or  not ;  and  at  the 
end  of  words  whether  followed  by  a  vowel  or  not ;  as, 


lime  allege  bell  July 

1 10.     The  following  exceptions  are  made  to  the  foregoing 
rule  for  the  sake  of  greater  legibility  and  ease  of  execution  : 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  57 

I.     Always  use  El  before  and  after  En  or  Ing  ;  as, 

.._c;_._a  ........  x  _____  .IT... 

lion  long  nail  kingly 

II     Use  El  before  Em,   Kay  or  Gay  if  preceded    by   a 
vowel  ;  as, 


alike  alum        Allegheny 

III     Use  El  after  Ef,   Vee  or  Ray  unless  followed  by  a 
final  vowel  ;  as, 


file  folly  vale  valley  royal          royally 

NOTE.  —  The  above  rules  are  not  inflexible,  but  are  subject  to  such 
exceptions  as  may  be  necessary  to  avoid  inconvenient  outlines,  which 
might  result  if  the  rules  were  strictly  adhered  to. 


USES   OF    ISH  AND    SHAY. 

in.  The  downward  stroke  Ish,  is  generally  found  more 
convenient,  but  when  it  precedes  Lay  it  must  be  written 
upward,  as  in  the  words  shale,  shallow,  shawl,  etc.  In  other 
cases  the  pupil  may  use  whichever  is  suited  to  his  hand. 


USES  OF  Es  AND  ZEE. 

112.  The  sound  of  s  or  z  is  generally  represented  by  the 
circles  and  loops  already  explained.  There  is  a  small  class  of 
words,  however,  in  which  the  stroke  signs  must  be  used  in 
order  to  afford  a  position  for  the  vowel.  The  following  prin- 
ciples will  indicate  clearly  when  the  stem  signs  should  be  used 
instead  of  the  circle  : 


58  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

m 

I.     When  Es  or  Zee  is  the  only  stem  in  the  word  ;  as, 

^       T 


ace          cease        seize        saw 


II.     When  a  word  begins  with  a  vowel  followed  by  ^  or 
z  ;  -as, 


ask          escape         easel 


NOTE. — It  will  be  remembered  that  a  vowel  cannot  be  read  before 
an  initial  circle,  and  if  we  should  attempt  to  write  ask  with  a  circle  we 
should  have _  sack  as  a  result. 


III.     When  s  or  z  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and  is 
followed  by  a  vowel  ;  as, 


racy  rosy  Lacey  dizzy  fallacy  pursue 

IV.  When  two  concurrent  vowels  immediately  follow  or 
precede  ^  or  z  the  stem  should  be  used,  as  it  furnishes  more 
convenient  room  for  inserting  the  vowels  ;  as, 


science          chaos  Siam  pious        Suez 

V.     When  a  word  begins  with  the  sound  of  z  it  must  be 
represented  by  the  stroke  Zee  ;  as, 

* 

zeal  zero  zenith          zest          zodiac 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE- 


59 


6 


-' 


..es™,zeE_  ...j..  Jr.).  X)'.  xO'.  L  -.'.xf.  £'"£ 


60  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

113.  (a)  Ear,  ore,  air,  ere,  oar,  ire,  era,  Erie,  arm,  ark,  hark,  poor, 
bar,  burr,  bore,  bear,  pair,  pier,  pore,  tear,  tore,  tar,  tire,  par,  four,  fear, 
fire,  boor,  veer,  jeer,  lore,  lure,  lyre,  sore,  sear,  soar,  store,  stair,  Caesar, 
saucer. 

(b)  Row,   rye,     row,   rue,    ray,    rose,  rise,  raise,     rote,  rate,    ride, 
wrought,  rude,  raid,  right,  wrong,  reap,  rope,  robe,  rich,  wretch,  reach, 
ridge,  ready,  reason,  root,  rock,  rogue,  risk. 

(c)  Urge,     arch,    earth,    arrayed,   aright,   arena,    erroneous,   vary, 
Archie,  hearth,  Thayer,  mar,  myrrh,  mire,  rear,  rare,  roar,  answer,  officer, 
successor,  possessor,  Moor,  sorry,  sorrow,  story,  starry,  Cicero,  Pern,-, 
parry,  berry,  fiery,  ivory,  merry,  theory,  thorough,  narrow,  Henry,  gory. 

(d)  Lame,  lime,  leap,  loop,  leaf,  leave,  live,  love,  loaf,  latch,  lodge, 
lock,  like,  luck,  look,  elbow,  alibi,  olive,  allude,  appeal,  pill,  pale,  bell, 
tile,  toil,  dell,  dale,  earl,  early,  holy,  hollow,  folly,  felloe,  fellow. 

(e)  Lion,  Illinois,  lesson,   listen,   kneel,  nail,  null,  inhale,  file,  vale, 
royal. 

(f )  Shell,  shale,  shawl,  Shiloh,  Ashley. 

(g)  Ask,  asp,  acid,  Asa,  ace,  cease,  sue,  racy,  rosy,  cozy,  busy,  escape, 
easier,  Nassau,  hazy,  lasso,    Jessie,   science,   essence,   ease,   zeal,   zero, 
Zouave,  zest,  zealous. 


LESSON  X. 
BRIEF  SIGNS  FOR  W  AND  Y. 

114.  These  signs  are  provided  for  the  sake  of  securing 
greater  brevity  and  avoiding  awkward  junctions.  The  brief 
Way  is  a  small  semi-circle  opening  either  to  the  right  or  left ; 
the  brief  Yay  is  a  small  semi-circle  opening  either  upward  or 
downward.  The  brief  Way  is  called  Weh  when  it  opens  to 
the  right,  and  Wuh,  when  it  opens  to  the  left.  The  brief  Yay 
is  called  Yeh  when  it  opens  upward,  and  Yuh,  when  it  opens 
downward ;  thus. 


Weh     Wuh     Yeh      Yuh 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND  61 

115.  Either  brief  sign  for  W   (Weh  or  Wuh)  may  be 
joined  to  any  stem  except  Hay,  I,ay,  Em,  En  and  Ray.     On 
down  strokes  Weh  will  be  found  more  convenient  and  Wuh 
will  secure  the  necessary  angle  on  Kay,  Gay  and  Ing,  as  in 
the  words  week,  wig,  wing,  etc. 

116.  Yeh  or  Yuh  may  be  joined  to  any  stem  except 
Hay,  always  forming  the  sharpest  possible  angle  with  the  stem. 

Brief  signs  are  always  read  before  any  vowel  preceding 
the  stem.  The  following  illustrations  will  show  the  manner 
in  which  they  are  joined  and  read: 

3..  lit  .....  ft    A..  ..1.  ^r.  .;±.. 

weep    wedge        week        weave      yacht      yellow       yon 

117.  On  the  stems  Lay,  Em,  En  and  Ray,  the  brief  Way 
must  be  joined  as  a  hook  ;    thus, 


wall  wore  qualm  wine 

1  1  8.     The  Name  of  the  w-hook  is  formed  in  connection 
with  its  stem,  as  follows  :    Wei,  Wer,  Wem  and  Wen. 

"119.    The   circle   Iss   may  be   written   within  the   brief 
signs  for  TV;    thus, 

•1 


sweet      Ipswitch       swore 

1  20.  The  brief  signs  for  w  and  y  are  sometimes  disjoined 
and  written  in  the  vowel  places  to  indicate  both  the  w  ory  sound 
and  the  vowel  immediately  following  ;  thus, 


twist        dwell          squawk  quick  quota  folio 

121.  The  use  of  the  disjoined  characters  for  w  andy,  how- 
ever, is  limited  to  a  few  words  where  the  brief  sign  cannot  be 
conveniently  joined. 


62 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


122.  Brief  Yay  is  sometimes  used  to  represent  two  con- 
current vowels  coalescing  very  closely,  as  in  the  words  opiate, 
curious,  atheist,  etc.  (See  line  n  of  Reading  Exercise  for 
this  lesson.) 

123.  When  the  abbreviated  iu  stands  for  a  dot  vowel,  the 
semicircle  opens  to  the  right.  In  other  words,  Weh  is  used 
to  indicate  that  the  vowel  following  the  w  is  a  dot  vowel. 
When  the  abbreviated  w  stands  for  a  dash  vowel,  Wuh  is  used 
to  so  indicate  it.  The  signs  may  be  shaded  to  indicate  the  heavy 
dots  and  dashes,  and  made  light  to  indicate  the  light  dots  and 
dashes.  This  distinction,  however,  is  soon  disregarded  by  the 
reporter. 

124.  The  following  table  will  illustrate  the  method  of 
writing  Weh  and  Wuh,  Yeh  and  Yuh  in  the  vowel  places : 

WEH  SERIES. 

HEAVY  LIGHT 


c  we  as  in  weary 
c  ifj  as  iuwade 
c  wa  as  waft 

!<••(  as  iu  walk 
3  wo  as  iu  woke 
;>  woo  as  iii  wooed 


c  irf  as  in  wit 
c  we  as  in  wet 
•  wa  as  in  wag 

wo  as  in  wot  or  watch 
3     wu  as  in  won 
3    woo  as  in  wood 


YEH  SERIES. 


U  ye  as  in  yeast 

u  l/a  as  in  Yale 

u  I/a  as  in  yacht 

n  i/a  as  in  yawl 

0  i/o  as  in  yoke 

n  i/oo  as  in  youth 


u  i/«  as  in  yit 

o-  ye  as  Iii  yet 

u  i/a  as  in  yap 

0  j/oasiiiyon 

n  l/u  as  in  young 

°  j/u  as  iu  yul 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  63 

125.  A  small  right  angle  is  used  to  indicate  the  sound  of 
w  coalescing  with  the  long  sound  of  z,  as  in  the  following 
words : 

__1   _    X  _J 

wide         wife      white 

THE  STEMS  WAY  AND  YAY. 

126.  The  following  rules  will  determine  the  correct  use 
of  Way  and  Yay. 

The  Stem  Way  must  be  used  as  follows : 

(a)  When  it  is  the  only  consonant  stroke  in  the  word,  as 
in  woe,  etc. 

(b)  When  initial  w  is  followed  by  the  sound  of  s;  as, 


v.._._x 


waste  wisely         wasp         whisky 

(c)  When  w  follows  an  initial  vowel ;  as 


i 


awake  awhile  await 

127.  The  stem  Yay  is  used  in  all  words  in  which  Yay  is 
the  only  consonant  stem,  and  also  when  it  follows  an  initial 
vowel;  as,  >*-  /"* 


yea  yeast  oyer 

(Fourth  List.) 

THE  WEH  WORD  SIGNS. 
128.     The  following  word  signs  should  now  be  learned: 

D  u  n 
_ •?_...,                       .....V.....  n 


we  were         what  would  ye          yet      beyond       you 

with  year  yesterday 


64  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


L      c^ 


while  well         we  are         where  aware  we  may 

we  will  with  our         work 


when  one 


129.  Wem  in  the  first  position  is  also  a  sign  for  with  me 
or  with  my  ;  and  in  the  second  position  it  is  used  for  with  him. 
When,  in  phrases,  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  with  me  from 
with  him,  it  may  be  done  by  inserting  the  vowel ;  as, 


with  me  with  him 

130.  Wen   in   the  first  position  is  a  sign  for  with  no  or 
we  know,  and  may  be  distinguished  from  when  by  vocalizing. 

(Fifth  List.) 

CONTRACTIONS. 

131.  The  student  will  see  the  origin  of  the  following 
signs  : 


anything       anywhere        nowhere          wherever     whenever       forever 


something    disadvantage    become  familiar-ity    acknowledge  refer 

:±L_  .....  _>£  ........  _±JL__._  .....  \  _______  2} 


represent     notwith-      neverthe-       nothing   peculiar-ity     irregular-ity 
standing          less 


±3 


regular-ity  knowledge         into  unto  always  also 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  65 

132.  Derivatives  from  the  above  words  are  formed  by 
writing  the  disjoined  letter  suggesting  the  derivative  near  the 
end  of  the  last  stroke  of  the  sign.     Thus  the  disjoined  Lay 
would  represent  ly  in  the  words  regularly,  irregularly,  newly, 
peculiarly,  familiarly,    etc.      So,  En-Ef-Em   would  stand  for 
unfamiliar. 

133.  The  w-hook  is  used  to  represent  we,  were,  with  in 
phrases ;  as, 


we  receive 

Q 

1 

we  refer   were  referred   were  nowhere 

n     n      ^ 

we  represent 
we  enjoy 

we  always 

r 

we  also  were  also  were  unsatisfactory 

RECAPITULATION. 

134.  The  following  is  a  synopsis  of  the  uses  of  the  strokes 
Es,  Hay,  Way  and  Yay,  and  their  respective  brief  signs,  Iss, 
Heh,  Weh  and  Yeh. 

I.  From   the  rules  given  under  each  one  of  the  above 
letters,  it  is  seen  that  a  brief  sign  is  always  read  before  a  vowel; 
thus,  -  x-  M 

_..-  __  ,  _______  ;:l  ____  if  ____  ! 

sack  head  while  yacht 

II.  Hence,   when  these  letters  are  preceded  by  a  vowel, 
to  read  the  vowel  first,  the  stroke  must  be  employed  ;  thus, 


ask         ahead      awhile       oyer 

III.  A  brief  sign  being  small  cannot  have  three  positions 
for  the  vowels  ;  hence,  when  one  of  these  letters  is  the  only 
sounded  consonant  in  a  word,  the  stroke  must  be  used  ;  thus. 

_•)  _  <<_  ___  >t  ____  £. 

ace  hoe  weigh          yea 


66 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 
READING  EXERCISE- 


^^^ 


__  Sentences  .......  _J^_J!!I!j£LxfJl-_~;Ba3^^ 


I        /i     /         -T    v^  >  XT' 
_  V.^_./J-.-A<,...  _  LjzC  ____  1.L 


^^^^ 

-/  / 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  67 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

135-    (a)     Woe,  woo,  weighs,  wise,    west,  waist,  wasp,  wayside. 

(b)  Weight,  wit,  wet,  wad,  wade,   weed,   wood,  web,  witch,  watch, 
wage,  wedge,  week,  wig,  wag,  wake,  woke,  wave,  weave,  waver,  weaver, 
waif,  woof,  wash,  wed,  wing,  wax,  waxed,  waxes,  waxen  ;  sweet,  Swede, 
sweat,  sweep,    swayed,  assuage,  switch,  unswitch,  Ipswitch,   bewitch, 
sweetly,  sweetest,  wettest,  Webster. 

(c)  Wail,  wall,   wolf,    willow,  Welch,  William,  wallet,  walrus,  war, 
wire,  wore,  weary,  wearied,  wearisome,  worth,  worthy,  unworthy,  worm, 
warm,    worship,    win,    wine,   wane,  won,  wince,  winch,    Winchester, 
Windsor,  willow,  welladay,  wigwam,  wamus,  swore,  swear,  swell,  swale, 
swallow,    swim,  swing,    (Iss-Wuh-Ing),   window,   windy,  quince,  queen, 
twine,  twain,  twin,  twinge,  Quincy,  quench,  Edwin. 

(d)  Whale,  whence,  whiff,  whilst,  whimsy,  whirl,  whistle,  whoop, 
wheat,  wheeze,  whig,  whim,  whine,  whist,  wheel-barrow,-  whip,  whim- 
sical, whinney,  whoa,  whew. 

(e)  Yates,  yell,  yawl,  yellow,  young,  yawn,  yon,  yore,  yarrow,  Yale, 
yoke,  youth,  Yankee. 

(f )  Tweak,  twitch,   quail,  quell,  squeal,  s.quall,  twist,  quest,  inquest, 
bequest,  equipage,  maniac,  ammonia,  opiate,  anterior,  interior,  odium, 
copious,  various,  obvious,  notorious,  serious,  piteous,  Victoria,  Samaria, 
Tokio,  equipoise,  acquit,  equip,  equity,  quick,  quickest,  quake. 

(g)  Quiet,  quietest,  twice,  wight,  white,  wipe,  wife,  wives. 

(h)  I  While  we  are  well  aware  of  his  familiarity  with  this  science, 
we  think  his  knowledge  lacks  thoroughness.  2.  The  social  advantages  • 
of  large  cities  are  of  much  use  to  him  who  would  make  the  most  of  life. 
3.  The  peace  aud  quiet  of  the  country  are,  however,  conducive  to  a  life 
of  study.  4.  This  quiet  and  peace  may  be  had  in  a  city  in  an  attic  room 
far  out  of  the  reach  of  the  noise  of  daily  life.  5.  Theory  without  facts  is 
not  science,  and  knowledge  is  of  no  use  without  the  power  of  thinking 
and  doing.  6.  It  is  said  that  knowledge  is  power,  but  it  is  not  so  until 
our  thinking  makes  it  of  use  to  us.  7.  Many  waste  much  time  in  half 
mastering  a  language  or  a  science  which  they  will  never  use.  8.  Study 
is  itself  of  some  use,  but  books  should  at  times  give  way  to  society,  and 
society  should  at  times  give  way  to  books.  • 


68  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

LESSON  XI. 

INITIAL  HOOKS. 

136.  The  sounds  of  /  and  r  immediately  following  other 
consonants  (in  such  words  as  plea,  clay,  pray,  prow,  settle  and 
paper)  occur  so  frequently,  and  they  combine  so  closely  with 
the  immediately  preceding  consonant  that  they  seem  to  become 
a  single  elementary  sound.     Such  a  union  of  /  or  r  with  a 
foregoing  consonant  is  represented  by  a  small  initial  hook. 

137.  L-Hook.  —  The  sound  of  /  immediately   following 
any  other  consonant  than  Es,  Zee,  Ar,  Lay,  El,  Ing,  Way  and 
Hay,  is  indicated  by  a  small  initial  hook  on  the  circle  side  of 
the  consonant  which  it  follows.     The  hook  is  made  large  on 
Em,  En  and  Ray,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  w-hook  heretofore 
explained. 

The  following  illustration  shows  all  the  1-hook  stems  : 


pi 


138.  Shl  is   always  written  upward   and   never  stands 
alone,  in  order  that  it  may  not  conflict  with  s/ien,  to  be  subse- 
quently explained.     It  has  its  hook  at  the  bottom,  and  is  thus 
distinguished  from  shr. 

139.  Observe  that  though  the  hooks  are  made  first,  they 
are  read  after  the  stems  to  which  they  are  attached. 

140      Obviousl}'  there  is  no  advantage  to  be  gained  from 
the  use  of  the  1-hook  on  Es,  Zee,  Ar,  Lay,  El,  Ing,  Way  and 


bl 

tl       dl 

C 

chl 

C 

jl 
J 

kl 

Kl 

fl 

vl 

thl 

thl 

shl 

ml 

nl 

rl 

PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  69 

Hay,  as  the  combination  is  either  of  rare  occurrence,  or  it  may 
be  more  easily  expressed  otherwise  ;  as, 

...r..  ..........  _±£l_r^  .....  eiilrC       ; 

sale  Carlyle  kingly        wail          hill 

141.  R=Hook.  —  The  close  combination  of  r  with  a  pre- 
ceding consonant  is  indicated  by  reversing  the  1-hook  sign. 
In  other  words,  the  r-hook  is  written  on  the  lower  and  left 
hand  side  of  stems  in  the  following  manner  : 

&  ......  :\__JL_.l  ......  I  .....  ;_._.__.  _.<—-.  ..^._.!^......1_J_ 

pr         br         tr       dr     chr      jr          kr         gir        fr        vr       thr    thr 


shr       zhr       mr          nr 

142.  Ray  and  Yay,  and  the  consonants  which  do  not 
take  the  1-hook  are  exempt  also  from  the  use  of  the  r-hook. 
Mer  and  Ner  are  shaded  to  distinguish  them  from  Wem  and 
Wen.  No  confusion  will  result  from  shading  Mer  and  Ner,  as 
Ing  does  not  take  an  initial  hook  : 


Mer  Ner  Wem        Wen  Ing-Ar          Ing-El 

143.  In  order  to  preserve  analogy  of  form  and  utilize  all 
the  stenographic  material  to  the  best  advantage,  the  stems  Es, 
Zee,  Ar  and  Way  do  not  take  the  r-hook  ;  the  brief  and  more 
facile  form  for  these  letters  being  preferable  for  their  expres- 
sion in  conjunction  with  a  following  r.  Hence,  fr,  vr,  thr  and 
thr  cannot  be  mistaken  for  Ar,  Way,  Es  and  Zee  with  a  hook 
attached.  These  stems  do  not  take  initial  hooks  ;  thus, 

J  c-r-pl  ^s 

' 


loafej  mover         author  clothier         error      worthy     razor 


baser 


70  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

144.  The  1  and  r-hook  signs,  when  used  initially,  are 
intended  to  represent  the  close  connection  of  L  or  R  with  a 
preceding  consonant ;  and  when  used  finally,  to  represent  the 
same  combinations  with  an  obscure  vowel  intervening.  These 
double  consonants  are  vocalized  in  the  same  manner  as  simple 
strokes,  the  vowel  being  read  before  or  after  both  ;  thus, 


play         able         frame          evil  table         labor  eager 

145.  Names.  —  The  1  and    r-hook  signs  are  called  Pel, 
Bel,  Tel,  Chel  ;  Per,  Ber,  Ter,  Der,  Cher,  etc.     By  these  names 
they  are  distinguished  from  Pee-Lay,  Bee-L,ay,  etc.,  when  the 
consonant  stroke  for  each  letter  must  be  written  in  full. 

146.  The  joining    of   certain   consonants  to  the  1  and 
r-hook  signs  renders  it  impossible  to    make  a  perfect  hook. 
In  such  cases  the  hook  is  implied  by  slightly  retracing  the 
stroke  by  which  the  1  or  r-hook  is  joined  ;  thus, 


Baker  reply  joker  couple  cudgel 

147      In  some  cases  the  two  strokes  are  better  than  the 
hooked  stems  ;  as, 


..rather  than.    .        ^  ... 

dimmer  tamer  farmer  dimmer       tamer       farmer 

148.     The  student  must  not  continue  until  the  following 
list  of  word-signs  has  been  thoroughly  memorized  : 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

(Sixth  List.) 


71 


INITIAL  HOOK  WORD  SIGNS. 


comply 
people 
apply 

belong 
believe 


J) 


either 

their,  there,  they  are 
other 


•  -through 


\ 


_ 


it  will.  tell,  till 
at  all,  until 


call,  equal-ly 

difflcult-y 

calculate-d-ion 


appear,  proper 

principal,  principle    - 
practice,  practical 

liberty 


J 


pleasure 
measure 


-sure-ly 

Mr.,  mere,  remark 

more 
humor 

near,  nor,  in  our 

manner 


*         brother,  number-ed 

1      n 
«           internal 

<=—  '                                      owi 

V      o               feel,  fill,  follow 
V.                   fail,  for  all 

attract 

n           doctor 
1                     direct-ed,  dear 

f 

during 

^>    t\               surprise 
.y.-—:\_..        express 
x>              suppress 

/      y                 danger 
77"                      larger 

correct 

only 

^_^/       annual 
t-'    s/           real-ly 

rule 

accuracy 
'     °\           form-ed 

^j 

influential 

\ 
\  probable,  probability 

Ov 

'    °\  ^       over 
)...  A.  —     every,  very 
favor 

72  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

SPECIAL  PRINCIPLES. 

149.  One  of  the  most  important  principles  in  shorthand 
writing   is   obtained  from  the  use  of  the  hooks  to  add  words 
which   frequently   occur,   and  which   are  generally    spoken 
rapidly. 

(a)  The  1-hook  is  made  use  of  to  add  all  and  will ;  thus, 

by  all    to  all     of  all         it  will         who  will  which  will       they  will 

(b)  The   r-hook    adds  are  or  our  to   simple  consonant 
word  signs ;  thus, 

at  our    of  our   to  our        In  our  or  our         which  are       much  are 

(c)  Were  may  be  added  to  a  straight  stem  word  sign  by 
the  r-hook,  but  when  so  added  the  sign  is  placed  in  the  third 
position;  as, 

it  were          which  were          but  were         who  were 

150.  Derivations  from  the  above  list  are  formed  by  add- 
ing the  consonant  representing   the  derivative.     For  peopled, 
write  a  disjoined  Dee  close  to  the  sign  for  people.     Endanger  is 
expressed  by  joining  the  stem  En  to  the  word  sign  for  danger; 
careless,  by  joining  L,ays  ;    remarkable,   by  adding  Bel ;  fully, 
by  vocalizing  Fel,  etc. 

NOTE. — The  same  sign  is  used  for  till  as  until.  Till  is  a  colloquial- 
ism though  sometimes  used  by  good  writers.  The  student  should  not  be 
encouraged  in  its  use.  If  the  business  man  inadvertently  uses  the  word 
"  till,"  he  desires  to  see  it  written  out  "  until."  This  same  remark  will 
apply  to  many  other  words  as  "  don't,"  etc. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


73 


74  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

151.  (a)  Plea,  please,  pleased,  pleases,  applause,  apples,  blaze, 
blows,  huddle,  addle,  idle,  evil,  fly,  flow,  flew,  Ethel,  clay,  glee,  eagle, 
ogle,  cloy,  try,  tree,  utter,  outer,  attar,  Troy,  prows,  prim,  prime,  trim, 
drum,  dream,  tram,  break,  brick,  broke,  bridge,  trick,  trip,  track,  trap, 
tribe,  grim,  group,  groom,  grime,  crawl,  grudge,  grace,  praised,  braced, 
priest,  grazed,  graced,  plume,  plum,  bloom,  bleak,  black,  clique,  clock, 
clack,  flame,  gleam,  claim,  blithe,  fluid,  flag,  cling,  frame,  freely,  thrill, 
thresh. 

(b)  Table,  dapple,  dabble,  tipple,  pedal,  employ,  imply,  maple,  noble, 
cable,  couple,  goggle,  chapel,  payable,  humble,  bible,  regal,  likely,  lable, 
liable,  Biddle,  bottle,  battle,  oracle,  feeble,  allowable,  total,  title,  bevel, 
labor,  leper,  lodger,  ledger,  rigor,  vigor,  vigorous,  paper,  pauper,  piper, 
pepper,   dipper,   deeper,     dapper,     degree,    sugar,    (Shay-Ger)    shaker, 
quicker,   tinner,  tenner,  dinner,   Tucker,   editor,  angry,  hungry,  Hum- 
phrey, Schaffer,  fisher,  fishery,  leisure,  roomer,  (Rav-Mer)  rumor,  armor, 
minor,  tenor,  lover,  lever. 

(c)  Penal,  kennel,  tunnel,  channel,  rural,  spiral,  floral,  final,  finally, 
animal,   enamel,   camel,   relic,   relax,  relapse,  unlatch,   unlock,  unlike. 

(d)  Briber,   bridger,   Blakely,   blackly,    bluishly,   freshly,    freckle, 
prickly,   plural,  flannel,  broker,  grammar,  treasure,  bribery,  overdraw, 
overflow;  blacker,  frugal,  travel,  agreeable. 

(e)  Word  Signs.      Comply,  people,  apply,  belong,  believe,  feel, 
tell,  till,  until,  call,  equal,  equally,  difficult,  difficulty,  proper,  principle, 
principal,  practice,  surprise,  express,  liberty,  remember,  member,  num- 
ber, brother,  doctor,  dear,  during,  danger,   carry,  care,  accuracy,  form, 
from,  over,  every,  very,  favor,  either,  their,  there,  other,  through,  sure, 
pleasure,  measure,  Mr.  mere,  remark,  more,  near,  nor,  manner,  capable, 
influential,  probable,  probability,  only,  annual,  real,  really,  relate,  re- 
lated, rule. 

(f )  By  all,  at  all,  each  will,  which  will,  much  will,  if  all,  for  all,  of 
all,  all  will,  or  all,  already  all,  but  all,  owe  all,  on  all,  ought  all,  should 
all,  who  will  \,  by  our,  at  our,  which  are,  of  our,  all  our,  to  our,  or  our, 
already  our,  but  our,  owe  our,  on  our,  ought  our,  should  our,  who  are ; 
to  ours,  by  ours,  to  ourselves,  by  ourselves  ;  it  were,  which  were,  who 
were. 

Books. — Some  one  has  said  that  a  real  love  for  study  is  given  to  the 
few — not  to  the  many.  Most  people,  however,  have  a  love  for  books  and 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  75 

a  desire  for  knowledge,  but  not  a  love  of  study.  We  all  of  us  waste 
much  time  on  worthless  books.  They  should  be  few  and  well  chosen ; 
the  more  select  the  more  enjoyable.  Consider  what  you  have  in  the 
smallest  chosen  library  ;  a  company  of  the  wise  and  witty  of  all  ages  and 
all  countries.  "  The  fish  decays  first  at  the  head,"  is  a  common  saying 
among  those  who  live  by  the  Sea  of  Azov.  It  is  so  with  those  who  read 
too  much  or  too  fast.  How  to  read  is  a  heavier  task  (than)  many  take  it 
to  be.  Books  should  be  read  slowly  and  with  care,  never  hurriedly.  We 
should  read  only  those  books  which  will  teach  us  to  think  for  ourselves. 
We  should  not  allow  the  author  to  do  all  our  thinking  for  us.  The 
trouble  with  most  of  us  is  that  we  do  not  stop  to  think.  The  power  of 
thinking  will  be  of  immense  advantage  to  us  in  all  our  work  through 
life.  Of  course  it  is  utterly  wrong  to  read  a  book  merely  for  the  sake  of 
saying  we  have  read  it.  The  first  step  is  to  have  an  earnest  desire  to 
know  what  lies  in  a  book.  Books  are  a  guide  in  youth  and  a  solace  in 
age.  When  we  are  weary  of  the  living  we  may  repair  to  them,  for  they 
have  no  deceit,  no  design.  They  make  us  heirs  of  the  life  of  past  ages. 
It  was  said  a  thousand  years  ago  that  "  they  are  life's  best  business.  He 
who  would  rob  me  of  my  books  would  take  away  all  the  joy  of  my  life, 
nay,  I  will  say  all  desire  of  living."  They  are  messages  from  large  souls 
whom  we  have  never  seen,  and  who,  perhaps,  live  thousands  of  miles 
away.  They  are  always  ready  to  teach  or  to  amuse  us.  They  are  the  win- 
dows, says  Beecher,  out  of  which  the  soul  looks.  They  are  the  masters 
who  teach  us  without  rods  or  ferules,  and  expose  our  weaknesses  with- 
out shaming  us.  They  never  laugh  at  our  mistakes.  They  teach  us  how 
to  live  and  how  to  die.  Some  talk  of  past  times  ;  others  of  the  present ; 
and  others  of  the  life  to  come.  For  all  these  services  they  ask  nothing 
but  a  small  corner  where  they  may  repose  in  peace. 


LESSON  Xll. 
SPECIAL   VOCALIZATION. 

152.  To  avoid  long  and  inconvenient  outlines  a  peculiar 
scheme  of  vocalization  is  resorted  to  in  order  to  indicate  a  dis- 
tinct vowel  coming  between  the  1  or  r-hook  and  the  stroke 
to  which  it  is  attached.  In  most  cases  the  word  is  sufficiently 
legible  without  vocalization,  but  where  it  is  desired  to  indicate 
the  vowel,  it  is  done  as  follows ; 


76  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

153.  The  dot  vowels  are  indicated  by  a  small  circle  written 
before  the  stroke  if  the  vowel  is  long,  and  after  the  stroke  if 
the  vowel  is  short  ;  thus, 


dark  feel  fill  term 

154.  When  a  dash  vowel  occurs  between  the  stem  and 
the  hook,  it  is  indicated  by  striking  the  dash  through  the 
stroke  ;  thus, 

3*         V-H°       _  c        ij^— 

V 
false  course  fool  Inform 

155.  When  a  diphthong  intervenes,  it  may  be  written 
through  or  at  the  end  of  the  stroke  ;  as, 


cure  require  trefoil  qualify 

REMARKS  ON  SPECIAL  VOCALIZATION. 
156.  The  student  must  not  use  this  principle  indiscrimi- 
nately. It  applies  to  comparatively  few  words,  the  general  rule 
being  to  use  the  stroke  for  L  or  R  when  a  vowel  intervenes 
between  it  and  the  preceding  consonant,  especially  in  small 
words;  as  in 


bell  toil  chill  mail          vail          mar  veer 

(a)  The  stroke  must  be  used  when  L  or  R  is  the  last  con- 
sonant in  a  word  and  immediately  preceded  and  followed  by 
vowels.  Also  when  two  vowels  intervene  between  L  or  R  and 
a  preceding  consonant;  as  in, 


pillow  borrow         tallow  tower        jewel  vial 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  77 

(b)  It  may  be  stated  as  a  principle  of  wide  though  not 
universal  application  that  when  the  accent  falls  upon  a  vowel 
occurring  between  the  sound  of  a  consonant  and  the  sound  of 
/  or  r,  the  sound  of  the  latter  should  be  represented  by  a 
stroke  rather  than  a  hook,  unless  the  resulting  outline  would 
be  inconveniently  long  or  difficult ;  as, 


bulk  barrack  America 

CIRCLES  AND  HOOKS  COMBINED. 

157.  When  the  sound  of  s  immediately  precedes  an 
1-hook  sign,  it  is  indicated  by  writing  the  circle  distinctly 
within  the  hook.  When  thus  written  within  an  1-hook  it 
presents  the  appearance  of  an  ellipse  or  slightly  flattened  cip 
cle.  The  student  need  not  endeavor  to  make  it  round. 


-P 

I  ____  _.»  /? 


sable  settle          saddle          satchel  civil  classical 

158.  The  Names  of  these  triple  consonants  thus  formed 
are  Iss-Pel,  Iss-Bel,  etc.     As  a  group   they  are  called  the  Iss- 
Pel  series. 

NOTE.  —  The  loops  for  si  and  str  and  the  large  circle  ses  are  never 
prefixed  to  an  1-hook  sign,  as  it  is  plainly  impracticable. 

159.  The  circle  is  prefixed  to  an  r-hook  stem  by  turning 
the  hook  into  a  small  circle.     In  other  words,  if  the  circle  is 
made  on  the   r-hook  side  of  a  straight  stem,  it  implies  the 
presence  of  the  r-hook;  thus, 


spray  stream  scream  seeker 


78  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

N 

1 60.  If  preceded  by  no  other  stroke,  Stey  may  be  pre- 
fixed to  the  straight  r-hook  stems  by  writing  the  loop  on  the 
left  or  r-hook  side  ;  thus, 

\ 

2a  .-.-^___ 

stupor  stutter  stitcher  stagger 

va)     Many  stenographers  prefer  to  use  two  stems  for  the 

above  class  of  words,    writing  Stee-Per  for  stupor  instead  of 

Steyper. 

(b)     In  a  few  instances  the  large  circle  is  prefixed  to  an 

r-hook  stem ;  as, 

1 


sister  disaster 

1 6 1 .  When  the  Sper  stems  are  preceded  by  strokes  in  the 
same  direction,  it  is  only  necessary  to  turn  the  circle  on  the 
left  or  under  side  to  indicate  the  addition  of  the  r-hook ; 
thus, 


prosper  destroy  execrable 

162.  When  Iss-Ker  or  Iss-Ger  is  preceded  by  any 
other  straight  stroke  the  circle  is  turned  on  the  right  side  of 
the  preceding  stroke,  and  the  Kay  or  Gay  continued  from  the 
point  where  the  circle  is  completed.  This  is  a  peculiar  joining, 
but  as  there  is  no  other  way  to  indicate  the  r-hook  in  this 
connection,  it  must  be  made  use  of  for  this  purpose  ;  as  in 

U-  t- 


subscribe  descry  disagree 

(a)   This  plan  is  also  used  for  the  expression  of  Sper,  fol- 
lowing j,  as  in  —  /  —  Jasper. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND,  79 

(b)     The  expression  of  r  may  safely  be  omitted  from  this 
class  of  words,  thus  securing  an  easier  outline  ;   as, 


subscribe  prescribe        disgrace 

163.  In  all  other  cases  when  Iss  preceding  an  r-hook 
sign  occurs  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  it  must  be  written  dis- 
tinctly within  the  hook  ;  as  in 

±1  ^ 


extra  lisper  pastry  gastric 

164.     The  iss  circle  is  not  prefixed  to  any  of  the  curved 
r-hook  combinations  except  Ner  when  used  initially ;   thus, 


saner  summer  safer 

(a)     When   these    combinations    are   preceded   by   other 
strokes,  it  is  allowable  to  write  the  circle  within  the  hook ;  as, 


hemisphere  passover 

165.      T  may  be  omitted  in  such  words  as  boastful,  trust- 
ful, as  is  further  shown  in  Section  297. 


80 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 
READING  EXERCISE- 


L.  i      b-^- 

"    -  i_--        --      o--- 


<V  xG)  >      0  —  r       <V 

.°7-  -^^  -  -^  -  -  ^K  .  -  .1-  \ 


/7 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  81 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

166.  (a)  Dark,  jar,  sharp,  park,  charm,  barber,  marvel,  cheerless, 
appear,  paralyze,  pioneer,  engineer,  volume,  prevail,  car,  cigar,  Abagail, 
feel,  fill,  fail,  fell,  aver,  term,  germ,  fall,  full,  fool,  follow,  core,  course' 
miracle,  church,  require,  cure,  epicure,  procure,  perjury,  cull,  door, 
chore,  burst,  courage,  recourse,  quality,  qualify,  trefoil,  journal,  colonel, 
neuralgia,  railroad,  portray. 

(£)  Supple,  supply,  sapling,  sable,  settle,  subtle,  saddle,  satchel, 
cycle,  sickle,  sickly,  civil,  civilly,  unsocial,  peaceable,  possible,  display, 
disable,  plausibly,  classically,  gracefully,  noticeable,  physical,  taxat'e, 
tricycle,  bicycle,  phthisical,  disclose,  disclaim. 

(c)  Spray,  supper,  sober,  saber,  stray,  straw,  strew,  suitor,  beeker, 
succor,  stream,  stroke,  strike,  struck,  cedar,  cider,  sadder,  sister,  sup- 
press, cypress,  supreme,  sprawl,  spring,  spray,  suburb,  secrecy,  strip, 
strap,  scribe,  scrub,  scratch,  screech,  subscribe,  screw,  prisoner,  pois- 
oner,  dishonor,   struggle,    pastry,  sooner,  saner,  signer,  destroy,  pros- 
per, dissuader,  distress,  outstretch. 

(d)  The  Ethics  of  Good  Manners. — It  is  a  rule  of  good  manners, 
says  Ralph  Waldo  Emerson,  to  avoid  extremes.     A  lady  loses  as  soon  as 
s!ie  admires  too  easily  and  too  much.     The  face  and  the  person  lose 
power  when  they  are  on  the  stretch  to  express  praise,  or  surprise,  01 
pleasure.     A  person  makes  his  inferiors  his  superiors  by  heat     Why 
must  you,  who  are  not  a  gossip,  talk  as  a  gossip,  and  tell  eagerly  what 
the  neighbors  or  the  journals  say.     State  what  you  think  without  apol- 
ogy.   When  people  come  to  see  us  we  foolishly  prattle  lest  we  appear 
churlish.    Things  said  for  the  sake  of  talk  are  chalk  eggs  ;  they  produce 
nothing.     What  you  are  will  show  through  any  and  all  your  talk.     A 
lady  once  said  to  me  :    "I  do  not  care  so  much  for  what  they  say  as  I  do 
for  what  makes  them  say  it.  "     As  to  the  table  its  law  is  quietness— a 
respect  to  the  common  soul  of  all  the  guests.     Good  manners  are  made 
up  of  petty  sacrifices. 


LESSON  XIII. 

ENLARGED  L  AND  R  HOOKS. 

167.     The  1-hook  may  be  enlarged  to  add  r,  as  follows : 


82  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


abler  tattler  traveler  Blair 

1  68.     The  r-hook  may  be  enlarged  to  add  /;   thus, 


April         mackerel  liberal  corporal 

169.  The  added  letter  is  always  read  last.  In  other 
words,  when  a  vowel  precedes  one  of  these  enlarged  hook 
stems,  it  is  read  first,  as  in  the  word  April  given  above  ;  when 
a  vowel  is  placed  after  the  stem,  it  is  read  immediately  before 
the  added  letter  ;  as, 


clear  trials  clergy  moral 

(a)   This  principle  cannot  be  applied  to  Mel,  Nel  and  Rel, 
as  their  hooks  are  already  large. 

170.  The  Name  of  the  enlarged  1-hook  is  formed  natur- 
ally, as  Pier,  Bier,  Tier,  etc.    The  name  of  the  enlarged  r-hook 
is  Prel,  Brel,  Trel,  etc.     As  a  group  they  are  called  the  Pier 
and  Prel  series. 

THE  BACKWARD  "!N"  HOOK. 

171.  The  syllable  in,  en  or  un  at  the  beginning  of  an 
iss-Per   sign  and   occasionally   preceding   an    iss-Pel   sign   is 
expressed  by  a  small  backward  hook  ;  thus, 


ensober  insecure          unstring       unsettle 

172.  This  hook  may  also  be  used  at  the  beginning  or 
end  of  words  to  prevent  the  circle  coming  on  the  convex  or 
outside  of  Kn  ;  thus, 


unseemly    unceremonious  uuswayable  Thompson  mason     arsenal 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


88 


v 

*i 

|. 


c+o_     IC—^.. 

V  ? 

/~\ •     *~\  .  \ 

ZZ.  _ -1- 


i_f 


6   IN-HOOK.. 


...in 

LJL.:!b£^^ 


•8    SENTENCE 


_ 


M-\ 


.-..5_A...>,.^.^ 

^    /. 

t 


fc W- 


84  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

173.  (a)  Trial,  control,  trail,  abler,  Blair,  teller,  settler,  sabler,  sad- 
dler, tattler,  babbler,  bibler,  clear,  color,  choler,  collar,  scholar,  liberal, 
illiberal,  Charles,  jocular,  juggler,  straggler,  quibbler,  jumbler,  implore, 
deplore,  shiugler,  scrambler,  fuller,  valor,  April,  pastoral,  corporal, 
flourish,  mackerel,  pickerel,  pectoral,  cobbler,  nibbler,  stickler,  toler- 
able, immoral. 

(b)  Unstriug,   unstrung,   unsprung,     itisuppressible,    inseparable, 
insuperable,  unscrew,  unsecure,  unscrupulous,  inscribe,  unceremonious, 
unsurmised,  unseemly,  unsolicitous,  unsalable,  insular,  insoluble,  unset- 
tle, unsaddle,   uncivil,    Jamieson,    eleemosynary,    Thompson,   arsenic, 
masonic,  Williamson,  Wilson. 

(c)  At  least  one  million  young  people  of  this  country  who  are 
going  to  the  common  schools  are  at  this  hour  seeking  or  wishing  for 
the  advantages   of  the   higher  schools.     Many  of  them,  says  Horace 
Greeley,  write  me  on  the  subject,  asking  me  to  show  them  the  way 
whereby  they  may  accomplish  their  purpose.     Some  desire  to  pursue  a 
college  course,  and  are  willing  to  go  in  debt  for  a  thousand  dollars  or 
more  wherewith  to  pay  their  way.     I  cannot  but  think  that  this  is  a  mis- 
take.    True,  they  may  win,  but  the  odds  are  not  in  their  favor.     One 
does  not  feel  like  working  with  energy  while  paying  for  a  dead  horse. 
But  what  shall  he  do  ?     In  the  first  place  he  must  choose  that  pursuit 
for  which  he  has  the  most  liking,  and  master  all  its  processes.     If  he 
has  a  taste  for  commercial  life  he  should  try  that,  first  possessing  him- 
self of  some  knowledge  of  bookkeeping.     If  he  likes  farming  he  should 
go  at  that,  giving  all  his  spare  hours  to  its  (careful)  study.    Successful 
farming  requires  as  (careful)  study  as  any  other  business.     In  any  pursuit 
he   should   always   have   access   to  good  books.     They  may  be  had  iu 
nearly  every  neighborhood  in  the  United  States.     If  he  is  unable  to 
borrow  them  from  the  village  preacher  or  doctor  or  lawyer,  he  will  have 
to  purchase  a  few  choice  works,  but  a  few  dollars  per  year  will  be  an 
ample  outlay.     A  course  of  reading  for  the  sake  of  knowledge  will  com- 
mence with  the  sciences — chemistry,  geology,  etc. — and  should  engross 
the  spare  hours  of  a  full  year  at  least.     Read  slowly  and  (carefully)  from 
the  title  page  to  the  close.     When  the  author  is  not  clear,  or  you  fail  to 
follow  him,  stop  and  give  an  hour  to  a  page,  or  until  you  are  sure  of  the 
author's   sense.     Geography    will   require  far  less   time.     When   these 
sciences  are  fully  rnaster(ed)  you  will  see  the  knowledge  thus  won  will 
be  a  key  to  unlock  quickly  and  easily  the  treasures  of  the  other  sciences. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  85 

The  studious  youth  will  easily  select  other  works.  It  is  a  difficult  task 
to  make  out  a  list  of  books  suitable  for  young  people,  with  all  their 
varying  tastes  and  capacities,  but  one  good  book  will  always  lead  to 
another. 


LESSON  XIV. 
TERMINAL    HOOKS. 

1  74.  The  primary  consonants  are  still  further  modified 
bv  the  addition  of  small  terminal  hooks  to  indicate  a  following 
f,  v  or  n.  These  hooks  may  be  used  to  advantage  in  the 
middle  of  words  as  well  as  at  the  end. 

175.  The  F  or  V-Hook.  A  small  final  hook  on  the  1-hook 
side  of  straight  stems  indicates  an  added  f  or  v  .  The  follow- 
ing will  illustrate  all  the  f-hook  stems  and  their  names  : 


Pef   Bef  TefDefChef  Jef    Kef     Gef     Ref      Hef 

(a)     This  hook  is  attached  only  to  the  straight  stems. 

176.  When  the  sound  of  s  immediately  follows  forv 
and  is  represented  by  the  circle,  it  must  be  written  distinctly 
within  the  hook  ;  as, 


puffs      heaves  arrives  staves  drives 

(a)     It  is  obvious  that  the  loops  Stey  and  Ster  and  tfye 
large  circle  cannot  be  written  with  or  joined  to  the  f-hook. 

NOTE.  —  No  embarrassment  will  result  from  the  employment  of  this 
'hook  for  both  f  and  v,  as  the  connected  sense  will  determine  whether 
for  v  is  meant.  Some  teachers  advise  the  shading  of  the  hook  to  dis- 
tinguish f  from  v,  but  this  is  wholly  unneccessary  in  actual  practice. 
This  hook  is  also  used  by  some  writers  on  the  curved  stems  by  making 
it  long  and  narrow,  as  in  writing  the  word  thief  t  but  the  occasion  for  its 
use  is  very  rare. 


80  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

THE  N-HooK. 

177.  A  small  final  hook  on  the  r-hook  side  of  any  straight 
stroke,  or  on  the  concave  side  of  a  curved  stroke,  indicates  an 
added  n.     All  stems  take  the  n-hook  without  exception.    The 
following  illustrations  will   show  the  n-hook  stems  and  their 
names : 

_!_-* JL  J ^ J/~    --r=>-..'__^._. 

Pen  Ben   Ten   Den  Chen  Jen     Ken    Gen   Fen   Ven 

(i (j si_ V- _£•! $/. (^- _— s) s~~^....  ^ — * 

Then    Then    Esen    Zen     Shen    Zhen  Len          Arn  Men      Nen 

Ingn       Wayn    Yayn      Hayn       Ren 

178.  The  f  and  n-hooks    are    read  after  the  strokes  to 
which   they   are   attached,   or  any   vowel  written  beside  the 
stroke  ;  as, 

c^  1V 


brief  clean  drive  refrain  cliff  finish 

179  The  circles  and  loops  are  written  on  the  n-hook  side 
of  straight  stems  to  indicate  the  addition  of  ns,  nst,  nstr,  and 
nses;  as, 


chains  turns         chanced         glanced       chances        glances 

1  80.  Iss  or  ses  combined  with  the  n-hook  on  straight 
strokes  must  be  considered  as  final.  The  addition  of  another 
stem  nullifies  the  n-hook. 

_______________  J  .......  _  ______________  I..  .......  _JL  ______  i  _________  ^  _____ 


Dens         Dees-Ter         Tens      Tees-Kay      Pens<is   Peeses-Ray 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  87 

181.     When  Iss  follows  an  n-hook  attached  to  curves,  it 
must  be  written  distinctly  within  the  hook  ;  as, 


fines         mines        lines         swoons 

182.  The  Iss  circle  is  written  inside  the  n-hook  on  curves 
principally  to  form   the   plural.      When  the  word  ends  with 
"  nee"  the  stroke  En  with  the  circle  attached  should  be  used, 
as  the  plurals  of  such  words  require  the  En  stroke.    Whether 
to  use  the  En  stroke  or  the  n-hook  after  a  curved  consonant 
may  be  determined  as  follows  :      When  the  syllable   has   the 
sound  of  z,  as  in  fans,  use  the  n-hook  ;  when  the  sound  of  s 
occurs  after  a  curved  consonant,  as  lance,  use  the  stem  Ens. 
In  the  following  and  similar  words  the  hook  is  used  :  vines, 
means,    Athens,    Aarons,    nuns,   urns,    lines.     The  following 
words  are  written  with  Ens  :    fence,  offence,  affiance,  alliance, 
convince,  conveyance,  assurance,  allowance,  evince,  denounce, 
lance,  renounce,  romance,  penance,  pronounce. 

183.  When/,  v  or  n  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word, 
and  followed  by  a  final  vowel,  the  stroke  must  be  used  ;  as  in 

-----------  -%  .......  U  .......  -U         -£±L  .....  k- 


bravo          deny  avenue  honey  defy          review 

184.     When  two   vowels  precede   a  final  n,   the    stroke 
must  be  used  ;  as,  \v  x^ 


Zion  lion  ruin 

185.  Fen,  Ven.  When  these  phonographic  syllables 
are  preceded  by  any  other  straight  stroke  than  Ray,  it  is  pre- 
ferable to  express  them  by  the  f-hook  and  the  stroke  En  ;  as  in 

W£-^  \v  .; 


divine  profane         juvenile       spavin 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


1 86.  Ner.  This  syllable  is  properly  expressed  by  the 
stem  Ner,  except  in  derivatives,  when  the  outline  usually  con- 
forms to  that  of  the  primitive ;  thus, 


spin          spinner        mine          miner  fine  finer 

187.     Per,    Ver.        These   terminations    occurring   after 
straight  strokes,  ar?  best  expressed  by  the  f-hook  and  Ray  ;  as, 


paver 


river 


discover 


driver 


behavior 


(Seventh  List.) 

FINAL,  HOOK  WORD  SIGNS. 

1 88.     The  student  must  make  himself  thoroughly  familiar 
with  each  of  the  following  word  signs : 

c 


(,        I  have 

who  have 


differeut-ence 


r 


\ 


~ 
)  —  -y— 


perfect 
proof 

approve 


contrive 

truthful -ly 
attractive 


often 


even-ing 


within 
then 
than 


alone,  learn 


men 
man 

human 


opinion 
none 

no  one 


.can,  question 


again 


gaye 


general-ly 
imagine 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


89 


?.       \  ^^^ 

.....  V<r~r-  ........  r"""  ...... 

8  \  \  J-  ,  I,  ^/  /  /  I 

.....  /.did:     ^rsfor- 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


•W1U 

j/..v..,:>_  <ciS..^.iAr"!::j 

. h". ..V-T.  n^».^VJ.^.\/?/...«JB. o_T?_.x . 

v/v^^- 

..j...r-.^i- v\ — ^ 


n 


WORD  SIGNS 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  91 


..........  \  .....  LJi_A_!\L.A  ......  L_l  .....  -.1.  .</„..  Y  ..... 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

189.  (a)  Tiff,  deaf,  chaff,  chief,  rough,  hoof,  calf,  puff,  beef,  bluff, 
belief,  brief,  wharf,  staff,  serf,  surf,  skiff,  scarf;  Dave,  achieve,  concave, 
arrive,  hive,  prove,  believe,  brave,  contrive,  drive,  relieve,  cleave,  crave. 
grave,  strive,  strove,  stove. 

(b)  Contrives,  dives,  drives,  achieves,  coughs,  craves,  cleaves,  raves, 
roofs,  paves,  braves,  bluffs. 

(c)  Tan,  town,  tune,  contain,  atone,  done,  dine,  din,  dawn,  Eden,  chain, 
chin,  June,  gin,  join,  run,  Rhine,  rain,  Hayne,  hone,  keen,  cone,  coin, 
gone,  gain,  gun,  open,  pin,  happen,  pain,  bane,  bin,  bone,  boon,  serene, 
scan,  skein,  stone,  stun,  satin,  sudden,  Soudan,  spine,  Spain,  spoon,  span, 
fan,  fine,  even,  vine,  van,  thin,  thine,  main,  mean,  mine,  noon,  nun,  nine, 
union,  alone,  align,  lean,  lone,  line,  assign,  ozone,  ocean,  shun,  shine, 
ashen,  commission,  earn,  urn,  iron,  swoon,  soften,  seven,  saloon,  slain, 
seamen,  salmon,  concern,  session. 

(d)  Complain,  spleen,  plan,  Elaine,  blown,  clan,  glen,  flown,  Akron, 
crown,  grain,  grin,  train,  strain,  drawn,  drain,  drown,  prone,  sprain, 
brown,  brain,  weapon,  worn,  sworn,  wagon,  weaken,  widen,  woolen, 
women. 

(e)  Contains,  tunes,  instance,  dines,  drains,  chance,  chins,  joins,  rinse, 
runs,  hones,  canes,  clans,  guns,  glance,  opens,  prance,  bones,  brains  ; 
confines,  vines,  lines,  means,  nuns,  assigns  ;  tenses,  condenses, 
chances,  rinses,  cleanses,  glances,  pounces,  bounces  ;  instanced,  danced, 
chanced,  cleansed,  glanced,  rinsed,  dispensed,  bounced,  punsters. 

(f  )  Cover,  giver,  toughen,  revile,  heaver,  advance,  defence,  provoke, 
defame,  proffer,  perfume,  typhoid,  David,  arrival,  divinity,  profanity, 
equivoke,  engraver,  telephone,  Delevan,  province,  grievance,  preferable, 
contrivance,  discover,  traffic. 

(g)  Currency,  occupancy,  stanza,  paganish,  organic,  economy,  frenzy, 
brownish,  bunch,  planet,  drainage,  laconic,  coiner,  Athenian,  convener, 
financier,  cabinet,  bounty,  bonnet,  vainly,  finely,  panic,  complainer, 


92  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

retainer,  detonate,  Dante,  French,  burner,  diurnal,  plain-dealer,  extenu- 
ate, retrench,  branch,  bunch,  estrange,  monopoly,  disseminate,  eliminate, 
seamanship,  pusillanimous. 

(h)  Kitchen,  cabin,  regain,  pagan,  liken,  token,  talon,  detain,  redden, 
demean,  eleven,  renown,  machine,  maiden,  famine,  awaken,  shaken, 
ravine,  rapine,  enjoin,  remain,  Michigan,  restrain,  aspen,  obtain,  born, 
train,  recline,  violin,  disclaim,  foreign,  margin,  pardon,  environ,  swollen, 
sunshine,  sermon,  spoken,  Solomon,  unclean,  chairman,  outline,  decline, 
abstain,  muslin,  silken,  discern,  Norman,  incline. 


LESSON  XV. 
TERMINAL  HOOKS  FOR  SHUN  AND  TIVE. 

190.  The  Shun  Hook.—  The  phonetic  syllable  "shun," 
which  in  common  orthography  is  represented  by  the  various 
terminations  tion  (emotion),  sion  (effusion),  Han  (Egyptian), 
dan  (Grecian),  is  expressed  by  a  large  hook  on  the  circle 
side  of  straight  stems,  and  the  concave  side  of  curved  stems; 
thus, 


addition  passion          Egyptian          Grecian 

191  .     The  Name  of  this  hook  is  Shun. 

(a)  The  Shun  hook  is  never  used  in  words  of  one  syllable, 
nor  when  it  is  preceded  by  an  initial  vowel,  nor  when  Iss 
ONLY  precedes  it  ;  as  in 

_.&/>_  ............  c-A  .....  .  .....  .}  .............  ^.....tttrt-.-.u'-.  ___ 

shun          shone        ashen        session 

(b)  When  Shun  is  preceded  by  two  vowels,  the  stroke  Ish 
with  the  n-hook  is  used  for  its  expression  ;    this  is  to  distin- 
guish between  such  words  as, 

-L,,  .............  U  .....  ,  ..........  L,.-  —  -U- 

continuation     contention  '     attenuation    attention 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  93 

(c)     The  Shun  hook  should  not  be  used  in  derivatives  of 
words  ending  in  sh ;  as, 


admonition  diminution 


192.  The  Tive  Hook. — The  syllable  live  occurring  after 
straight  strokes  is  represented  by  a  large  hook  on  the  n-hook 
side  ;  as, 

' 


active  sedative  receptive  speculative 

193.     When  the  syllable  live  follows  a  curved  stem,  it  is 
best  represented  by  the  stroke  Tee  with  the  f-hook ;  as, 


native  motive  votive 

194.  The  Name  of  this  hook  is  Tive. 

195.  Shun   and  Tive   may  be   used  in   the   middle  of 


words  ;    as, 


activity        auctioneer       comparatively         visionary 

196.    Iss  and  Stey  may  be  added  to  Shun  and  Tive  hooks 
by  writing  the  circle  or  loop  distinctly  within  the  hook ;   as, 


\- 


missions  lotions  captives      prohibitionist 


94 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


''  -'         _  ^  _  }_  _^— 

v^"" 

b-r-^  r/?- 

•<•    } 
* 


16    ^ 


^* 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  95 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

X97-  (a)  Nation,  notion,  mission,  motion,  emotion,  lotion,  oration, 
potion,  passion,  option,  compassion,  tuition,  commutation,  edition, 
addition,  condition,  sedition,  action,  auction,  caution,  connection,  con- 
cussion, cushion,  ration,  Russian,  station,  section,  version,  aversion, 
collision,  completion,  oppression,  creation,  abrasion. 

(b)  Adoption,   petition,   optician,  education,  occupation,  caption, 
quotation,  fiction,  affection,  affliction,  location,  election,  eruption,  inac- 
tion, attraction,  illustration,  mansion,  friction,  deception,  veneration, 
discussion,   co-operation,    stationary,   optional,   auctioneer,  occasional, 
educational,  visionary. 

(c)  Ovations,   confessions,    allusions,  notions,  suppressions,  revis- 
ions, prohibitionist,  elocutionist,  abolitionist. 

(d)  Ocean,  commission,  session,  ashen,  extenuation. 

THE  POWER  OF  APPLICATION  AND   ATTENTION. 

(e)  It  was  said  of  Mary  Lyon  that  she  surpassed  all  women  of  her 
time  not  in  superior  mental  faculties,  but  in  her  power  to  bring  all  her 
powers   to  work  together.      The  books  tell  us  of  Dr.  Johnson,  whose 
mental  concentration  while  reading  was  shown  by  the  contortions  of  his 
face,   and  that  his  power  of  acquiring  knowledge  was  proportioned  to 
his  power  of  attention.      Dr.   Livingston  learned   to   study  among  the 
clang  of  looms  and  the  noise  of  machinery.      He  had  such  a  power  of 
concentration  that  he  could  keep  his  attention  on  any  subject  he  chose 
while  the  yells  of  savages  and  the  roar  of  lions  were  in  his  ears,     these 
are,  it  is  true,  extreme  cases,  but  we  may  all  increase  our  power  of  atten- 
tion by   a  little  planning  and  controlling.      If  we  try  to  think  of  one 
subject  five  minutes,  we  perceive  ourselves  running  off  on  to  a  dozen 
that  we  do  not  wish  to  think  of.      The  boy  in  his  study  of  geography 
mingles  cities  and  rivers  with  base  balls  and  hoops  in  a  grotesque  and 
comical  confusion,  as  would  appear  if  his  inner  consciousness  could  be 
laid  open  to  view.      The  girl  as  she  pores  over  her  grammar  mingles 
nouns  and  verbs  with  dresses  and  bonnets.      How  many  of  us  can  keep 
our  thoughts  on  one  subject  for  a  half  hour.      We  waste  half  our  time 
and  strength  in  bringing  our  rambling  thoughts  back  to  their  work.     Is 
there  a  way  to  break  ourselves  of  this  useless  roaming  of  the  mind  ?    Is 
it  possible  for  any  person  with  an  average  strength  of  will  to  become 
master  of  his  own  reasoning  powers.      Let  him  sit  down  to  some  study 
that  requires  a  full  play  of  the  powers  of  abstraction  and  attention.  The 


96  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

first  time  he  finds  himself  roving  he  should  say  to  his  erratic  mind, 
"  Back  to  your  place."  He  should  bring  his  eyes  and  ears  into  subjec- 
tion to  this  one  purpose  of  controlling  his  mind.  The  hasty  reading  of 
too  many  works  of  imagination  is  almost  sure  to  weaken  our  power  of 
fixing  the  attention,  and  the  same  may  be  said  of  the  careless  reading  of 
weighty  authors.  The  power  of  earnest  thought  and  severe  study  is 
soon  lost  without  unceasing  drill. 


LESSON    XVI. 
THE    ESHUN    HOOK. 


198.  The  phonetic  syllable  "shun"  occurring  after  the 
sound  of  s  is  expressed  by  continuing  the  circle  into  a  small 
hook  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  stroke  ;  thus, 


recision  incision         condensation  compensation 

199.  The  Name  of  this  device  is  the  Eshun  hook. 

200.  The  Eshun  hook  is  vocalized  by  writing  first  place 
vowels  before    the  hook,   and  second-place  vowels   after   the 
hook.     This  makes  sufficient  distinction,  as  third-place  vowels 
never  occur  before  the  Eshon  hook. 

(a)  It  will  be  noted  that  if  the  circle,  as  in  such  words  as 
condensation  and  compensation  given  above,  is  turned  on  the 
n  side,  the  sound  of  n  is  added,  but  the  position  for  the  vowels 
remains  the  same. 

20  1.  To  an  f-hook  the  syllable  shun  may  be  added  by 
repeating  the  hook  ;  thus, 


_  !V  C 

U7i  -  W 

devotion  diffusion  profusion        revision 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  97 

(a)     This   expedient,    however,    is   rarely  used,    as   it  is 

generally  preferable  to  use  the  stroke   Kf  or  Vee   with   the 
large  hook ;  thus, 


devotion  diffusion  profusion        revision 

202.  This  repetition  of  the  hook  for  shun  may  be  vocal- 
ized  only   by   placing   the   vowel   after  the  hook  as   in  the 
examples  given  on  the  opposite  page. 

203.  The  derivatives  may  be  written  thus  : 


devotional  professional          conversational  transitional 

204.  The  circle  Iss  may  be  added  also  to  the  Eshun  hook  ; 
as, 


accusations  physicians  possessions 

(Eighth  List) 

THK  ESHUN  HOOK  WORD  SIGNS. 


205.     The  following  word  signs  must  now  be  learned: 

\                          opposition                                  o 
JL..V...y..          ^Session  "> specification 

_e  acquisition  i 

accession  -.Nf> investigation 

_  -t  .   .  -----  accusation 


/       /  justification  \     \ 

-  •-«—  «  ------       generalization        -------  ^   °  ------  objection,  objective 

---------  -N^  --------       civilization  ------  \t.-.o  ------  subjection,  subjective 


_  /\         /\          representation 

realization  ---  X_V>_/1O_       representative 


98 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


£ r7..X-*--V.<. 

*....IUk.|...:WX 

\ 

l^j^/Xi.o^.i/ll.I-C|J-...f..(/.. 
:\:.J...r-V:):\, ...c..-z..(.r>./.7|.:^.. 

/  'SJ^^v      '  ''  ' 

x^,.^...0.A.,^..°.^..Vl., 

f  °  ^     J?  0-^/-"\  ^ 

>. '.  _?-_<' \..  \Xl..  /..../. .  -  _.-Hi-<. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  99 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

206.  (a)  Apposition,  supposition,  decision,  transition,  procession, 
precision,  persuasion,  compensation,  condensation,  causation,  excision, 
accession,  accusation,  recision,  succession,  physician,  incision,  authoriza 
tion,  conversation,  associations,  decisions,  depositions,  relaxation,  inde- 
cision, moralization,  polarization,  crystallization,  dispensation,  transi- 
tional, conversational. 

(b)  Word  Signs.  Opposition,  position,  possession,  acquisition, 
accession,  accusation,  generalization,  justification,  civilization,  realiza- 
tion, specification,  objection,  objective,  subjective,  representation,  rep 
resentative. 


LESSON   XVII. 
THE  SHADED  EM. 

207.  The  stem  Km  may  be  shaded  to  indicate  the  addition 
of  p  or  b;  thus, 


hemp  stamp         impugn      embarrass        ambition 

208.  The  shaded  Em  is  called  Emp  when  it  represents  mp, 
and  Emb,  when  it  represents  mb.     It  never  takes  an  initial 
hook,  and  hence,  it  cannot  be  mistaken  for  Mer.     It  may  take 
a  final  hook  as  illustrated  above. 

209.  The  mp  or  mb  represented   by  this  stem  cannot  be 
separated  by  a  vowel.     A  vowel  placed  beside  it  must  be  read 
before  or  after  the  two  consonants  according  as  it  is  written 
before  or  after  the  stem. 

210.  P  may  be  omitted  when  it  occurs  before  the  sound 
of  /,  sh  or  k,  as  this  class  of  words  is  legible  without  the  ex- 
pression of  p.     (See  line  7  of  the  Reading  Exercise.) 

211.  The  use  of  Emp  secures  a  distinction  between  cer- 
tain words  which  otherwise  would  have  the  same  outline,  as 


100  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

embarrass  (Emb-Rays)  and  embrace  (Em-Bers);  imply  (Em-Pel) 
and  impale 


(Ninth  List.) 

IMP  WORD  SIGNS. 

212.     Let  the  student  improvise  sentences  containing  the 
following  and  preceding  word  signs,  for  practice  : 

important     improvement  impossible        simple 


somebody  example  may  have  been 

213.  Derivatives  from  the  above  list  are  formed  in  the 
usual  way.  Simpler  may  be  written,  Iss-Emp-Ray,  and 
simplest  Iss-Emp-Stey. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 

^A.U---U;.-U-A,  ^--^ 


101 


6 

V* 

7      ^ 

9    f 
t.t 


n 


' 


/7 


. r 


-  v 
x, 


.v. 


102  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

214.  (a)  Imp,  stamp,  hump,  pump,  pomp,  pompous,  bump, 
dump,  damp,  champ,  jump,  camp,  scamp,  vamp,  thump,  shampoo,  limp, 
lamp,  lump,  romp,  ramp,  swamp,  empire,  umpire,  impost,  imposed, 
impish  ,  clamp,  cramp,  plump,  primp,  trump,  tramp,  shrimp,  sympathy, 
glimpse,  wampum,  stampede,  slump,  campaign,  imperial  (Emp-Rel), 
impetus,  impious,  imposition,  imposing,  dampen,  lampoon. 

(b)  Imbue,  emboss,  embossed,  Jumbo,  gumbo,  ambush,  limbo,  ambi- 
tious, ambulance,  ambuscade,   embellish,  embezzle,  embalm,    embody  > 
embank,  humbug. 

(c)  Fee  is  omitted  in  the  following  words  acccording  to  section  210. 
Assumption,  exemption,  co-emption,  pre-emption,  presumption,  Hamp- 
ton,  Hampshire,    symptom,    empty,    temptation,    Simpson,   Sampson, 
gumption. 

(d)  Word  Signs. — Important,   improvement,    impossible,  simple, 
simplicity,  rimpler,  simplest,  somebody,  example,  may  have  been. 


LESSON  XVIII. 
LENGTHENING   PRINCIPLE. 

215.     [Lengthening  any  curved  stroke  (except   Ing  and 
Emp)  adds  the  syllable  ter,  der  or  ther  ;  as, 


center  feeder          smoother  later 

2 1 6.     Lengthening    Ing    adds   the  sound  of  ker  or  ger ; 
thus, 


anchor  drinker  winker 

217.     Lengthening  Emp  or  Emb  adds  er ;  thus, 


timber  jumper  ember 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  103 

2 1 8.  Vocalization. — Vowels  are  written  by  the  side  of 
lengthened  characters  precisely  the  same  as  if  they  were  single 
lengths,  and  they  are  read  before  the  added  syllable  ter,  der 
ther  or  er,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  preceding  examples. 

219.  The  added  syllable  is  read  after  all  vowels,   but 
before  a  final  hook,  circle  or  loop ;   as, 


modern  enters  lantern 

2  20.  The  lengthening  principle  must  not  be  used  when 
the  word  ends  with  a  final  vowel,  but  an  r-hook  sign  must  be 
used  instead ;  as, 


angry  entry          sundries        watery     leathery 

221.     Straight  stems,  when  preceded  by  any  other  stroke, 
may  be  lengthened  to  add  ter;  thus, 


liberator         conductor          quarter  lubricator 

222.  The  Names  of  the  lengthened  strokes  are  formed 
by  adding  ter,  der,  ther  or  er  to  the  name  of  the  single  stem, 
as  Peether,  Beether,  Efter,  L,ayter,  Ember,  Inger,  etc. 

223.  Shelter,  unlike  Shel,  may  be  written  standing  alone 
for  the  words  shelter  and  shoulder. 

224.  Special  Vocalization. — A  vowel  or  diphthong  occur- 
ring in  the  added  syllable  may  be  expressed  by  writing  it 
through  the  stem,  or  by  the  special  use  of  the  small  circle 
explained  in  Section  153. 


entire  adventure 


104 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


225.     Any  word  sign  or  outline  ending  without  a  hook  or 
circle  may  be  lengthened  to  add  the  word  there,  their  or  they 


are;    as, 


by  their  may  there  will  there         value  their   back  there 

(Tenth  List.) 

DOUBLE  LENGTH  WORD  SIGNS. 

226.     Practice   the    following  word  signs  until  they  are 
thoroughly  learned : 


neither 
entire 


i 
another 


matter 


rather  further 

farther 


whether 


longer 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


105 


77. 


106  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

227.  (a)  Fighter,  fetter,  fatter,  fitter,  voter,  invader,  theatre,  aster, 
Esther,  caster,  shouter,  shatter,  shutter  ;  fodder,  feeder,  gender,  engender, 
tender,  ladder,  Leider,  candor,  gander,  render,  squander,  moulder ;  father, 
feather,  mother,  Mather,  panther,  neither,  loiter,  elder,  Luther,  alder, 
Arthur,  rather,  water,  highwater,  diameter,  cylinder,  surrender,  insu- 
lator, legislator,  northerly,  stockholder,  disorder,  fender,  lantern, 
smoother,  dissenter,  yonder,  sunder,  central,  eccentric,  swelter. 

(b)  Simper,   ember,  chamber,  Sumpter,  timber,   bumper,   tamper, 
dumper,  stamper,  romper,  primper,  plumper,  limber,  lumber,  pumper, 
hamper,  scamper,  slumber,  somber,  Chamberlain. 

(c)  Injector,  alligator,  quarter,  educator,  lubricator,  supporter  (Spee- 
Rayter),  elector,  inspector,  Jupiter,  proprietor,  liberator,  typewriter. 

(d)  Word  Signs. — Another,  entire,  farther,  longer,  matter,  rather, 
whether,  up  there,  hope  their,  by  their,  be  there,  to  be  there,  subject 
their,  do  their,  had,  there,  come  there,  if  there,  for  there,  ever  there, 
have  their,  however  there,  think  their,  thank  their,  though  their,  see 
their,  so  there,  use  their,  was  there,  wish  their,  shall  there,  will  there, 
hear  their,  may  there,  in  there,  know  their,  why  their,  away  there,  sing 
their,  fill  their,  value  their,  over  there,  wherever  there,  whenever  there, 
through  their,  when  they  are,  think  there  is,  when  there  is,  ask  their 
right  there. 


LESSON    XIX. 
THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 

228.  We  now  come  to  the  last  general  principle  of  con- 
traction used  in  shorthand,  and  it  is  a  most  interesting  and 
important  one.  The  letters  /  and  d  recur  with  such  fre- 
quency as  to  require  some  other  and  briefer  expedient  for  their 
expression  than  the  stroke.  Of  the  stenographic  material  yet 
invented  there  still  remains  the  device  of  making  stems  half 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  107 

their  ordinary  length.  This  expedient  is  utilized  for  the  pur- 
pose of  expressing  t  or  d,  and  it  may  be  used  at  the  begin- 
ning, middle,  or  end  of  words,  as  illustrated  below.  By  this 
means  short  and  easy  outlines  are  afforded  for  a  vast  number  of 
words,  which  otherwise  would  be  written  with  long  and 
ungainly  outlines. 

229.  Halving  any  stem  with  or  without  an  initial  or  final 
hook,  adds  /  or  d;  thus, 

-* * v vrrr "VC Cr... 

fate  plate  plant  aptly  remotely  left 

230.  The  context  must  be  largely   depended  upon  in 
determining  whether  t  or  whether  d  is  added.   This  is  not  dim- 
cult,  however,  as  the  intelligent  pupil  will  readily  understand 
that,  "  This  is  a  colt  day,"  is  intended  for  "  This  is  a  cold  day." 

231.  With   the  four  liquids,  /,  m,  n,  and  r  a  distinction 
may  be  made  by  shading  the  halved  characters  to  add  d  and 
writing  them  light  to  add  /.     As  Way,  Yay,  Ing  and  Emp 
without  a  hook  are  never  halved,  there  will  be  no  conflict  with 
these  stems ;  thus, 

o                          j-'         *~*            ^         f~* 
--•>- 3 "** .- 

art  hard          might          made        night         need          light        lied 

(a)  The  shortened    characters  shaded  to  add   d,    take 
neither  initial  nor  final  hooks,  hence  we  have  derived  from  the 
stems  Mer,  Ner,  Way,  Yay,  Ing  and  Emp  the  following  char- 
acters : 

e^. •. *^ ~"b r, »-2. .. ... .  .^ _ 

Mert  Nert         Waynd       Yeld  Ingnd      Empend 

(b)  The  foregoing  do  not  conflict  with  the  followin0  char 
icters  which  are  made  light  to  express  t  or  d: 

•»,._ <^ ^ ~i.  .  .  ..   (7 ,O>.  .......  /o 

Wemt-d         Went-d      Arnt-d      Lent-d         Nent-d  Ment-d 


108  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

232.  Half  lengths  are  read  precisely  the  same  as  full 
lengths  with  respect  to  vowels  and  hooks ;  the  /  or  d  denoted 
by  halving  is  read  after  final  hooks,  but  before  a  final  circle  or 
loop ;  as, 

\  t  j- 


bright  contrived  contents  cautioned 

233.  The  Names  of  the  half  lengths  are  formed  by  add- 
ing the  syllables  et  or  ed  to  the  sound  of  the  full  length,  or  by 
adding  /  or  d  to  the  name  of  the  full  length.     The  names  of 
the  shortened  characters  should  be  thoroughly  learned.     No 
difficulty  will  be  experienced  in  this  direction  if  the  student 
associates    the  name  of  the  full  length  with  t  or  d.     Thus, 
the  half  length  of  Tee  is  Tet,  of  Dee  is  Det,  of  Es  is  Est,  of 
Pel  is  Pelt  or  Plet,  of  Spel  is  Splet,  of  Blen  is  Blent  or  Blend. 
In  the  naming  of  consonant  outlines  a  single  syllable  indicates 
a  single  stem,  and  each  and  every  syllable  indicates  a  separate 
and  distinct  stem  whether  hooked  or  plain,  half  or  full  sized. 
Thus,  Grent  is  the  name  of  the  outline  for  grant ;  while  the 
two  syllables  Ger-Net  is  the  name  which  correctly  represents 
the  word  garnet ;  and  the  three  syllables  Ger- En-Tee  is  the 
name  of  the  outline  for  guarantee. 

234.  If  the  context  is  not  a  sufficient  distinction  to  deter- 
mine   whether   t  or  d    is  added,     as    might  happen   in   rare 
instances,  absolute  accuracy  may  be  secured  by  writing  a  long- 
hand t  or  d  as  the  case  requires  under  the  halved  character. 
Thus,  pate  may  be  distinguished  from  paid  by  writing  a  long- 
hand  t  under  Pet  for  the  former  word  and  d  under  Pet  for  the 
latter  word.      It  is  no  discredit  to  a  stenographer  to  see  an 
occasional  longhand    t  or  d  scattered  through  his  notes  for 
this  purpose. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  109 

SOME  USES  OF  THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 

235.  The  termination  n/  preceded  by  Kay,  Gay,  Ef,  Vee 
or  Lay  should  be  expressed  by  Ret  instead  of  Ard  in  order  to 
secure  a  more  distinct  junction,  and  thus  render  the  two  stems 
perfectly  legible. 

:;-^  ____  ^  .......  C  ........  ;.:jy  ........  ^ 

card  geared  fired  veered  lard 

236.  The  ed  of  the  past  tense  of  regular  verbs  should, 
when  the  present  tense  is  represented  by  a  full   length,    be 
expressed  by  halving  ;  thus, 

.........  ,  ..........  <-.  ........  Z  .........  v-  .........  j  ..... 

valued  cared  cheered  provoked  cited 

237.  It  is  often  advantageous  to  disjoin  the  stroke  Dee  to 
express  this  syllable,  especially  following  perpendicular  strokes 
and  to  form  the  past  tense  of  certain  word  signs  ;  as, 

--TI  .........  \  ........  -i  ..........  'i  ..........  V 

treated  dreaded         astonished  established  subjected 

It  is,  however,  only  occasionally  necessary  to  make  any 
distinction  between  the  present  and  past  tense  and  perfect  par- 
ticiple of  regular  verbs  as  the  words  are  made  sufficiently  legi- 
ble by  using  the  present  tense  ;  as, 


regard-ed  demand-ed          controll-ed  resent-ed 

238.  The  terminations  tary,  tory  are  generally  expressed 
by  the  consonants  Tee-Ray,  the  Tee  being  usually  indicated 
by  halving  the  preceding  stroke  ;  thus, 


j/  _____________  !/  ........  •;  ...........  r_  ________ 

territory  directory  secretary  Inventory 


110  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

239.  The   terminations   tel,    del  when   preceded  by  the 
straight  stroke  Kay  or  Gay,  or  any  of  the  curved  consonants, 
are  best  expressed  by  the  halving  principle,  followed  by  Lay 
or  El  ;  thus, 

*£      T.        ^       *         f 

•  ......  / 

middle         needle  cattle  fatal  vital 

(a)  When  the  terminations  tel  and  del  are  preceded  by 
any  of  the  straight  strokes  except  Kay  and  Gay,  as  in  the  fol- 
lowing words,  use  Tee  or  Dee  with  an  1-hook  :  Bottle,  battle, 
beadle,  puddle,  paddle,  total,  title,  chattel,  etc. 

240.  It  is  allowable  in  a  few  instances,  where  it  would  be 
inconvenient  to  use  any  other  form,  to  strike  Est  upwards  ;  as, 


visionist  excursionist  opinionist 

* 

(a)  According  to  Sec.  196,  the  Stey  loop  may  be  written 

within  the  Shun  hook  to  add  the  syllable  est  in  preference 
to  the  form  given  above. 

(b)  Following  an  n-hook  Est  should  be  written  down- 
ward rather  than  upward,  that  it  may  not  conflict  with  Isht,  as 
the  following  comparison  will  show  : 


finest  finished  vainest  vanished 

241.  The  terminations  ten,  den  may  be  expressed  by  the 
use  of  the  halving  principle  and  the  stroke  En,  or  by  the  stroke 
Tee  or  Dee  with  the  n-hook.  The  latter  is  preferable  for  the 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  Ill 

expression  of  den,  (as  golden,  gladden,  Sheldon,  Dry  den,  redden, 
etc);  the  former  for  the  expression  o>iten;  thus, 


flatten  fountain  forgotten         maintain 

(a)  After  Pee,  Bee,  Tee,  Dee  and  Em,  ten  and  den  must 
be  expressed  by  the  strokes  Tee  and  Dee  with  the  n-hook  in 
accordance  with  Sec.  243  f. 

242.  When  the  sound  of  /  or  d  occurs  in  such  a  connec- 
tion that  a  stroke  cannot  be  conveniently  shortened  and  joined, 
the  following  stroke  may  be  disjoined  in  order  to  show  the 
half  length;  as, 


critic  emphatic  escheat  aptness 

EXCEPTIONS  TO  THE  USE  OF  THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 

243.  There  are  certain  almost  obvious  restrictions  in  the 
use  of  the  halving  principle,  and  in  some  cases  t  and  d  must 
be  expressed  by  the  stroke,  as  in  the  following  cases  : 

(a)     When  /  or  d  is  followed  by  a  final  vowel  ;  as, 


pity  window  flighty  entry 

(b)     When  two  concurrent  vowels  intervene  between  /  or 
d  and  a  preceding  consonant  ;  as, 


poet  quiet  fluid  duet 


112  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

(c)     When  Ray  is  the  only  consonant  preceding  final  / 
or  d;  as, 


right  ride  rate  raid 

(d)     When  a  vowel  intervenes  between  final  /  or  d  and  a 
consonant  which  is  preceded  by  an  initial  vowel  ;  as  in 


n          -i 


unite  allowed  acute  abed 

(e)  When  a  vowel  precedes  and  follows  I/ay,  En  or  Ray 
the  halving  principle  must  not  be  used  to  indicate  a  final  d. 
The  object  of  this  rule  is  to  distinguish  between  such  word  as, 


married  marred  solid          sold  renewed  ruined 

(f)     A  consonant  stroke  joined  to  another  without  a  dis- 
tinct angle  should  not  be  shortened ;  as, 


effect  liked  divide  kicked  donate 

244.  The  following  word  signs  are  perhaps  more  difficult 
than  any  heretofore  presented.  They  are,  however,  invalua- 
ble and  the  student  must  not  shirk  the  labor  of  thoroughly 
memorizing  them : 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

(Eleventh  List.) 

HALF  LENGTH  WORD  SIGNS. 


118 


put,  about 


immediate-ly 
^ — >      made 


_<rr . great 


—         quite 

c^          somewhat 

authority 

nr.         could 

£*-—       sometime 

5  throughout 

_          God 

not 

^ 

^^       good 

1  nature 

in  order 

if  it 

alter 

v^       naturally 

J                 did  not 
._..J  j  _..       do  not 

s,    ^             future 

~Y  •~~**- 

( 

had  not 

C          thought 
(  ,        think  it 

is  not 

/             gentlemen 

**--•'   as  not,  has  not 

'  •""-          gentleman 

^            astonish-ed- 

\                          ment 
/.  ,  establish-ed- 

^         need 
>-*_under,  hund- 

cannot,  kind 
account 

meiit 

red-th 

)            is  it 
/A  „       has  it,  as  it 

-*  ^  want 

r* 

will  not 

~^*      went 

used 

J 

f* 

wished 

Q  told,  till  it 

we  will  not 

C         little 

J2^            let 

\  toward 

"^  are  not 

~       world 

called,  equalled 

t/*          we  are  not 
iS?.  were  not 

f*       concealed 

„       valued 

mind 

r..         seldom 

*~"~"VT     "* 

xrs_.t  —  am  not,  may  not 

•v            read,  Lord 

-^            heard 

_    particular-ly 

we  may  not 

hard 

^"        opportunity 

k/     word 

<\ 
.0,     spirit 
-^—       separate-d 

it  will  not 

c_      according-ly 

xj 

might 

s~\ 

cared 

we  are  not 

met 

114 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


acknowledged    afterward        forward        inconsistent     indiscriminate-ion 

Ji 7  y_. 

indispensable     intelligence      intelligent      intelligible        interest 


_1 


onward        practicable-ility  transcript    understand       understood 

245.  Derivatives   from  the   foregoing    word   signs   are 
expressed  by  joining  or  disjoining  the  necessary  stroke,  as  Lay 
disjoined  for  intelligently,  inconsistently,  indiscriminately.     Spir- 
itualism   is     written     Sprets-Km ;      Spiritualist,    Spret-Stey ; 
Spiritualistic,  Sprets-Kay ;  and  in  analogy  with  the  foregoing 
the  student  will  easily  learn  to  make  the  derivative  forms  of 
other  words. 

246.  Did  not,  do  not  and  had  not,  when  joined  in  phrases 
beginning  with  /  or  you,  may  be  distinguished  when  neces- 
sary by  inserting  the  vowel ;  but  usually  they  are  written  as 
follows : 

1 


I  did  not 
* 


I  do  not 


I  had  not 


you  did  not     you  do  not      you  had  not 

247.  For  the  sake  of  unmistakable  distinction  between 
can  and  cannot,  which  sometimes  conflict  in  phrases,  write  can 
unusually  long  and  cannot  unusually  short.  Especial  atten- 
tion and  practice  should  be  given  these  words. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  115 

248.  The  young  writer  must  not  forget  that  a  word  sign 
should  be  vocalized  in  obscure  phrases,  or  when  used  in 
unwonted  connections ;  as, 


If  this  Kind  be  'rue     If  this  account  be  trae 

249.  Every  writer  will  instinctively  fall  into  methods  of 
his  own  of  making  nice  distinctions  whenever  he  thinks  it 
necessary,  such  for  instance,  as  writing  Net- El  for  natural,  and 
Net  with  disjoined  Lay  for  naturally.     While  in  all  such  cases 
the  grammatical  construction  with  the  context  will  determine 
which  is  meant,  yet  nice  differences  may  be  made  by  varying 
the  outline  to  secure  ease  and  prompt  reading. 

250.  Skillful  writers  make  use  of  the  halving  principle  to 
a  very  great  extent  to  indicate  the  addition  of  it,  had,  would. 
and  other  words  explained  hereafter: 

I / ._, y. ,yi 

It  had  they  had  she  had        which  had       such  had 

it  would        they  would          she  would      which  would   such  would 

251.  An   n-hook   may  be  attached  to  a  character  thus 
halved  to  add  not ;   as, 


_    / / \|0 

It  had  not      they  had  not     she  had  not      which  had  not    such  had  not 
It  would  not  they  would  not  she  would  not  which  would  not  such  would  not 

(a)  When  it  is  added  by  halving,  the  shortened  character 
is  retained  in  its  position. 


116  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


X"    \'                   \     1'    f  /v     -  <. 

4  D  \  _    .  v  . I-. ...  .. 


f  J'  J"  J       *J     L"   i-  ^  r3  ^  v 

•" —  Vi A I" 'T*-  "/*•- V—     " 


•X 

s 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 

*)»  ' 

. 1-..  ..<....  .<* 


117 


1$. 
SO 


k. 


T  n- 


.  «,. 


^  r-   ~0 

.X:  --  ft 


118  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

252.  (a)  Cut,  caught,  ached,  cat,  act,  Kate,  cute,  coat,  kite,  quit,  quote, 
quoit,  gate,  goat,  gout,  get,  got,  cheat,  chat,  etched,  jut,  jot,  jute,  dot, 
dote,  doubt,  debt,  date,  tight,  taught,  toot,  taut,  butt,  boot,  bight, 
boat,  bought,  habit,  bet,  bait,  beat,  pat,  pit,  pate,  apt,  aped,  pout,  fight, 
fate,  aft,  fought,  feet,  vat,  vote,  thought,  iced,  oust,  shut,  sheet,  shout, 
shot,  shoot. 

(b)  Pad,  paid,  pod,  pied,  pawed,  bid,    bad,  bode,  Boyd,  bouyed, 
bud,  bowed,  tied,  tweed,  towed,  deed,  died,  Dowd,  dead,  chide,  chewed, 
joyed,  aged,  edged,  Jude,  keyed,  kid,  code,  cud,  guyed,  goad,  feed,  fed, 
fade,  fad,  vied,  void,  viewed,  thawed,  thud,  eased,  oozed,  shod,  showed, 
shade. 

(c)  Light,  lied ;  lit,  lid ;  oiled,  hilt ;  halt,  hauled ;  late,  laid ;  Holt, 
hold ;  hurt,  herd ;  heart,  hard ;   art,  erred ;    meat,  mead ;    mit,  mid ; 
tnate,  made  ;  moat,  mode  ;  neat,  need ;  naught,  gnawed ;   night,  hind  ; 
mute,  mewed ;   note,   node ;  aunt,   hand ;  slit,   slide ;   salt,  sold ;  sort, 
seared ;  smote,  seemed  ;  sent,  send ;  snout,  sound ;  knit,  end. 

(d)  Sipped,  sapped,  supped,  spot,  spite,  spout,  sobbed,  cited,  stout, 
stayed,  sect,  sacked,  soft,  sift,  saved,  seethed,  soothed,  seized,  pits,  pates, 
pouts,  beads,  buds,  Todd's,  tides,  chides,  Jude's,  codes,  cuds,  fights,  fates, 
fades,  shouts,  shades. 

(e)  Willed,  walled,  wailed,  wilt,  welt,  wart,  wired,  warred,  went, 
wont,  wind,  wind,  wild,  wield. 

(f )  Plot,  plight,  plied,  played,  plods,  plowed,  bleeds,  blights,  hob- 
bled, huddled,  addled,  idled,  cloyed,  Clyde,  cleat,  glade,  glad,  gloat,  glut, 
fleet,  flight,  float,  flood,  field,  failed,  fooled,  flute,  athlete,  prate,  prod, 
prude,  bright,  brought,  bride,  broad,  board,  bird,  treat,  trod,  tread, 
dread,  dared,  dried,  drought,  creed,  court,  curt,  cart,  greet,  grit,  great, 
grade,  freed,  fried,  fraught,  freight,  fret,  throat,  thread. 

(g)  Pinned,  pined,  pound,  pond,  happened,  compound,  point,  pant, 
pint,  bent,  bunt,  bind,    combined,    tint,    tent,    taint,    contend,    con- 
tent, tinned,   toned,   tuned,   dined,   dunned,  dint,   dent,  daunt,  chant, 
jaunt,  chained,  joined,  cant,  canned,  Kent,  coined,  gained,  faint,  font, 
fount,  find,  found,  fund,  vent,  vaunt,  thinned,  assigned,  assent,  shunned, 
offend,  commissioned,  lend,  lint,  land,  island,  highland,  arraigned,  blind, 
bland,  blunt,  grind,  grand,  craned,  cleaned,  cleft,  ground,  pruned,  brunt, 
brand,  print,  aground,  surround,  around. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  119 

(h)  Cautioned,  cushioned,  conditioned,  occasioned,  fashioned, 
motioned,  sanctioned,  stationed,  quotient,  ancient,  patient 

(i)  Splits,  supplied,  seclude,  secret,  spread,  sobered,  stride,  street, 
strides,  second,  summoned,  concerned,  sprained,  secrets,  separates,  rifts, 
rafts,  clouds,  creeds,  screeds,  sacred,  cements,  consonant. 

(j)  Aptly,  optic,  potash,  potato,  deadly,  detach,  beautify,  butler, 
bitter,  batter,  bottom,  cotton,  cattle,  cuttle,  cottage,  fatal,  agitate, 
indicate,  notify. 

(k)  Cured,  marred,  moored,  feared,  afford,  lard,  lured,  lowered, 
geared,  paged,  baked,  backed,  packed,  appetite,  pitched,  poached, 
touched,  attached,  matched,  armed,  rigid,  orbit  (Ar-Bet),  robbed,  (Ray- 
Bed),  limit,  loved,  left,  lived,  refute,  rushed,  budged,,  bathed,  bullet, 
ballot,  billet,  ticket,  ditched,  tucked,  tempt,  debate,  daubed,  dodged, 
checked,  chipped,  Egypt,  mocked,  nagged,  method,  mild,  mold,  mart, 
invert,  insured,  slurred,  immured,  defraud,  retreat,  repent,  pyramid, 
radical,  periodical,  remotely,  indicter,  president,  precedent. 

(1)  Ascertained,  legitimate,  fortified,  rectitude,  fortunate,  captured, 
detached,  deduct,  detect,  abdicate,  abduct,  actuated,  affidavit,  evident, 
estimate,  esteemed,  ultimate,  latitude,  redeemed,  retained,  modified, 
mitigate,  midnight,  sentiment,  verdict,  gratitude,  gratified,  cultivate, 
intend,  intent,  indent,  chartered,  protect,  indicate. 

(m)  Treated,  dated,  deeded,  freighted,  situated,  doubted,  founded, 
dreaded,  fainted,  attended,  sounded,  rested,  requested,  vested,  slighted, 
slatted,  sledded. 

(n)  Territory,  auditory,  predatory,  laboratory,  voluntary,  secondary, 
directory,  delatory,  dedicatory,  supplicatory,  expiatory,  adulatory,  mid- 
dle, metal,  fatal,  needle,  cuttle,  cattle,  muddle,  vital,  scuttle,  fiddle ; 
preparatory,  elementary,  derogatory,  defamitory,  hereditary,  observa- 
tory, salutatory,  respiratory,  refractory,  dormitory,  inventory,  nugatory, 
peremptory,  lavatory,  finest,  vainest,  thinnest,  meanest,  leanest,  van- 
ished, varnished,  finished;  elocutionist,  fashionist,  visionist,  flatten, 
maintain,  curtain,  shorten,  wanton,  emphatic,  methodic,  critic,  olden, 
escheat,  attitude,  awaited. 

(o)  Pity,  duty,  body,  needy,  windy,  equity,  gaiety,  cruet,  poet,  riot, 
quiet,  triad,  Jewett ;  rod,  red,  wrought,  Reid,  wrote,  rood,  rude,  allayed, 
arrayed,  allowed,  married,  marred,  tarried,  tarred,  select,  afflict,  vacate, 
locked,  deflect,  locate,  aggregate,  affect. 


120  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

(p)  Word  Signs  and  Phrases.— About,  according,  according^ 
account,  after,  am  not,  are  not,  is  it,  as  not,  astonished,  astonish, 
astonishment,  called,  cannot,  cared,  could,  did  not,  do  not,  equaled, 
established,  establishment,  gentleman,  gentlemen,  God,  good,  great, 
had  not,  has  it,  has  not,  heard,  if  it,  immediately,  in  order,  is  it,  is  not, 
it  will  not,  kind,  let,  let  us,  Lord,  made,  may  not,  might,  mind,  nature, 
naturally,  not,  opportunity,  particularly,  put,  quite,  read,  somewhat, 
spirit,  that,  thought,  throughout,  till  it,  told,  toward,  under,  used,  val- 
ued, want  we  are  not,  we  will  not,  were  not;  will  not,  wished,  without, 
word,  world. 


LESSON  XX. 
PREFIX    SIGNS. 

253.  A   few  prefix  signs  have  already  been  presented. 
A  more  complete  list  is  now  given,  most  of  which  are  sug- 
gestive   of    the    prefix     and    easy  of  application,    but    will 
require    considerable     study   and  practice.      The  student  is 
reminded  that  study  and  practice  should  go  hand  in  hand  ; 
both  should  be  carried  on  simultaneously.  The  Reading  Exer- 
cises should  be  dwelt  upon  until  every  word  is  familiar,  and 
they  should  be  carefully  copied  if  necessary  to  impress  the 
forms  upon  the  mind.     The  Writing  Exercises  should  be  each 
written  over  several  times.       A  thorough  review  should  be 
taken   from  time  to  time,    especially   if  anything  has  been 
slighted  or  omitted. 

254.  Con,  Com,  Cog,    are   best  represented  by  writing 
the  latter  part  of  the  word  under  or  clos£  to  the  preceding 
word;  thus, 


In  this  connection         they  compose  give  control  their  cognomen 

255.     When  it  is  not  convenient  to  so  indicate  the  prefix  by 
writing  the  latter  part  of  the  word  under  the  preceding  word, 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  121 

it  may  be  expressed  by  a  dot  written  at  the  beginning  of  the 
remainder  of  the  word  ;  as, 

V         \  .„  L 


compile  compare         comment  cognate  conduct 

(a)  When  a  line  of  writing  begins  with  a  prefix  it  is  nec- 
cessary  to  use  the  con-dot,  unless  the  writer  uses  the  device 
adopted   by   some   reporters   of  writing  the  latter  part  of  the 
word  very  close  to  the  left  hand  marginal  line  to  indicate  the 
prefix.      If  there  is  no  marginal  line,  then  very  close  to  the 
left   edge   of  the   paper.      The   dot  should  be  used  for  thz 
expression   of  con,  com,    cog,  only  in  cases  where  it  is  very 
convenient,     as    where    a    word  is  isolated,  and  there  is  no 
convenient  preceding  outline  to  indicate  it  by  proximity. 

(b)  When  the,  a  or  /  is  the  next  word  immediately  pre- 
ceding one  beginning  with  a  con-dot,  the  ticks  may  be  dis- 
joined and  written  in  place  of  the  con-dot ;  as, 

JL         jL 


and  contained   the  contents    I  concede 

256.  When  con,  com,  cog,  or  accom  occurs  in  the  middle 
of  a  word  it  is  implied  by  writing  the  latter  part  of  the  word 
under  or  very  close  to  the  first  syllable ;  as, 


_J     \0  _b\ £      V          

J  '<• 

decompose          discontent       misconstrue  recognize  reconcile 

(a)  The  prefix  may  safely  be  omitted  in  many  words, 
such    as   inconsistent,    incomplete,  inconvenience,    inconsequence, 
misconduct.     It  may  also  be  omitted  without  loss  of  legibility, 
when  a  word  begins  with  a  backward  In-hook,  as,  inconsidera- 
tion,  inconsolable,  unconcern,  etc. 

(b)  COM,  in  the  following  words  is  expressed  by  Kay- 
Em:    Comity,  commissary,     commiserate,     commotion,    comrade. 


122  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

Conrad  may  be  written  Ken-Ray-Dee,  and  commerce  Kay-Mers. 
Conic  should  be  written  Ken- Kay. 

(c)  Concern,  occurring  in  concomitant  and  concomitance 
is  written  with  two  light  dots,  one  above  the  other,  at  the 
beginning  of  the  remainder  of  the  word ;  thus, 

1  1 


concomitant          concomitance 

257.     Accom    is  expressed  by  the  stroke  Kay  disjoined ; 
thus, 

JbL.  I^.._ 


accommodation  accompany  accomplish 

258.  Contra,  Contro,  Contri,  Counter,  are  expressed  by 
a  small  tick  written  before  the  remainder  of  the  word  ;  as, 

_JL _ ^ .V .1 

contradict  controvert  contribution  counterfeit 

259.  For,   fore  is  expressed  by  Ef,  either  joined  or  dis- 
joined : 

forward  foreseen  forewarn  foreswear 

(a)  In   the  following  words  the  prefix  should  be  repre- 
sented by  Per  :    forget,  forgot-ten,  forgive-n,  foretell,  forgave, 
forego. 

(b)  The  word  forenoon  should  be  written  Ef-Ray-Nen,  to 
more  surely  distinguish  it  from  afternoon. 

260.  Intro,  Inter,   Enter,  Anti,  Ante  are  expressed  by 
Net,  either  joined  or  disjoined ;  as, 

±1  _.^  J'  _^  .Jl_ 

U 

introduce  intercourse  entertain  interpret  anticipate 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  123 

261 .     Magna,  Magne,  Magni  are  expressed  by  Em  written 
over  the  remainder  of  the  word ;  as, 


magnitude  maguauimious  magnesia  magnetism 

262.     Circum,  Self  are  expressed  by  a  small  circle  written 
before  the  remainder  of  the  word ;  as, 


Circumscribe  self-improvement  self-made 

263.  Self-Con,  Self-Contra  are  expressed  by  writing  the 
small  circle  in  the  place  of  the  con-dot  ;  as, 

O  0 

r_         L 

self-conceit       self-contradict 

264.  When  any  one  of  the  above  prefixes  is  preceded  by 
a  syllable,  as  in,  en  or  un,  such  syllable  may  be  expressed  by 
the  proper  letter  or  letters  joined  to  or  written  near  the  pre- 
fix ;  as, 

L,.  ^L 

\  -> 

disencumber  uncontradict  unaccomplished 

(a)    The  advanced  writer  may  safely  join  many  prefixes, 
but  When  joined  they  should  be  placed  on  the  line  ;  as, 


self-sacrifice  unselfish 

265.    Inre,  Unre  are  expressed  by  Ner  ;  thus, 


unrecompense  in  response  in  receipt 


124  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

266.  Word  signs  are  sometimes  used  as  prefix  signs ;  thus, 

N^ 

_ I _ s* ..^^.. 

almost  undertake  understand  afterward 

267.  With,  when  a  prefix,  is  expressed  by  the  stem  Thee 
joined  to  the  remainder  of  the  word ;  thus, 


V      i 

I 


withdraw       withheld  withstand 


268.    Trans  is  expressed  by  Ters,  the  n  being  omitted ; 
thus, 


3          Lv         f          I 

transpose  transcribe    .          translate  transport 

Other  prefixes  found  in  the  language  are  expressed  by 
the  proper  phonographic  outline. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


125 


\. 

J 


v,       c      V.      Vc-      ~» 


126  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

269.  (a)  In  conversation,  in  construction,  in  comparison,  in  contribu- 
ting, in  reconciling,  was  content,  was  composed,  it  contained, 
may  conduce,  will  compel,  will  comprise,  will  consecrate,  they 
combat,  a  new  contrivance,  I  am  conscious,  your  committee,  will  con- 
cede, it  may  consume,  we  will  confer,  this  conception,  their  concern,  in 
concert,  her  consent,  this  conclave,  do  you  commence,  my  commission, 
was  condemned,  it  was  continued,  I  will  confess,  it  will  conflict,  it 
should  conform,  we  shall  confront,  do  not  confuse,  will  you  concede,  I 
will  consent,  did  he  confess,  you  will  confer,  it  will  consume,  a  little 
conceit ,  in  that  confederation,  we  congratulate,  the  present  configura- 
tion, they  will  conciliate,  he  was  convicted,  this  is  condensed,  I 
will  compare,  take  the  communion,  he  was  compassionate,  easily  con- 
geals, very  combative,  this  commission,  somewhat  cumbersome;  com- 
pile, cognate,  cognizant,  cognomen,  concede,  conceit,  concentrate,  con- 
ceal, confederation,  convicted,  condensed,  compare,  commune,  compas- 
sionate, congeal,  combative,  cumbersome,  concord,  concur,  concussion, 
condensation,  condolence,  concoct. 

(b)  Decompose,  misconduct,  discomfit,  disconnection,  incommode, 
incompressible,     irreconciliation,     recognition,   reconsider,   recommit, 
misconstrue,   noncontagious,  noncommission,  unconquerable,    recum- 
bent, accommodation,   accomplish,   preconceived,   unconcerned. 

(c)  Contradiction,  controvert,  contribution,  contraband,  contradis- 
tinction, contribute,  controversy,  counterfeit,  counterpane,  countersign, 
countermand,  counterpoise. 

(d)  Forewarn,  foreseen,   foreswear,  foreknowledge,    forecast,  fore- 
close, forefather,  forefinger,  forego,   forehead,  foreland,  foresee,  fore- 
sight, forebode. 

Use  Per  for  the  prefix  in  the  following  words :  forget,  forgive, 
foretell. 

(e)  Intercede,  interlard,  interlink,  interlude,  intermeddle,  intermit, 
intermingle,   intermittant,    interpreter,  interrogate,   introduce,   inter- 
course, entertain,  intervene,  interrupt. 

(f )  Magnetism,  Magna  Charta,  magnitude,   magnetic,  magnificent 
magnify. 

(g)  Circumvention,   circumspect,   circumnavigate,   circumference, 
circumscribe ;    selfish,     self-improvement,     self-knowledge,   self-made, 
eelf-important,  self-conceit,  self-contradict,  self-denial,  self-esteem,  self- 
evident,  self-same. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND  12? 

(h)  Unrecompensed,  in  response,  in  receipt,  in  reply,  in  writing,  in 
reference,  in  regard,  unreasonable,  in  respect. 

(i)  Almost,  undertake,  afterward,  understood,  after- thought,  there- 
after, therefore,  overcharge,  overhaste,  overreach,  overdraw,  overcloud, 
overdo. 

(j)   Withdraw,  withstand,  withhold,  withheld. 

(k)   Transfer,  transpose,  translate,  transcend. 

MR.  L/EiyAND  B.  CASE, 

Detroit,  Michigan. 

DEAR  SIR  : — Can  you  recommend  to  me  some  young  man  capable 
of  doing  light  reporting,  etc.,  who  is  also  a  good  typewriter  operator  ? 
I  have  a  class  of  work  that  I  desire  such  a  person  for,  viz :  Justice 
Court,  Police  Court,  dictation,  testimony  before  commissioners,  and 
such  work.  He  must  be  of  correct  habits,  steady,  and  not  lazy.  If  you 
can  recommend  such  a  person  please  put  him  in  communication  with 
me  and  oblige.  I  have  no  terms  to  offer — I  will  say  what  I  will  pay 
when  I  see  my  man,  or  know  what  he  is  capable  of  doing.  My  present 
force  consists  of  two  assistants — Mr.  Atkinson,  who  reports  in  one  of 
my  courts,  and  Miss  Johnson  (whom  you  have  met) ,  who  does  my  copy- 
ing and  general  office  reporting. 

Yours  very  truly, 

HENRY  F.  WALCH. 


LESSON  XXI. 
AFFIXES. 

270.     Ble,  Bly,  are  expressed  by  a  joined  Bee,  when  Bel 
cannot  be  conveniently  used  ;  thus, 


I. 
_  \j  .  __—  >  ___ 

\  \ 

sensibly  attainable  accountable 

271.     Bleness,    Fulness,   Someness  are   expressed  by   a 
small  circle  at  the  end  of  the  preceding  part  or  the  word;  thus, 


feebleness  carefulness  irksomeness 


128  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

272.     Lessness  is  denoted  by  a  large  circle  written  at  the 
end  of  the  preceding  part  of  the  word  ;  thus, 


carelessness       thoughtlessness 

_73      Fore,    Far,    terminating  a  word  is  expressed  by  a 
joined  Ef  ;  thus, 


v  <v 


-^r 


therefore  wherefore  so  far  as  far  as 

274.     Ing   is  expressed  by  a  light  dot  at  the  end  of  the 
word,  and  sometimes  by  the  stroke  Ing  ;  as, 


testing  losing  meeting  writing  saying 

275.      Ing   ther   is   expressed   by  turning  the  dot  into  a 
heavy  disjoined  tick  ;  thus, 


doing  their  giving  their       showing  their       going  there 

276.     Ing  his,  Ing  us  may  be  expressed  by  a  small  cir- 
cle written  in  the  place  of  the  Ing  dot  ;  as, 


do'nghis  giving  us 

277.     When  not  convenient  to  use  the  stroke  for  ings,  it 
is  best  expressed  by  two  light  dots ;  thus, 


doings       proceedings  misgivings 

278.     Ingly  is  expressed  by  a  heavy  disjoined  tick  ;  thus, 

^-j-g  v ,\  j 

_£__ 

amazingly  knowingly  charmingly 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  129 

279.     Alogy,    Ology   is  expressed  by  Jay,    either  joined 
or  disjoined  ;  thus, 


physiology  theology  zoology  mineralogy 

(a)  Derivatives  from  this  class  of  words,  are  formed  by 
adding  the  necessary  outline;  as,  Efs-Jayst  for  physiologist  ; 
Em-Ner-Jayst  for  mineralogist  ;  Tet-Jayst  (disjoined)  for  tau- 
tologist. 

280.  Ship  is  denoted  by  Ish,  either  joined  or  disjoined  ; 
as, 


___,_  ...... y 

friendship  ownership  hardship  partnership 

281.     Tial  when  it   cannot  be  conveniently  expressed  by 
Shel  may  be  denoted  by  Ish  ;  thus, 


potential  •          prudential  substantial  presidential 

282.     Soever   is   expressed  by  Iss-Vee  joined,  or  by  Iss 
disjoined;  thus, 


wheresoever  whensoever  whosoever  whithersoever 

283.     Mental,  Mentality  is  expressed  by  Ment  disjoined  • 
thus, 


instrumental-ity        fundamental 


130  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

284.     Lity,    Rity   may   be   expressed   by  disjoining  the 
last  consonant  of  the  preceding  part  of  the  word ;  thus, 


Instability  disparity  popularity  prosperity 

(a)  In  analogy  with  this  principle  we  write  the  following 
and  similar  words  by  disjoining  the  last  stroke  :  Verbosity, 
urbanity,  Christianity. 

285.  A  word  sign  is  often  used  as  an  affix  sign  ;  thus, 

...1         4  9         "A-         ^ 

c  \  \ 

thereafter  thereto  thereof  whenever  reform 

(a)     Where  of  and  to  conflict,  the  sign  for  of  is  disjoined. 

286.  Full,  Fully  are  expressed  by  the  f-hook  and  some- 
times by  the  stem  Ef ;  thus, 


careful  deceitful  graceful  painful 

287.  Ever  is  sometimes  expressed  by  the  f-hook,    but 
more  generally  by  the  stem  Vee  ;  as, 

whichever  whoever  whenever  wherever 

288.  On  is  sometimes  added  by  the  n-hook  ;  thus, 


looker-on  thereon  right  on  go  on 

289.     With,  as  an  affix,  is  expressed  by  Weh  and  some- 
times by  Thee  ;  as, 


herewith  wherewith  forthwith  therewith 


READING  EXERCISE. 


.^....c/X;._^ 


o      o 


^ 


^f  \. 

^N0          T 

..;A\._...U 


J ... 


- 


132  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

290.  (a)  Sensible,  accountable,  attainable,  forcible,  profitable,  insur- 
mountable, feasible,  lovable,  questionable,  comfortably. 

(b)  Feebleness,  thoughtfulness,  carefulness,  troublesomeness,  art- 
fulness, awfulness,  bashfulness,  fearfuluess,  forgetfulness,  fretfulness, 
hopefulness,  irksomeness,  joyfulness,  fulsomeuess,  lawfulness,  teacha- 
bleness, gladsomeness,  mirthfulness,  youthfulness,  spitefulness,  restful- 
ness,  slothfulness,  thankfulness,  sorrowfulness,  watchfulness,  wistful- 
ness. 

(c)  Carelessness,  thoughtlessness,  heedlessness,   lawlessness,    art- 
Kssness,  blamelessness,  endlessness,  fruitlessuess,  harmlessness,  heart- 
^essness,  joylessness,  lifelessuess,  matchlessness,  uselessness,  worthless- 
ness,  restlessness. 

(d)  Therefore,  wherefore,  so  far,  as  far  as. 

(e)  Doing,   thinking,  making,  committing,   undertaking,   doings, 
sayings. 

(f)  Knowingly,    amazingly,    charmingly,    strikingly,    provokingly, 
laughingly,  lovingly,  seemingly,  bewitchiugly,  soothingly,   searchingly, 
trippingly. 

(g)  Etomology,  physiology,  zoology,  phrenology,  theology,  mineral- 
ogy, tautology,  chronology,  osteology,  physiologist,  zoologist,  theolo- 
gian. 

(h)  Friendship,  lordship,  ownership,  partnership,  wardship,  hard- 
ship, township,  courtship,  fellowship,  rivalship,  mayorship,  sheriffship. 

(i)    Potential,  prudeutial,  substantial. 

( j)  Wheresoever,  whensoever,  whosoever,  whithersoever. 

(k)  Instrumental,  fundamental,  ornamental,  supplemental,  elemen- 
tal, experimental. 

(1)  Accessibility,  adaptability,  advisability,  durability,  admissibility, 
capability,  compatibility,  sensibility,  affability,  instability,  account- 
ability, disability,  destructibility,  divisibility,  feasibility,  immo- 
bility, fusibility,  availability,  debility,  liability,  nobility,  credibility, 
plausibility,  legality,  disparity,  prosperity,  posterity,  popularity,  vul- 
garity, verbosity,  urbanity,  Christianity. 

(m)  Thereto,  hereto,  whereto,  thereof,  hereof,  whereof,  thereafter, 
vvheuever,  wherever,  thereon,  reform,  transform,  perform,  deform. 

(n)  Careful,  hateful,  deceitful,  mournful,  painful,  graceful ;  which- 
ever, whoever;  looker-on,  thereon,  right  on,  set  on;  herewith,  where- 
with, forthwith. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  133 

LESSON  XXII. 

ENLARGED  WEH  AND  YEH. 

291.     Enlarging  a  brief  Way  word  sign  adds  any  othei 
brief  Way  word  sign  ;  as, 

c  O 


we  were          were  we  what  we  would  we 

we  would  what  would 

292.     Enlarging  a  brief  Way  word  sign  and  inclining  the 
same  in  the  direction  of  Ray  or  Chay  adds  you  ;  thus, 


with  you  were  you  what  you  would  you 

293.     In   analogy  with  Sec.  291  we  have  the    following 
forms  : 


you  would        beyond  you 


294.     A  hook  may  be  written  within  any  of  these  en- 
larged forms  to  add  have,  of,  to  have  ;  as, 


were  we  to  have     what  we  have      would  we  have 

READING  EXERCISE. 

295.  The  following  beautiful  story  is  engraved  in  the 
simplest  style  of  shorthand,  and  is  designed  as  a  stepping 
stone  to  the  more  complex  style  used  in  rapid  reporting.  It 
illustrates  what  may  be  done  without  the  use  of  phrasing,  and 
should  be  carefully  studied. 


134 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 
The  Story  of  Narcissus 


C.. 


\  -\CV 
=Hr-\-- 

r^H-H 


, 

~r 


W'--l  UX  1 1  /  r 


A     /: 

\ 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


135 


L2..y^...^A.rL:^.^^ 

"^         I  J  ^ 

p    I    \^_  —       r   p    \     c^-— 

•-•  /T --** 1 — iJ"*".j ^"^ 

^_^aHj^i_±l4«JL^XT 

VrV^v^---V-^ 

x  \  -/_  i  \o  _•)  O  -CQ  ^  xS  y_/.  _ 

V^A  v.  I  x^. 

n     ""^-^    \  ~1    "—     ^-^A    ^-1     "\    I.  /" 

....x^..^...........c).....^.....^._l:/_. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

296.     i.  We-were  with-you  when-you-were  on  your  way  to  the  sea- 
shore. 

2.  We  agree  with-you,  that  this  is  an  important  matter  and  should 
receive  attention  at  once. 

3.  Do  what  you  will  you  cannot  change  the  opinion  of  your  friends 
across  the  way. 


136  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

4.  We-would  be  pleased  to  have  you  visit  us  some  time  before  the 
summer  is  over. 

5.  Would-you  have  the  kindness  to  bring  with-you  the  volumes  of 
which  you  were  speaking. 

6.  We-were  at  a  loss  to  know  what-you  had  to  do  in  the  matter. 

7.  Were-you  ever  in  the  City  of  Paris  during  a  holiday  ? 

8.  Do  what-you  think  best  in  the  matter  and  we  shall  not  complain. 

9.  We-were  quite  sure  you-would  not  be  pleased  with  them,  even  if 
they  were  here. 

10.  We-were  to  have  them  by  the  first  of  April,  but  they  have  not 
yet  come. 

11.  The  poor  ye  have  always  with-you,  but  Me  ye  have  not  always. 

12.  We-would-have  you   co-operate   in    this  matter   if  you-would 
remain. 

13.  You  will  remember  what-we-have  already  said  upon  this  sub- 
iecL 

14.  If  we-would  have  their  sympathy  we  must  not  give  aid  to  their 
enemies. 

15.  We-were-of  your  company  when  you-were  crossing  the  plains. 


LESSON  XXIi 

OMISSION  OF  CERTAIN  CONSONANTS. 

297.  Consonants  are  frequently  omitted  when  their 
expression  would  cause  an  inconvenient  outline,  or  when  they 
are  not  necessary  to  legibility,  as  in  the  following  instances  : 

(a)  T  following  s  is  often  omitted  for  the  sake  of  joining 
a  following  stem : 

mystic  costly  postage  must  be  obstacle 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  187 

(b)     A'  is  frequently  omitted  after  Ing  and  before  Shun; 


as, 


<J. 

anxiety  bank  sanction          destruction          infraction 

(c)  P  is  omitted  when  preceded  by  m  and  followed  by  /, 
k,  or  shun  ;  as, 

_U> .<j~} -J^ _ Vj 

tempt  consumption       assumption  prompt  Thompson 

(d)  R  is  omitted  in  scribe  and  similar  syllables  where  its 
expression  would  involve  an  awkward  outline ;  as, 


subscribe  manuscript  obscure 

(e)  TVis  omitted  when  it  would  have  to  be  expressed  by 
an  n-hook  followed  by  a  stem  that  cannot  be  conveniently 
joined ;  as, 


assignment  identical  passenger  demonstrate 

(f)     L  is  omitted  in  a  few  words  to  avoid  an  inconvenient 
outline;  as, 


L          i 

.....  ^  ......        \ 


devolve  develop  indulge  Intellect 

(g)     H  is  omitted  in  a  few  words  for  a  similar  reason  ;  as, 


adhesion        adhesive 


138  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

OMISSION  OP  VOWELS. 

298.  As  the  student  grows  familiar  with  phonographic 
outlines,  he  will  learn  that  the  great  majority  of  words  have 
distinct  outlines  of  their  own,  and  require  no  vocalization. 
All  vowels,  however,  must  not  be  omitted.  There  are  many 
words  which  for  prompt  and  positive  reading  require  the 
insertion  of  the  accented  vowel.  Words  having  the  same  out- 
line and  the  same  position  can  be  distinguished  in  no  other 
way  than  by  insertihg  the  vowel,  except  by  the  context,  which 
can  generally  be  relied  upon  in  determining  the  proper  word. 
A  little  experience  in  reading  and  writing  shorthand  notes 
soon  teaches  one  when  to  vocalize  and  when  not  to  vocalize. 
A  few  hints  are  given  below  as  a  stepping-stone  to  the  read- 
ing of  unvocalized  phonography.  Students  will  begin  to  omit 

vowels  in  the  following  cases : 

I 

(a)     Unaccented  vowels ;  as  in 


cubical  votary  topic  dialogue 

(b)  When  the  form  of  a  word  implies  an  initial  vowel,  as 
in   the  words,    assign,   ask,  awake,  alum,  argue.     When  the 
words  have  the  same  outline  they  are  generally  distinguished 
by  difference  of  position,  as  Es1-Ens  for  science,  Es2-Ens  for 
essence. 

(c)  When  the  form  of  a  word  implies  a  final  vowel  as  in 
penny,  bevy,  pity,  mighty,  angry,  needy. 

(d)  When  the  name  of  the  outline  suggests  the  word;  as, 
Ray-Dee   for   ready;  Lay-Dee,    lady;  Dred,    dread;    Ink-Kay, 
ink;  etc. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  139 

INSERTION  OF  VOWELS. 

299.  Vowels  are  sometimes  essential  to  legibility,  and 
the  young  writer  will  continue  to  insert  them  in  the  following 
cases : 

(a)  When  a  word  is  used  in  a  peculiar  connection  or 
when  the  construction  is  so  faulty  or  involved  that  the  mean- 
ing is  obscure. 

(b)  When  the  same  outline  stands  for  several  words  the 
accented  or  distinguishing  vowel  should  be  inserted ;  as,  excis- 
ion, causation,  suction,  section,  employment,  implement. 

(c)  Words  beginning  with  a  vowel  should  generally  be 
vocalized  with  the  initial  vowel,  especially  if  the  word  contains 
but  one  stem ;  as,    ebb,  eke,  eel,  acre,  hawk,   upper,  outer,  etc. 
If  the  word  has  but  one  stem  and  has  a  vowel  both  before  and 
after  it,  it  is  well  to  insert  both  vowels,  but  if  owing  to  the 
pressure  of  speed  only  one  can  be  inserted,  the  initial  vowel 
will  generally  afford  the  best  guide  in  determining  the  proper 
word. 

(d)  A  diphthong  or  a  brief  Way   should  generally  be 
inserted,   as  in  quake,  twig,  boil,  jewel,  etc.     They  are  rarely 
omitted. 

(e)  Uncommon  words,   especially   when   they   occur  in 
unusual  connections,  should  be  vocalized  ;   as,  glebe,  uncanny, 
gnome,  etc. 


140 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


1 - -V - - 
V 7/ 


// 


\j*,v^.v^n.!L. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  141 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

300.  (a)  I/astly,  mostly,  costly,  restless,  listless,  postal,  postage,  post- 
office,  obstacle,  must  be,  mistrustful,  domestic,  custom,  vastly,  justly, 
postpone,  postpaid,  boastful,  tasteful,  trustful,  breastplate,  I  trust  you 
will,  distrustful,  caustic,  justify,  testify,  mistify,  destitute,  trustworthy. 

(b)  Anxiety,  anxious,  unction,  sanction,  function,  destruction,  in- 
fraction,  friction,   production,   protraction,   subtraction,  rejection,  de- 
flection. 

(c)  Tempt,  consumption,   presumption,  assumption,  exception,  co- 
emption, pre-emption,  Simpkins,  Tomkins,  pump. 

(d)  Prescribe,  proscribe,  subscribe,   describe,   transcribe,   obscure, 
manuscript,  discursive,  discourse. 

(e)  Demonstrate,  assignment,  stranger,  identical,   passenger,  mes- 
senger, attainment,  appointment. 

(f)  Devolve,   develop,   indulge,   intelligent,   intellect,   intelligible, 
intelligence. 

(g)  Critic,  lymphatic,  pathetic,  escheat,  athletic,  badness. 

(h)  Cubical,  topic,  admirer,  enigma,  variety,  miscellaneous,  domi 
nant. 

(i)  Ask,  awake,  alum,  early,  essence,  science,  penny,  money,  finny 
ready,  lady,  ink. 

( j)    Excision,  causation,  occasion,  connection,  chosen,  chasten. 

(k)  Accrued,  ebb,  open,  utter. 


LESSON  XXIV. 

RECAPITULATION  OF  SPECIAL  PRINCIPLES. 

301.  The  student  is  now  fitted  for  a  more  thorough  com- 
prehension of  the  various  special  principles  and  expedients 
which  have  been  given  in  their  logical  order  throughout  the 
previous  chapters  of  this  book,  and  we  now  gather  them  in 
one  chapter  for  special  study  and  review.  The  student  should 
strenuously  endeavor  to  adopt  these  principles  as  early  as  pos- 
sible. They  should  be  assimilated  and  made  use  of  as  fast  as 


142  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

learned,  so  that  the  writer  will  have  no  fear  of  not  being  able 
to  read  them.  The  constant  use  of  them  in  copying  and  dic- 
tation, though  it  may  impede  speed  at  first,  soon  establishes 
them  in  the  mind  and  they  form  a  part  of  stenographic  capital 
from  which  the  learner  may  draw  to  obtain  speed  and  accuracy. 

302.     Is,  His,  As,  Has  or  Us  may  be  added  to  a  word  sign 
or  outline  by  a  small  circle  : 

±i_  ......  /  ____  /L  ______  i  _____  k  ________  i 

in  bis      which  is      such  as       it  has         for  us      see  us 
(a)    If  the  outline  terminates  with  a   circle  it  may  be  en- 
larged to  add  one  of  the  above  words;  thus, 


this  is       has  some        is  seen  as  soon  takes  his     is  his 

(b)   Us  must  be  represented  by  the  stem  sign  when  there 
is  a  danger  of  its  conflicting  with  the  s-form  of  a  verb;  as, 

I  \\  ~°  ~\  <...)-.. 

'  ~  )""  .....  T~  .....  \  w 

takes  take  us        gives  give  us  puts  put  us 

303.    Stair  or  Store  may  be  added  by  the  Stey  loop  ;  as, 


in  store        up  stairs 

304.    All  or  Will  may  be  added  by  the  1-hook  ;  thus, 

1  ___________  L  ______________  ................  i  ......  ____  /*.  _______  .......  L 


if  all  for  all      though  all         of  all  which  will        they  will 

305.     Are  or  Our  may  be  added  by  the  r-hook;  thus, 


which  are      each  are  by  our          but  are  from  all       during  all 

306.     Have,  of  or  if  may  be  added  by  the  f-hook  ;  thus, 


each  of      which  have  allot  and  if  they  have       but  if 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  143 

307.  Not  may  be    expressed   by    halving  certain  word 
signs  and  adding  the  n-hook.     The  n-hook  on  but  and  or  adds 

not : 

J I ,-rs 

J 
but  not  or  not        it  would  not      may  not  cannot          will  not 

308.  Own   may  be  added  by  the  n-hook  when  the  sign 
En3  is  not  more  convenient ;  thus, 

•u  ^-— ^ 


by  our  own       in  our  own       in  their  own         at  our  own       by  their  own 

309.  One  may  be  added  by  the  n-hook  ;  thus, 

_!^  ______________  ^2  _______  ...........  <rz.  ......  ________  ............  I  .............  ________  .v*.  __  <??. 

in  one  for  one         some  one  at  one  another  one 

310.  The  n-hook  is  used  to  add  on;  as, 


go  on  right  on 

311.     Session.    The  eshon-hook   may   be  utilized  to  add 
the  word  session. 


this  session  last  session          night  session 

312.    In,  In-the.     The  backward  hook  is  utilized  on  a 
few  words  to  add  in  or  in  the;  thus, 


in  consideration     in  the  experience    in  summer       in  a  similar  way 

313.  Their,  There,  They  Are.  When  vthese  words 
cannot  be  conveniently  expressed  by  the  lengthening  principle 
or  by  the  word  sign,  they  may  be  denoted  by  a  heavy  tick 
written  in  the  direction  of  Bee  or  Jay  ;  thus, 

D  .....  S_/._ 

~~  V  \ 

because  there     would  there  can  there  sent  there 


144  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

(a)  This  tick  is  called  Ther  tick. 

(b)  The  f-hook  or  the  circle  may  be  added  to  the  Ther- 
\4// tick  to  add  fore,  ever,   his,   is,  etc.,   according   to   principles 

heretofore  stated : 

4 M_ 

it  is  therefore        since  there  Is 

314.     Ing  thr  is  expressed  by  a  heavy   disjoined  dash; 
thus, 


doing  their      having  their        going  there      wishing  their 
315.     Ing  the  may  be  expressed  by  a  disjoined  The-tick. 
Ing  a-an,  by  a  disjoined  a-tick. 

I 


— \---__ 

hoping  the         giving  the  signing  a         doing  a 

316.  To  me  may  be  distinguished  from  to  him  by  phras- 
ing in  its  proper  position  the  latter,  and  placing  the  former  in 
the  fourth  position  : 


to  me  to  him 

317.  It,  Ought.  Halving  a  word  sign  and  retaining  its 
position,  adds  it ;  placing  the  shortened  character  in  the  first 
position,  adds  ought;  as, 

I  <^  c/ 


it  ought  when  It  where  ought 

318.     Had,  Would.     Halving  a  word  sign  and  placing  or 
retaining  the  same  in  the  third  position  adds,  had  or  would;  as, 

-  (  i 

v  r 

they  would      had  had 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  145 

319.  You.     When  the  word  sign  for  you  is  attached  to 
certain  stems  it  presents  the  appearance  of  an  r-hook,  and  may 
be  distinguished  therefrom  by  writing  the  sign  on  the  line 
when  it  is  intended  for  you  and  a  little  above  the  line  when  it 
is  meant  for  an  r-hook  outline  in  the  third  position ;  thus, 

^r\  n 

)  J 

you  do      you  say    you  shall 

320.  Other  may  sometimes  be  added  by  lengthening  a 
word  sign ;  as, 


some  other               no  other  among  other               any  other 

321.     You  and  Were  are  sometimes  reversed  to  secure  a 

phrase ;   as, 

<^_^i —  ji-^j                 f\ 

when  you  come  I  send  you          there  were 


LESSON  XXV. 
IMPLICATION  OF  WORDS. 

322.  Generally  speaking,  it  is  allowable  to  omit  any 
common  word  which  the  connection  will  readily  supply,  as 
will  be  seen  from  the  following  examples.  This  principle  can- 
not be  used  indiscriminately  ;  the  connection  must  be  close,  and 
the  sense  must  unmistakably  suggest  the  missing  word ;  and 
it  is  well  for  the  student  to  use  at  first,  only  the  examples 
given  in  the  writing  exercises  herewith,  which  should  be  thor- 
oughly memorized  and  practiced. 


H6  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

(a)     And  is  omitted  in  phrases  like  the  following,  and  the 
adjacent  words  joined ;  thus, 


again  and  again   more  and  more   through  and  through   over  and  over 

(b)     Or  is   omitted  in  similar  phrases  and  the  adjacent 

words  joined : 

/~ 


Sr^rA _     V\  /      ^ 

1  ~a^- 

moreorless  one  or  two  two  or  three   large  or  small     early  or  late 

(c)     The  is  omitted  under  similar  circumstances ;  thus, 


in  the  world         on  the  contrary  In  the  interests         for  the  place 

(d)     Have  should  be  omitted  before  been  and  done  when  it 
cannot  be  more  conveniently  expressed  by  the  f-hook  ;  thus, 


...  .........  J  ___________  5  _____  ;  ______  ,  ...........  L. 

\  ^ 

shall  have  been  we  have  done  I  have  been        they  have  been 

(e)     To.     When  have  is  expressed  by  the  f-hook  to  pre- 
ceding it  may  be  omitted. 


said  to  have  was  to  have  ought  to  have 

323.  Words  Implied.  Of,  of  the.  —  When  of  or  of  the 
between  words  cannot  be  conveniently  expressed  by  their 
signs,  they  may  be  omitted  and  intimated  by  wrriting  the 
adjacent  words  in  close  proximity,  and  sometimes  the  adja- 
cent words  are  joined;  thus, 


waste  of  time  close  of  the  subject  oue  of  the  greatest 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  14V 

(a)  It  is  often  necessary  to  preserve  the  exact  words  of 
the  speaker,  and  the  reporter  must  exercise  his  judgment  in 
implying  words  by  juxtaposition.  For  instance,  when  the 
connected  sense  would  not  determine  whether  the  speaker 
said  :  "In  some  of  the  paper,"  or  "In  some  paper,"  the  of  the 
should  be  inserted. 

324.  To  or  To  the  may  be  implied  by  writing  the  follow- 
ing word  under  the  line.  If,  however,  the  following  word 
commences  with  an  up-stroke  it  is  better  to  write  the  sign  for 
to  and  join  the  up-stroke  ;  thus, 


.....  .........  .  .................  _ 

) 

to  do  to  say         to  me          to  whom  to  solve  to  report 

(a)    To  may  be  implied  where  it  is  followed  by  the,  by 
writing  Petoid  under  the  line  ;  as, 


to  the  right  to  the  left  to  the  river  to  the  court 

325.    From  to  may  be  omitted  in  such  phrases  ;  as, 


from  time  to  time    from  hour  to  hour  from  year  to  year     from  place  to  place 

326.    After  may  be  implied  in  similar  phrases  by  writing 
one  of  the  contiguous  words  below  another  ;  as, 


day  after  day  year  after  year  place  after  place          week  after  week 

327.    Were  is  implied  by  adding  an  r-hook  and  placing  in 
the  third  position  ;  as, 


____  ___ 

? 

whlchwere  who  were  such  were  as  it  were 


148  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

LESSON  XXVI. 


OPTIONAL   PRINCIPLES. 

328.  It  is  frequent  practice  of  some  reporters  to  halve  a 
word-sign  and  place  it  in  the  first  position  to  indicate  the 
addition  of  did;  thus, 


it  did  when  did  where  did 

329.    The  small  circle  is  used  to  indicate  house,  when  it 
occurs  frequently;  as, 


publishing  house  this  house  in  the  house 

330.  Some  writers  change  the  circle  into  Stey  to  add  it;  as, 

.L.  _L 

does  it  makes  it  tries  it  thiuks  it  says  it 

331.  The  small  circle  may  be  changed  into   Ster  to  add 
there,  their,  they  are;  as, 


goes  there  takes  their  does  there 

332.  Ster  may  be  used  in  the  first  position  for  Is  there ; 
in  the  second  position  for  as  there,  as  they  are. 

333.  Writing  a  word-sign  in  the  third  position  to  indicate 
the  addition  of  you;  as, 

will  you  state  have  you  any  knowledge  do  you  know  the  plaintiff 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  149 

LESSON   XXVII. 
PHRASING. 


334.  No  very  precise  rules  can  be  laid  down  for  phrasing.  While 
no  two  stenographers  would  make  all  phrases  in  the  same  manner,  nor 
any  one  stenographer  make  exactly  the  same  phrases  the  second  time, 
yet  all  stenographers  do  phrase  more  or  less,  and  many  phrases  are 
always  made  in  the  same  manner,  and  there  is  no  doubt  of  the  great 
advantage  gained  by  the  practice  of  phrasing.  Young  writers  are  apt  to 
overrate  the  value  of  phrasing,  and  think  if  they  could  join  a  whole  dis- 
course into  one  continuous  phrase,  reporting  would  be  an  easy  matter. 
There  is  a  point  beyond  which  it  cannot  be  carried  to  advantage.  The 
following  suggestions  as  to  the  limitations  and  resources  of  this  branch 
of  the  science  may  guide  the  student  in  determining  the  principles  upon 
which  phrasing  is  based,  and  which  are  impossible,  owing  to  the  many 
exceptions,  to  formulate  into  words. 

To  be  of  value  phrasing  must  be  done  spontaneously  and  without 
the  least  effort  of  the  mind,  otherwise  it  will  hamper  the  free  movement 
of  the  hand  and  cause  hesitation.  Phrasing  may  be  carried  to  any 
extent  that  does  not  cause  confusion  of  mind,  or  awkward  or  difficult 
joinings,  and  the  length  of  a  phrase  varies  from  two  to  six  words. 
There  must  be  no  mental  effort  in  phrasing — it  must  be  involuntary 
and  automatic.  How  much  a  writer  may  phrase  depends  largely  upon 
his  familiarity  with  the  peculiar  diction  of  the  subject  matter,  or  the 
frequency  with  which  certain  combinations  of  words  occur.  A  stenog- 
rapher who  is  familiar  with  the  technical  language  used  in  large  elec- 
trical manufacturing  establishments  would  make  phrases  which  would 
not  be  allowable  for  a  writer  familiar  only  with  the  vernacular  of  a  law 
office  ;  or  a  reporter  accustomed  day  after  day  to  report  the  testimony 
of  sailors  in  an  admiralty  court  will  naturally  phrase  more  in  that  line 
than  one  who  is  accustomed  only  to  reporting  in  a  criminal  court. 

Phrases  should  not  be  so  long  as  to  break  up  the  rythm  of  move- 
ment of  the  hand,  as  they  would  if  run  too  far  below  the  line.  A  little 
practice  soon  determines  how  long  phrases  can  be  conveniently  made. 


150  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

A  long  phrase  and  then  a  succession  of  no  phrases  at  all  would  be  apt 
to  cause  a  momentary  hesitation  which  might  be  fatal  to  speed. 

We  have  already  cautioned  the  student  not  to  join  words  which  are 
separated  by  a  pause,  either  rhetorical  or  grammatical,  but  this  rule  is  of 
little  value  after  all  in  actual  work,  and  the  only  invariable  rules  seem 
to  be  facility  of  joining  and  ease  of  reading.  The  best  methods  of 
phrasing  will  suggest  themselves  to  the  student  as  he  grows  in  practice 
and  experience,  and  he  will  naturally  form  more  phrases  than  can  be 
put  in  any  collected  list.  We  have  presented  only  enough  to  guide  the 
student  at  the  outset.  The  mind  will  naturally  receive  the  words  in 
such  groups  as  the  hand  will  cast  into  a  convenient  phrase,  but  the 
habit  of  phrasing  will  not  come  without  some  cultivation.  Indeed,  per- 
sistent practice  is  necessary.  The  habit  of  practicing  on  isolated 
phrases  is  helpful,  especially  when  one  meets  a  phrase  which  seems 
particularly  difficult.  The  young  writer  should  not  reject  it  because  he 
cannot  make  it  with  proper  ease  and  accuracy,  for  it  may  be  a  phrase 
quite  desirable  to  use  in  order  to  gain  both  speed  and  legibility,  and  it 
should  be  practiced  upon  until  it  can  be  made  with  ease  and  precision. 
The  phrases,  "  it-could-not,  "  "  isn't-it, "  "  wasn't-it, "  belong  to  this  class 
of  phrases.  Some  will  find  it  difficult  to  make  auch  a  phrase  as  "  and- 
these-are,"  for  in  rapid  execution  one  is  likely  to  get  an  unintentional 
hook  on  the  upward  stroke  and  make  it  look  like  "  in-this-work.  "  Such 
phrases  should  be  practiced  upon  until  they  can  be  made  with  pre- 
cision. 

335.  The  first  word  of  a  phrase  generally  determines  the  position 
of  the  whole  phrase.     There  are  some  words,  however,  which  require 
to  be  placed  in  their  own  position  in  order  to  be  legible,  and  when  these 
are  the  second  words  of  phrases,  the  other  words  must  accommodate 
themselves  to    that    one,   as    in    "  as-these,  "    "  as-this, "     "  as-those, " 
"as-little,"  "as-long." 

336.  Since  in  such  phrases  as  "by-a, "  "  be-a,  "  etc.,  Ketoid  might 
resemble  Retoid,  and  therefore  be  mistaken  for  the  The-tick,  always 
express   the   article  in   such    phrases  by  an  initial  tick  joined  to   the 
following  word.     The  pronoun   /  may  be  joined  between  two  words 
by  making  it  either  horizontal  or  perpendicular.     It  is  not  likely  to 
conflict  with  the  tick  for  a-an-and. 

337.  When   /  begins   a  phrase  use    Tetoid  or  Retoid,  first   posi- 
tion, according  to  the  ease  of  joining,  and  if  any  other  of  these  signs 
join  readily  to  the  following  word,  use  Tetoid  first  position. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  151 

338.     We  or  were  is  always  joined  to  the  four  liquids,  /,  m,  n  and 
r,  by  the  hook ;  thus, 

n 


we  always  we  also     were  also  were  unsatisfactory  we  enjoy 

339.  As  the  I-tiek  may  be  written  in  two  different  directions,  it  is 
well  to  have  a  uniform  practice  with  reference  to  its  use  on  such  phrases 
as  I  can,    I  am,    I  go,    etc. 

340.  The  beginner  will  use  great  caution  in  phrasing  the  signs  for 
or  and   but,  as  they  sometimes  conflict  with  the  tick  for  a-an-and, 
and  the  context  is  not  always  a  safe  guide.    "  Or  whether  "  and  "  or  give  " 
might  be  read  for  "and  whether"  or  "  and  give. "     So,  too,  "but  can" 
may  be  interpreted  "  and  can.  "     It  is  well  for  the  beginner  to  make  it  a 
rule  never  to  phrase  the  signs  for  or  and  but. 

341.  The  ticks  will  prove  troublesome  to  beginners  unless  clear 
ideas  are  formed  from  the  start  of  their  correct  use.     The  following  will 
illustrate  some  distinctions  which  are  necessary  to  be  formed: 


X  

o 

I 

as  to 

as  to  the 

as  the 

on  his 

he  is 

is  the 

^ 

_,, 

L, 

N 

ind  what 

or  what 

and  would 

but  would 

of  what 

to  what 

342.  The  tick  for  he,  when  beginning  a  phrase,  must  rest  on  the 
line,  and  it  is  generally  written  downward,  though  it  may  be  written 
ipward  to  secure  a  better  phrase  : 


as  he  thinks  as  he  was  as  he  knows 


152 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

READING  KXERCISE. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  158 

LESSON    XXVIII. 
PHRASE  LIST. 

343.  The  following  is  a  list  of  frequently  recurring 
phrases,  some  of  which  are  specially  contracted,  but  most 
of  which  are  formed  in  accordance  with  the  regular 
principles.  They  should  be  practiced  upon  until  they 
can  be  written  without  the  least  hesitation.  For  the  sake  of 
review  we  append  a  statement  of  the  principles  underlying 
the  formation  of  most  of  these  phrases  : 

1.  The  1-hook  adds  all,  will. 

2.  The  r-hook  adds  are,  our. 

3.  Special  phrases   are  formed  with  it,  which,  such,  she, 
they,  there,  by  the  following  principles  : 

(a)  Halving  any  of  these  words  and  placing  in  the  first 
position  adds  ought ;  as,     Tet1,  it  ought. 

(b)  Halving  and  placing  in  the  third  position  adds  had 
or  would;  as,  Tet3,  it  had,  it  would. 

(c)  Attaching  an   f-hook  to  any  of  the  above  mentioned 
words  and  placing  in  the  first  position  adds  ought  to  have  ;  as, 
Tef J ,  it  ought  to  have. 

(d)  Attaching  an  f-hook  and  placing  in  the  third  position 
adds  would  have;  as,  Tef3,  it  would  have. 

(e)  Halving  and  placing  in  the  first  position  with  an  n- 
hook  attached  adds  ought  not  ;  as,  Tent1,  it  ought  not. 

(f )  Halving   these  forms  and  placing  in  third  position 
with  ann-hook  attached  adds,  would  not  or  had  not;  as,  Tent3, 
it  would  not,  it  had  not. 

(g)  Halving,  with  an  f-hook  attached,  and  placing  in  first 
position  adds,  ought  to  have  had;  as,  Teft1,  it  ought  to  have 
had. 


154 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


(h)  Halving,  with  an  f-hook  attached,  and  placing  in  the 
third  position,  adds  would  have  had;  as  Teft3,  it  would  have 
had. 

4.  Were  is  sometimes  indicated  by  adding  an  r-hook 
and  placing  in  the  third  position;  as,  Cher3,  which  were; 
Jertoid3,  who  were. 

5  Ing  is  omitted  to  secure  a  joining  in  such  compound 
words  as,  drawing-room,  dining-room,  dining-table,  etc. 

6.  What  is  sometimes  indicated  by  halving  a  word  sign 
and  placing  in  the  first  position  ;  as,  Pent,1  upon  what ;   Fet1, 

for  what. 

7.  One  is  added  by  the  n-hook. 

8.  To  is  often  omitted  to  secure  a  phrase;  as,  Iss-Dee-2 
Yuh,  said  to  you. 


Bee3-Slet- 


Able  to     Bled2 
able  to  have     Blef2 
absolutely  necessary 

Enses 
according  to     Kret1 
according  to  them     KretJThee 
again  and  again     Gen2  -Gen 
along  side  of     Ing3-Iss-Def 
although  there  is      Bedoid'-Thee- 

thers 

a!l£f      \Beftoid' 
all  have  j 

all  would     Bentoid1 


and  all    Kletoid2 

and  are,  and  our    Kretoid2 

and  our  own     Krentoid2 

another  one     Enthern2 

anything  else     En1  -Ing-Els 

anything  less  Enl-Ing-L,ays 

as  far  as     Iss2-Efs 

as  good  as     Iss-Geds2 

as  great  as    Iss-Grets2 

as  it  were     Ster3 

as  it  ought    Stet1 


as  it  had       \  Qf  ,  3 

as  it  would  j& 

as  little     Slet1 

as  it     Zet2 

as  a    Sketoid2 

as  the     Iss2-Chetoid 

as  to     Iss-Petoid2 

as  to  a    Iss2-Tetoid 

as  to  the     Iss2-Petoid 

as  well  as     Slays2 

at  all  events    Tlef3-Nets 

at  any  rate    Tee3-Nert 

at  hand    Tent3 

at  a  time     Tee3-Ketoid-Tee 

at  any  time     Tee3-En-Tee 

at  one  time     Tens-Tee 

at  some  time      Tee3-Smet 

at  the  same  time    Tee3-Smet  (Voc) 

at  last     Tee3-Layst 

at  least    Telst3 

at  the  time     Tees-Retoid-Tee 

at  one     Ten3 

at  once  '  Tens3 

at  or  about    Ter3-Bet 

at  first    Teest3 

at  length     Tien3 

at  our  own    Tren3 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


155 


Before  it     Beft2 
before  you     Bef2-Yeh 
better  not    Bet2 -Rent 
better  than     Bet2-Ren 
but  are  not    Trentoid2 
but  if,  but  of    Teftoid2 
but  not    Tentoid2 
by  all     Bel1 
by  it    Bet1 
by  our    Ber1 
by  way  of    Bee1 -Way f 


Call  forth    Kief1 

can  there  Kayther2or  Ken2-Bedoid 
Counsel  for  defense     Kay-Def2 
Counsel   for   the  defendant     Kay- 
Dee2 

Counsel    for    the    plaintiff     Kay- 
Plent2 

D 

Day  or  two     Dred2 
day  or  two  after    Dreft2 
do  I  know    Dee2-Ketoid-En 
during  the  latter  part  Der3-Layter 

Pret 
dwelling  house     Dee2 -Lay-Hays 


Each  are     Cher1 
each  one  of  them     Chen1 -Thee 
every  one     Vren2 
everywhere    Ver2-Ar 


Fler* 


For  all     Pel 

for  all  are    \ 

for  all  our    / ' 

for  it    Fet2 

for  what     Fet1 

for  one     Fen2 

for  our     Fer3 

from  all     Frel2 

from  one     Fren2 

from  it    Fer2-Met 

for  instance    Ef2-Stens 

for  the  plaintiff    Ef  2-Plent 

for  the  defendant     Ef2-Dee 


for  the  first  time     Ef*-Stey-Tee 
for  the  most  part    Ef2-Ems-Pret 
for  the  sake  of    Efs2-Kef 
for  the  purpose     Ef2-Pee 

Q 

Gave  it    Geft2 

go  on    Gen2 

go  on  and  state  to  the  jury 

Gen2-Stet-Jer 
good  deal     Ged2-Dee 
great  deal     Gret^-Dee 
gentlemen  of  the  jury    Jet2-Jer 
General  Manager    Jay2-Em-Jer 

H 

Had  been     Den3 

Habeas  Corpus  proceedings  Hay2- 

Ker-Pers-Dee 
had  had     Ded3 
has  known     Suen2 
had  not    Dent3 
has  there     Zeether3 
have-ing  been     Ven2 
have  not    Vent2 
hope  to  have     Pef3 
how  long  have  you  lived    Retoid3- 

Ing-Lay-Ved 
how  long  have  you  known     Re- 

toid3-Ing-Nen 

I 

I    am  inclined       Petoid^Em-En- 

Klent 
I    am    in    receipt    of   your  letter 

Petoid-Em-Ner-Stee2-L,aytcr 
if  all     Fel1 
if  all  are    \F1     i 
if  all  our  f* 
if  our     Fer1 

in  the  meantime     En1  Men-Tee 
in   the    words    of   my  text    En1- 

Werds-Teest 
in  all     Nel1 
in  it  \  N  tl 

in  what     (N 
in  one    Nen1 
is  said  to  have     Ses-Def2 
in  consequence     En-Skens1 


156 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


T  .8 
1 


in  consideration     Ins-Dershun2 

iu  order    Nert1 

in  point  of  fact     Ei^-Pent-Ef 

in  response     Ner^Spens 

in  the  next  place    En'-Ens-Pees 

in  the  world    En1  -Eld 

in  reference    Ner-Ef2 

in  regard     NerJ-Gerd 

in  our      Ner1 

in  some  way     In-Sem2-Weh 

in  the  first  place     En-Steh-Pee2 

in  the  second  place      Eu^Skent- 

Pee 

iu.  writing  -  Nert1 
In  your  handwriting      EnJ-Nert- 

Ing  dot 

is  there     Zeether1 
it  ought    Tet1 
it  had 
it  would 

it  ought  not    Tent1 
it  had  not        \  ^>     .  3 
it  would  not   /  x 
it  ought  to  have    Tef  1 
it  would  have      Tef  3 
it  ought  to  have  had    Teft1 
it  would  have  had    Teft3 
it  will  have    Telf2 


Joint  stock    Jed^Stee-Kay 

just  as    Jayses2 

iust  at  present.    Jays2-Tee-Pers 

just  after  Jays2-Fet 

just  before    Jays2-Bef 

just  now    Jays2-En-Petoid 


Last  day    L,ays3-Dee 

last  night    L,ays3-Net 

last  will  and  testament  Lays*-I/ay- 

Tees-Ment 
last  hour    L,ays3-Ar 
learned  counsel     Len2-Kay 
less  than     Lays-In2 


May  be     Enib2 
may  have  been 


n 

Emben1 


might  there     Emther1 
much  will     Chel3 
must  be  true     Ems2-Bee-Ter 
more  and  more     Mer2-Mer 
more  or  less    Mer2 -I/ays 
more  than  once     Meru2-Ens 
Mr.  President  Mer'-Pers 
My  dear  Sir     Emders^Ray 

N 

Next  day     Eus2-Dee 
no,  sir    Ens2 
no  other    Enther3 
nor  will     Nerl1 
no  less    Nels12 
no  one     Nen3 
nothing  else     En-Ith2-Els 
nothing  less     En-Ith2Lays 
nothing  less  than  En-Ith^-Lays-In 

o 

Of  all     Pletoid1 

of  our     Pretoid1 

of  it    Vet1 

of  their    Veether1 

of  what    Pentoid1 

on  all     Cheltoid1 

on  our     Chertoid1 

on  either  hand     Thrend1 

on  the  other  hand     Thrend2 

on  the  one  hand    Wenend2 

on  every  hand     Vrend2 

on  his  part     Retoid'-Spret 

once  or  twice     Wens2-Tees 

or  not     Tentoid1 

ought  to  have    Jeftoid1 

over  it    Vert1 

our  own     Arn3 


Please  state  to  the  jury  Pels2-Stet- 

Jer 
point  of  view     Pent^Vee 

R 

Right  of  way     Ray l  -Tef- Way 
right  side  of    Ray^Iss-Def 
right  or  wrong    Ret^Ray-Ing 
real  estate     ReP-Stet 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


157 


Say  to  you     Es2-Yuh 

said  to  you     Iss-Des2-Yuh 

Sec.  of  State     Skret2-Stet 

Sec.  of  War     Skret2-Wer 

seem  to  be     Semb1 

set  off    Iss-Tef1 

set  forth     Iss-Tef2 

shall  have  been     Ish2-Ben 

shall  it    1st2 

shall  not     Ish2-Net 

so  far    Es2-Ef 

some  time     Smet1 

southeastern   quarter      Iss-Thes2- 

Kayter 

so  far  as  you  know    Es2-Efs-En 
step  by  step     Steh-Pee2-Steh 
such  a  one     Iss-Chen2 
such  are     Iss-Cher2 
such  ought  to  have    Iss-Chef1 
such  have    Iss-Chef2 
such  would  have     Iss-Chef3 
such  ought  to  have  had   Iss-Cheft1 
such  have  had     Iss  Cheft2 
such  would  have  had     Iss-Cheft* 
such  were     Iss-Cher3 
such  would  not    Iss-Chent3 


Take  it    Tee2-Ket 

that  there     Theether1 

they  have.     Thef2 

they  have  had     Thef2-Dee 

they  ought     Thet1 

they  would     Thet3 

they  ought  not      Thent1 

they  would  not    Thent" 

they  ought  to  have  had      Theft1 

they  would  have  had  Theft3 

they  are  all  to  have     Threlf 2 

there  ought     Thret1 

there  would     Thert3 

there  will  have     Threlf  - 

the  other     Theether2 

the  other  one     Theethern2 


to  become     Bee3 -Kay 

to  be  done     Ben3 

to  have     Peftoid2 

to  all     Pletoid- 

to  our     Pretoid2 

to  ourselves     Pretoid2-Ses 

u 

Upon  it     Pent2 

upon  what     Pent1 

up  there     Peether2 

upon  there     Pen2-Ther  (tick) 

up  stairs     Peesters2 

w 

Was  there     Zeether2 

we  are  of    Werf x 

we  can     Klen1 

we  cannot     Klent1 

we  could     Klet1 

we  gave    Weh-Gef 1 

we  know    Wen1 

we  may  be     Wemb1 

we  may  have  been     Wemben1 

we  mean     Wemen1 

we  meant    Wement1 

we  might     Wemt1 

we  were    )  -^  , 

we  would  }  Enlarged  weh1 

were  we     Enlarged  weh2 

what  we     Enlarged  wuh1 

would  we     Enlarged  wuh2 

which  are     Cher2 

which  are  had     Chert3 

which  were     Cher3 

which  ought     Chet1 

which  it     Chet2 

which  would     Chet3 

which  ought  to  have     Chef 1 

which  have     Chef  2 

which  would  have     Chef3 

which  ought  not     Chent1 

which  would  not     Chent3 

which  ought  to  have  had      Cheft1 

which  would  have  had     Cheft3 


158  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

344.  After  all,  as  early  as  possible,  as  long  as,  as  large  as,  as  mucb 
as,  of  all,  all  of,  about  as  much,  about  as  difficult,  it  will  not  be,  it  is  the, 
it  is  a,  and  it  is  the,  and  it  is  a,  it  is  your,  it  is  that,  it  is  that  which,  it  is 
his,  it  is  not,  it  is  not  that,  it  can,  it  cannot,  it  cannot  be,  it  can  be,  it  may, 
it  may  have,  it  must,  it  must  be,  it  must  not,  it  must  not  be,  it  can 
have,  it  cannot  have. 

(b)  Which  is,  which  is  your,  which  is  that,  which  can,  which  can- 
not, which  must,  which  must  be,  which  must  not  be,  and  which  was,  and 
which  was  not,  which  cannot  give,  which  can  give,  which  you,  which 
you  may,  which  you  will,  which   you  can,  which  must  probably,  which 
may  probably,   and  which  must  have  been,  which  is  not,  which  the, 
which  he  did,  which  should  be,  which  should  not  be ;  do  you,  do  you 
know,  do  you  not  know,  do  you  not  know  that,  do  you  think,  do  you 
think,  do  you  have,  do  you  go,  do  you  remember,  do  you  make,  do  you 
mean,  does  your,  does  it,  do  they,  does  not  it;   they  may,  they  may 
have,  they  may  have  been,  they  must,  they  must  be,  they   must  not  be, 
they  must  have  been,  and  they  must  not  be. 

(c)  They  have,  they  have  not,   they  have  not  been,   they  should 
not  have,  they  should  not  have  been,  they  have  not,   they  have  not 
become,  and  they  have  been,  they  have  not  done  ;  there  was,  there  was 
not,  and  there  was  not,  there  has  never  been,  there  can  never  be,  there  is, 
there  is  nothing,  and  there  cannot  be,  and  there  could  not  be,  and  there 
could  not  have  been ;      this  is,  this  is  the,  this  is  the   way,  this    is 
the  best,  this  is  the  best  way ;    this  was,  this  was  not,  this   cannot  be, 
this  could  not  be,  was  it,  wasn't  it,  was  done,  wasn't  done,  wasn't  your, 
isn't  your,  did  you,  did  you  come,  did  you  go,  did  you  think,  did  you 
know,  did  you  know  them,  did  you  know  that,  did  you  know  that  they, 
did  you  have,  did  they,  did  your,  did  you  understand. 

(d)  You  will,   you   will   be,   you  will  do,  you  will  have,  you  will 
probably,  you  will  be  there,  you  will   not  be,  you  will  never  be,  you 
should,   you  should   not,  you  should  not  be,  you  should  never  be,  you 
are,  you  are  doing,  you  may,  you  may  have,  you  may  think,  you  must, 
you  must  be,  you  must  not,  you  may  not,  you  may  not  be,  you  cannot 
be  ;  we  are,  we  are  very,  we  are  very  sure,  we  are  probably,  we  are  doing, 
we  are  thinking,  we  are  having,  we  are  sure,  we  are  pleased,  we  are  cer- 
tain, we  are  certain  that  you  will,  we  shall,  we  shall  be,  we  shall  have,  we 
shall  not  have,  we  shall  go,  we  shall  do,  we  shall  ask ;  we  will,  we  will 
be,   we  will  have,  we   will  have  your,  we  will  have  them,  we  will  have 
that,   we  will  forward,  we  will  forward  them,  we  will  ship,  we  will  ship 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  159 

them,  we  will  ask,  we  will  do,  we  limit,  we  always,  we  also,  we  mean,  we 
learn,  we  laugh,  we  must,  we  must  not,  we  must  be,  we  refer,  we  receive, 
we  render,  we  rejoice,  we  reply,  we  mean  to  be,  we  must  also,  we  must 
consider,  we  never,  we  knew,  we  require,  we  recommend,  we  resolved,  we 
will  observe,  we  are  well  aware. 

(e)  What  are,  what  are  you,  what  are  you  going,  what  can  be,  what 
will,  what  will  it,  when  we  think,  when  they  were,  I  am,  I  may,  I  may 
have,  I  may  come,  I  must,  I  must  be,  I  must  not  be,  I  will,  I  will  do,  I  will 
have,   I  will  think,  I  will  write,   I  will   write   you,   I   will  write   him, 
I   will   ask,  I    will    ask   them,   I    can,   I   can   be,  I  can   have,  I   shall, 
I  shall  not,  I  shall  not  be,   I  shall  never  be,  I  was,  I  was  not,  I  was  not 
thinking,  I  didn't,  I  didn't  think,  I  did  not  do,  I  did  not  have,  I  don't, 
I  don't  know,    I   don't   know  that,  I  don't  know  them,  I  don't   object, 
I  think,  I  think  it  is,  I  think  it  likely,  I  think  so,  I  think  that,  I  thank,! 
thank    you,  I   should    think,  I  should    not  think,   I   should  judge,   I 
should   not  judge,  I  became,  I  should  become,  I  suppose,  I  take  pleas- 
ure,  I   take  your,  I  say  you  are,  I  shall  be  there,  I  remember,  I  said,  I 
received,  I  ought,  I  ought  not,  I  ought  to  have. 

(f )  He  may,  he  can,  he  must,  he  must  be,  he   must  not,  he  may,  he 
had  not,  he  did  not,  he  would  not,  he  said,  he  took,  he  believed,  he  could 
not,  he  cannot,  he  can,  he  referred,  he  represented,  he  gave,  he  was,  he 
became,  he  expected,  he  hoped,  he  tiled. 

(g)  And   the,   and   he,   and   but.   and  they,  and  should,  and  I,  and 
ought,  but  he,  but  he  became,  but  he  did,  but  the  payment,  or  you,  and 
you,  and  would,  and  what,  or  what,  of  \vhat,  to  what,  as  to,  as  to  the,  as 
the,  as  he,  as  he  thinks. 

(h)  We  were,  we  would,  were  we,  what  we,  what  would,  would  we, 
with  you,  were  you,  what  you,  would  you,  you  would,  you  were 
you  were  not,  you  were  in,  you  would  be,  you  were  to  be,  we  \\ere  doing, 
we  were  having,  we  were  thinking. 

(i)  Estimated  cost,  distinguished  citizens,  District  of  Columbia, 
very  important,  maintain  your  part,  City  of  New  York,  National  Bank, 
Secretary  of  War,  Secretary  of  State,  step  by  step,  ten  thousand  dol- 
lars, one  million,  in  all  probability,  there  is  certainly,  by  his  own  state- 
ments, it  appears  to  me,  a  near  as  you  can. 

( j)  From  time  to  timt,  from  hour  to  hour,  from  day  to  day,  from 
year  to  year,  year  after  year,  day  after  day,  over  and  above,  farther  and 
farther,  better  and  betl  at  wider  and  wider. 


160  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

LESSON  XXIX. 
REPORTING    LIST. 


345.  The  following  list  of  word  signs  contains  nearly  all  the  more 
common  words  of  the  language  which  require  a  special  sign:  They 
occur  frequently  in  any  kind  of  literature,  and  the  forms  given  to  them 
are  brief  and  easy,  while  the  full  outlines  of  many  of  them  would  be 
awkward  and  cumbersome.  Their  careful  study  will  furnish  an  invalu- 
able shorthand  discipline,  enabling  the  writer  to  reach  a  much  greater 
speed  with  them  than  without,  and  they  render  notes  more  legible  by 
furnishing  absolute  distinctions  between  words  which  would  otherwise 
conflict.  Another  great  value  in  their  study  lies  in  the  ability  which  it 
gives  the  student  to  form,  in  analogy  with  them,  short  forms  for  many 
similiar  words. 

We  have  preferred  to  use  the  nomenclature  rather  than  the  engraved 
outlines  in  the  following  list,  because  there  is  a  positive  advantage  to 
be  gained  from  the  use  of  it  which  is  not  compensated  for  by  having  the 
engraved  form  before  the  eye.  When  a  student  learns  a  list  by  con- 
tinued copying  from  the  engraved  outline,  he  is  apt  to  do  so  mechani- 
cally and  thoughtlessly,  while  if  he  had  only  the  name  of  the  outline 
before  him,  he  must  make  a  mental  image  of  the  character  and  then 
transfer  it  to  paper.  This  slight  mental  effort  will  tend  to  fix  the 
character  in  the  nrnd  much  more  surely  than  the  thoughtless  copying 
of  engraved  forms.  We  now  speak  only  with  reference  to  learning  word- 
signs,  for  the  copying  of  engraved  matter  will  tend  to  fix  accuracy,  and 
establish  a  legible  hand  as  nothing  else  will.  There  is  a  difference 
between  unthinking,  mechanical  copying  and  a  wise  and  thoughtful 
imitation  of  a  perfect  copy.  He  should  practice  unremittingly  on  each 
outline  until  it  can  be  made  automatically  and  without  the  slightest 
effort  at  recalling. 

They  are  not  difficult  to  learn  when  proceeded  with  properly, 
although  they  may  seem  difficult  at  first.  A  few  should  be  taken  at  a 
time  and  perfectly  learned  by  copying  each  form  over  and  over  again, 
and  practicing  on  them  in  short  improvised  sentences  until  the  student 
is  familiar  with  their  appearance  in  connected  reading,  and  until  they 
can  be  read  without  stumbling.  The  practice  of  composing  short 
sentences  in  which  they  occur,  and  the  reading  and  re-reading  of  these 
sentences  is  of  great  benefit.  It  is  well  to  analyze  phcnographically  the 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND, 


161 


word  to  determine  what  the  full  outline  is,  and  then  observe  what  part 
of  the  full  outline  is  taken  to  form  the  contraction.  The  contraction 
will  generally  be  found  to  be  the  accented  syllable  of  the  word,  or  some 
part  of  the  outline  which  is  suggestive  of  the  word. 

The  making  of  an  outline  over  and  over  again,  repeating  its  name 
aloud  as  it  is  made,  is  one  of  the  surest  and  most  satisfactory  ways  of 
growing  familiar  with  phonographic  outlines.  Take,  for  instance,  the 
word  agitate;  to  the  average  student  the  sound  of  this  word  suggests  no 
outline  whatever,  but  after  it  is  practiced  upon  for  a  short  time 
only,  the  sound  of  the  word  will  instantly  suggest  the  outline,  Jet-Tec. 
The  memory,  when  drilled  in  a  particular  line,  will  improve  very  rap- 
idly, and  after  a  short  discipline  in  the  study  of  this  list  the  student  will 
be  surprised  himself  at  the  ease  and  facility  with  which  he  retains 
phonographic  outlines,  for  he  will  be  able  to  remember  any  outline  after 
seeing  it  once  only. 

The  figures  i,  2,  3  denote  the  respective  positions  of  the  character 
The  figure  4  is  used  sometimes  to  indicate  the  position  of  a  word  placed 
under  a  line  to  imply  a  preceding  to.  The  colon  is  used  to  indicate  that 
the  following  stem  is  to  be  disjoined.  The  dagger  is  used  to  indicate  that 
one  outline  intersects  another  as  in  the  word  sign  for  notwithstanding. 

The  position  of  the  derivative  word  generally  follows  that  of  the 
primitive,  no  matter  what  may  be  the  accented  vowel;  as,  repute, 
reputation;  active,  activity. 


Absurd-ity     Bees2-Ard 
abuudant-ce    Bend2 
abrupt    Bee2-Ray-Pet 
abstract    Bees3-Ter 
accept-ed-ation     Iss-Pet3 
acceptable     Iss-Pet3 -Bel 
accident-al     Iss-Dent2 
accurate     Kret3 
accuracy     Ker3 
acquaint-ed-auce     Kay2 -Net 
adjouru-ment    Jern3 
addition-al     Deeshun" 
administer    Dees3-Ter 
adjust-ed-ment    Jayst2 
admit-ed-ance     Dee1 -Met 
admonish-ed-tion     Dee '-Men 
advance-ed     Def3 
advancement     Dees3-Ment 


adventure     Def3-Enter 
advertise-d     Dee3 
advertisement     Dee3-Ment 
advice    Vees l 
advise    Vees ' 
affect-ed    Ef3 
affection-ate     Efshun3 
agent    Jay2-Net 
agency    Jay2-Es 
aggregate-d-ion     Ger2-Gay 
agriculture     Ger2-Kel 
ah     Hay2 
along    Ing3 
America     Em 2 -Kay 
American     Em2-Ken 
amouut-ed     Ment2 
angel    Jel2 
angelic    Jel2-Kay 
annihilate     Enl-JCet 
anniversary     Vers2-Ray 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


annual    Nel3 
anterior    Net3 
anticipate-d    Euts1-Pet 
anticipation  Euts-Pee1 
appear     Per1 
appearance     Prens1 
appliance     Pleus3 
applicable    Pel3 -Bel 
applicant    Plent3 
application     Pelshuu3 
apply    Pel3 
apprehend    Prend3 
apprehension -ive     Pren3 
approve-al     Pref3 
approximate-ed-ion         Per1 -Kays- 
Met 

arbitrary- ation     Ar3-Bet 
architect-ure-ural     Ar2-Ket 
aristocracy-crat     Ars;!-Tee 
arrive-d    Ref1 
artificial     Ret:-Ef 
assignment    Es:-Ment 
assist-ed-auce     Es2-Stey 
attain    Ten3 
attainment    Tee3 -Merit 
atonement    Tee2-Ment 
attract-ed    Ter3 
attraction    Tershun* 
attractive    Tref  8 
auspicious    Es^Pee 
authority- tative    Thret1 
average    Vee3-Jay 
averse    Vers* 
aversion    Vershun3 
avert-ed    Vert3 
avocation     Veeshuu3 
avoid-ed-ance    Ved1 
awful     Deftoid1 

B 

Bachelor    Chler* 
bauk-rupt    Bee3-Ing 
baptize-ist-isui     Bee2-Pee 
beauty-iful    Bet2 
began    Gen3 
begin    Gen 1 
begun    Gen2 
behalf    Bee2-Ef 
behind     Bend1 
belief    Blef2 


believe-d     Bel2 
belong-ed     Bel1 
bounty-iful     Bent3 
brethren     Bren3 
build.built     Belt1 


Calculate-ed     Kel3 
California     Clef1 -Ray 
Catholic     Kay-Ith2 
certain-ty     Iss-Ret2 
certificate     Iss-Ret2-F 
chair    Cher2 
challenge-d     Chel2-Jay 
chamber    Chay2-Ber 
change-d     Chay2 
chapter    Chay3 -Pet 
character    Ker2-Kay 
characteristic     Ker2-Kay-Stey 
charge-d    Chay3 
charity-able     Chert3 
cheer-ed     Cher1 
cheerful-ly     Cherf l 
child    Cheld1 
children     Chel2 
Christian     Kren1 
circumstauce-tial     Iss-Tens3 
citizen    Iss-Ten1 
clerk, color     Kler2 
collateral     Kay2 -Later 
collect-or-tion     Kel2-Kay 
combine-ation     Ben1 
commence-d-ment    Ens2 
commercial     Kay2-Mer 
complete-d    Plet1 
completion    Pelshun1 
comply    Pel1 
comprehend-ed     Prend2 
comprehension-sive-ible     Pren2 
conditiou-al    Deeshun2 
couserve-ative    Iss-Ref2 
consist-ed    Ses-Tee1 
consistency    Ses-Ten1 
conspicuous  Iss-Pee^Kays 
constituent    Stey-Tent1 
constitute-d     Stey-Tet1 
construct-ed     Iss-Ter2 
construction     Stershuu2 
contract-ed    Ter2-Ket 
contraction     Tershun2 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


168 


contractive    Tref2 
correct-ed-ion     Ker1 
couut-ed-enauce     Kent3 
cover-ing    Kef2 

cross-examiue-tion     Kers2-Men 
curious    Kers3 

D 

Danger    Jer2 
dangerous    Jers2 
dark    Der3 
darken     Dren3 
darkness    Drens3 
December    Dees2-Em 
defendant    Dee2 
defense    Def 2 
deficieut-cy        Dee2-Shay 
deform-ity    Dee2-Fer 
degree    Ger1 
delight-ed    Diet1 
deliuquent-cy    Dleu1 
deliver-ed    Del2 
designate-d-tiou     Dees2 -Gay 
demoralize     Dee2-Em-Lays 
demoralization       Dee2-Em-Lays- 

Eshun 

denomiuate-d-tion     Den1 
depravity    Dee3-Pref 
derivation     Dref * 
derivative     Dref1 
derive     Dref1 
describe-d    Iss-Ker1 
description    Iss-Kershun1 
determine-ation     Dee2-Treu 
detest-ed-ation     Det2-Stee 
develope-d-meut    Def2 -Pee 
direct-ed     Der2 
direction     Dershun2 
director     Der2-Ter 
directory    Der2-Ter 
distinct-ion     Dee^Stey 
distinctiye     Dee2-Stey-Vee 
distinguish-ed    Dee2-Stey-Ing 
diguity-fied     Dee2 -Gay 
dilapidate-d-tion    Del2 -Pet 
disinterested     Dees2-Nets-Tet 
distribute-d-ion    Dee'-Ster 
district    Dees1 

District  of  Columbia     Dees'-Kel 
divine-inity     Def l 


devolve-d     Def2-Vee 
doctor     Der1 
dollar    Dee1 
duration     Dershun3 
dyspepsia-tic     Dees2-Pee-Pee 


Effect-ed     Ef2  -Kay 
efficient-cy     Ef  2-Shay 
electric-ity     El2 -Kay 
England     Ingend1 
English    Ing1 
Englishman     Ingen1 
entertainment    Net-Tee2-Meut 
enthusiasm-tic     Eu-ith3-Ses 
envelope-d    En-Vee2-Pee 
equivalent    Kef 1 
especial-ly     Es2-Pee 
eternal-ity    Tren2 
evening    Veil1 
evidence    Ved2 
exact-ly-ness    Sket3 
exaction     Skayshun3 
exaggerate     Iss-jert2 
exaggeratory    Iss-jert2-Ray 
exaggeration    Iss-Jershun2 
examine-ation     Iss-Men2 
examined     Iss-Mend2 
example    Iss-Emp3 
exasperate-d-ation     Ses-Pee3 
exceeding-ly    Iss-Dee1 
except-ed     Iss-Pet2 
exception-al    Iss-Peeshun2 
exclude-d    Iss-Klet2 
exclusive    Skels:Vee2 
exclusion     Skelshun2 
excuse-able    Skays3 
executor    Kay2-Iss-Kayter 
executrix     Kays2 -Kay 
exhibit-ed     Iss-Bet1 
exhibition     Iss-Beeshun1 
exist-ed     Ses-Tee2 
existence     Ses-Tens2 
expand-ed    Spend3 
expanse     Speus3 
expansion-ive     Spen3 
expect-ed-tation     Iss-Pee2 
expedient     Spet1 
expedition    Kays-Pet1 
expense     Speus2 


164 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


expensive    Spen2 
experience     Sprens2 
experienced    Spreust2 
explain-ed    Splena 
explanatory    Splen2 -Tee-Ray 
explicit    Spels  * 
explore-d-ion     Spier2 
express     Spers2 
expressed    Sper2-Stey 
expression     Spershun2 
exquisite    Skays1 
extend-ed     Stend2 
extension-ive     Sten1 
external     Iss-Tren1 
extinction     Kay-Iss-Tee2 
extract    Iss-Ter3 
extraction     Iss-Tershun3 
extractive    Iss-Tref 3 
extraordinary    Iss-Ter2-Ard 
extravagant     Stref 3 
extreme     Iss-Ter2 
extremity    Iss-Ter2 -Tee 


Fact    Ef2 

fail    Pel2 

failed    Feld2 

failure     Fler1 

fall    Fel1 

false    Fels l 

falsification    Fels1-Eshun 

family    Mel3 

fashion    Efshun3 

favorite     Ef2-Vert 

feature     Fet1 

February    Ef2-Bee 

feel    Fel1 

fiction     Efshuu1 

fill    Fell 

finance-ial     Fen2-En 

follow  Fel1 

follower    Fler1 

fool     Fel3 

forge     Ef  2-Jay 

forger    Ef2-Jer 

forui-ed     Fer1 
conform     Con-dotiFer1 
deform     Dee1 -Fer 
inform     En1 -Fer 
perform     Per2 -Fer 


reform     Rayi-Fer 
transform     Ters2-Fer 
uniform     En-Fer3 

formal     Fer1 -Lay 

formation     Fershun1 

former-ly     FerJ-Ar 

formless    Fer1 -Lays 

fortune-ate     Fret1 

forth     Ef2-Ith 

found-ed-ation     Fend3 

fraction     Fershun :l 

frank    Fer3 -Kay 

Franklin     Fer3-Klen 

frantic     Fret3 -Kay 

free    Fer2 

frequency    Frent1 

fuller    Fler2 

fruition     Fershun3 

furnish-ed-iture     Fren2 

future-ity    Fet3 

G 

Generalize    Jens2 
generalized    Jeu2-Stey 
generalization    jens2-Eshuu 
gentile    Jet2 -El 
gentile    Jay2-Net 
generation    jayshuu2 
geography    Jay2-Ger 
glory     Gel2 

glorification     Gel2-Efshun 
glorious     Gels2 
govern-ed-meut     Gef 2 
governor     Gef2-Ray 
gracious     Ger2-Ish 
grand-eur    Grend3 
gravity-ate-iou     Ger2-Vet 
Great  Britain     Gret2-Bret 
guilt-y     Glet1 

H 

Half    Ef3 
halve     Vee3 
handwriting    Nert3 
happy    Pee3 
happiest    Pee3-Stey 
happiness     Pens3 
hazard-ed-ous     Zee2-Ard 
henceforth     Ens2-Ef 
hereafter     Reft- 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND 


165 


heretofore    Ret2-Ef 
hesitate-d-ion     Zed2 
history-leal    Est'-Ray 
holy    Hay3 
horticulture    Art^Kel 
hundred-th     End2 
hypocrisy    Pee1-Ker 
hypocrite-ical    PeeJ-Kret 

I 

Idle-ness    Del1 
identical     Ded2-Kel 
identification     Dent2-Efshun 
ignorance     Nerns1 
illegal-ity     El2 -Gel 
imagine-ary-ation    Jen3 
immoral    Merl1 
immortal -ity    Mert1 
impassioned    Emp3-Shund 
impatient    Emp2-Shunt 
impenetrable-ility    Empent2 
iincompetent    En-Pent- 
indefatigable    End-Fet2 
indenmify-ity    Ned1 -Em 
indenture    End2-Ent 
iudependent-ce     End-Pend2 
indiguant-ion-ity    End'-Gay 
individual    Ned^Ved 
individuality    EndJ:Ved 
indulge     End-Jay2 
infer    En-Ef2 
inference     En-Efs2 
inferior-ity    En-Ef1 
infinite    Neft1 
infinitude     Neft^Dee 
information     Enshun1 
inhabit-ed-ant    En-Bet2 
inquiry    En^Wer 
insecurity    In-Scret3 
insignificant    EnsJ-Gay 
integrity    Net2-Gret 
intellect-ual-ality    Net1-Ket 
iustinct-ive     Enst1 
intelligible    Net-jay2 
intemperate    Net J  -Emp 
instruct-ive     Ins-Ter2 
instruction     Ins-Tershun2 
instructor    Ins-Ter2-Ter 
intercession     Nets2-Eshun 
interior     Net1 


internal    Ter1 
interpret-ed-ion    Net-Pret2 
intrinsic    Entern1 
introduction     Net-Deeshun2 
irrelevancy    Ar2-Lay-Ven 
irresistible    Ar2-Ses-Tee 
irresponsible    Ar2-Spen 


January    Jay2-En 
Jehovah    Jef 1 
judicial    Jed1-Ish 
judiciary    Jed^Sher 
judicious    jed^Shay 
junior    jer3 

jurisdiction    jers2-Eshun 
jury    Jer3 
justice    Jay2-Stey 
justify-iable    Jays2-Ef 
justification    Jays2-Eshun 


Large    Jay3 
larger    Jer3 
largest    Jayst3 
length    Ing3 
lengthy    Ing3-Ith 
lengthen     Ingen3 
lengthened     Ingend3 
liberty    Ber1 
little    Let1 
long    Ing3 
longer     Inger3 

M 

Magnificent-cy     Em1 -Gay 
market    Mert2 
majority    Etn^Jert 
malicious     Mel-Ish1 
malignant-ce     Mel1 -Gay 
manager    Em-jer3 
madufacture-ed-ory     Em-En-Ef2 
Massachusetts     Ems3-Chay 
meanwhile     Em1-Nel 
Mediterranean     Med-Tren2 
memory-andum     Eni-Eni2 
measure    Zher3 
mental-ity    Ment2 
mention    Emshun2 


166 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


mentioned    Emshund 
mercy-fill     Mer2 
messenger    Em-Iss-Jer2 
million     Mel1 
minute    Ment1 
moral-ity    Merl2 
mortal-ity    Mert2 
metropolitan    Emter-Pel2 
minority    Em-Nert1 
misfortune    Ems-Fret1 
mortgage     Mer-Gay1 
mortgagee     Mer-Gay-Jay2 
movement    Ment3 

N 

Necessary     En-Ses2 
neglect-ful     En-Gay2 
negligent-ce    En-Gel2 
New  Jersey    En-Jay2 
New  York     En2-Yay 
New  York  City     En2-Yays 
New  York  State     Eu2-Yay-Stev 
north     Ner1 
northern    Nern1 
North  America    Ner '-Em 
nothing    En-Ith- 
November    En-Vee2 

o 

Obligation     Belshun2 
obligatory     Bel2 -Get 
observe-d-ation     Bees2 -Ray 
omnipotent-ce     Men-Pee - 
only    Nel2 

opposition     Pees^Eshun 
oppression     Pershun3 
order-ed    Arder1 
ordinary    Ard1 
organ     Gen1 
organic     Gen1 -Kay 
organism     Gey '  -Sem 
organization     Gens'-Eshun 
organize     Gens1 
organized     Genst1 
original     Ray '-Jen 
overwhelm-ed     Ver2-El 
owner    Ner3 


Parallel     Prel2 
parliament     Prel3 
parliamentarian     prelen* 
party    Pee3 
patent    Pet3 
patentable     Pet3 -Bel 
passenger    Pee3-Iss-Jer 
pecuniary-ily     Pee2 -Ken 
Pennsylvania    Pees2-Vee 
perfect    Pref 1 
perfected     Pref l  Ket 
perfection     Pershun 
perform-ed-ance     Per2-Fer 
permanent-ance     Per2-Meu 
pernicious     Pren1 
perpendicular-ly     Per2 -Pen 
perpetual-ate-iou     Pee2-Ray-Pet 
philanthropy-ic-ist     FeP-Euter 
Philadelphia    Flet2-Ef 
plaintiff    Plent* 
platform     Plet2-Fer 
plenty-iful     Plent2 
popular-ity     Pee1 -Pee 
position     Pees^Eshun 
possess-ed     Pee-Ses- 
possession     Pees3 -1C  shun 
possible- ity     Pees l 
possibilities    Pee-Ses1 
poverty     Pef l 
power     Pee3 -Ray 
powerful     Pee3-Ref 
practicable-ility     Per3 -Ket 
practice-ical     Per3 
practiced     Per3-Stey 
predominate-ed-ioii-auce       Pred1- 

Men 

prejudice-d-cial     Per2-Jed 
preliminary    Prel1 
prepare-ed-ation-itory       Per2-Pee- 

Ray 

present     Pers2 
present-ed-ation     Pers2-Net 
pretentiou     Per2 -Ten 
pretty     Pret2 
prodigious     Pred'-Jay 
product    Per2 -Dee 
production     Per2-Deeshun 
professor     Pref2 
proficient-cy     Per2-Ef-Shay 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


167 


profit-ed-able     Preft1 
prominent-ce     Per1 -Men 
promulgate-d-ion     Mel2 
proof    Pref2 
proper    Per1 
property  Per1 -Pee 
proportion-ed     Per2-Peeshuu 
propriety  Per1  (voc.  with  I) 
prospect-ed-ous     Pers1-Pee 
prove     Pref2 
providen  t-ce    Preft1 
public-ish-ation     Pee2 -Bee 
pulpit    Pel2:Pet 
punctual-ity     Pee3 -Ing 
punish-ed-meut    Pen2 


Quality    Klet1 
qualification     Kel-Efshuna 
question-ed    Ken2 
questionable    Ken2 -Bee 
questioner     Ken2-Ar 


Rational     Rayshun3 

rapid-ity    Ray2 -Pet 

ratification     Ret2-Efshun 

real-ity    Rel1 

realize    Rels1 

recollect-ed-tion     Ray2-Kel-Kay 

reflect-ed-ion     Ray2-Ef-Kay 

reform     Ray^Fer 

reformation     Rayshun2 

relate-d-ion     ReP 

relative     Reltive2 

relevancy    ReP-Ven 

religion    Jen1 

religious    jays1 

reluctant-ce     Rel2-Ket 

repeat-d-ion     Ray1 -Pet 

republic-ish-ed-ation  Ray  *-Pee-Bec 

republican     Ray2 -Pee-Ben 

repute-d-ion     Ray3-Pet 

reserve-d-ation     Rays2 -Ray 

resignation     Rays2 -Gay 

respect-ed-ful-fu'lly    Rays2 -Pee 

respectable     Rays2-Pee-Bel 

respective     Rays2-Pef 

reveal     Ref J 

revelation    Layshun2 


revolution     Layshun3 
revolve-d    Ref 1 
rnle-d     ReP 
ruler     ReP-Ray 


Sanguine     Iss-Iugen2 
sanguinary     Iss-Ingen2-Ray 
satisfy-ed-actory     Iss-Tee3 
satisfaction     Iss-Teeshun3 
Savior    Iss-Vee2 
scale     SkeP 
scholar    Skier1 
scientific     EsJ-Net 
scripture-al     Sker1 
security     Skret3 
September    Spet-Em2 
share    Sher3 
signature    Iss-Gay l  -Net 
significance-ation     Iss-Gens1 
significant    Iss-Gay1 
signify-ed    Iss-Gay1 
similar-ity    Iss-Em J 
singular-ity     Iss-Gler1 
situated     Iss-Tet1 
situation     Iss-Teeshun1 
skill    SkeP 
skillful    Sklef1 
somebody    Iss-Emb2 
South  America    Iss-Ith2-Em 
south-east    Iss-Thee2-Stey 
south-eastern     Iss-Thes2-Ren 
south-west    Iss-Wayst2 
south-western     Iss-Ways2-Ren 
southern     Iss-Then2 
speak    Spec1 
special-ity    Spec3 
spoken    Spen l 
spontaneous-ity     Spent1 
standard    Stet2-Ard 
strange-ness    Stren2 
stranger     Iss-Ter2-Jer 
strength    Ster2-Ith 
strengthen    Ster2-Then 
stupendous    Stey-Pend2 
stupid-ity    Stey-Pet3 
sublime-ity    Iss-Bel1 
subordinate-ive-ion     Iss-Bee1 
substantial-ity    Iss-Bee  2-Stee 
sufficient-cy    Iss-Ef  2-Shay 


168 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


suggest-ed-ive     Iss-Jay2 
stiperintend-ed-etit-ence      Sprent2 
superior-ity    Iss-Spee1 
superlative     Sprel- 
supernatural     Spren3 
supplication     Spelshun2 
supply    Spel2 
suppress     Spers3 
surprise     Spers1 
suspension-ive    Ses-Pen2 
suspicious     Ses-Pee1 
swindle     Iss-Way  *  -Del 


Take     Tee2 

take  it     Tee2-Ket 

mistake     Ems-Tee2 

overtake     Vert l  -  Kay 

partake     Pret2-Kay 

retake     Art2 -Kay 

undertake    .End-Tee2 
taken     Ken2 
tend-ed-ency    Tend2 
thankful     Thef3 
technical-ity    Tee2 -Kay 
telegram     Tel2 -Em 
telegraph-er-ic     Tel2-Ger 
temperate     Tee2-Emp 
temperament    Tee2-Enip-Ment 
temperature     Tee2-Emper 
tenement    Tee2-Ment 
terminate-d-ion     Ter2-Men 
testify-ed     Tees2-Ef 
testimony    Tees2-Em 
testimonial    Tees2-Em-Nel 
Texas     Tee2-Ses 
texture     Tee-Ster2 
thousand     Ith3 
time    Tee1 
tolerate-d-ion     Tier2 
took    Tee3 
tragedy     Ter2-jed 
tragic    Ter2-Jay 
transient    Ter2-En-Shent 
tranquil-lity    Terming 
transfer-red    Ters2-Ef 
trial    Trial1 


tuition     Teeshun1 
twelve-th  Tlef 2 

u 

United  States    En-Ses1 
uniform-ity     En2-Fer 
unimportant     En^Emp 
unimproved     En2-Emp 
universe     Vers2 
universal     Vers2-Lay 
university     Ver3-Iss-Tee 
unless     Nels1 
unsecured    Ins-Kret3 
useful-ness     Esef 3 


Valid-ity    Vee2-Eld 
vegitate-ed-ion     Vee2-Jet 
vengeance     Vee2-jens 
Virginia    Vee'-jay 
version     Vershun2 
virtue    Vert2 
vice  versa    Vee2:Ver 
vocation    Veeshun2 
void-ed-ance     Ved1 

w 

Warrant-ed-able    Wernt1 
will-ing-ingness    Lay2 
will  (noun)     Wei1 
woman     Weman2 
women    Wemen1 
wonder-ful-ly     Wender2 
work     Wer2 
workman    Wern2 
workmen    Wern2 
workingman     Wer2  Ingen 
workingmen     Wer2-Ingen 
worship     Wer2-Ish 


Yield-ed     Yeld1 
year-s     Yeh l 
yealy    Yeh1 -El 
yes     Yay : 
yes  sir    Yays2 
yesterday     Yeh2 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


169 


WORDS  DISTINGUISHED. 

346.  There  are  many  words  which  are  capable  of  being  represented 
by  the  same  phonographic  outline,  but  to  avoid  confusion  and  delay  in 
reading,  they  should  be  distinguished  by  some  difference  of  outline  or 
position.  The  following  is  a  partial  list  of  such  words,  some  of  which 
the  student  has  already  learned,  but  they  are  here  gathered  in  a  con- 
venient form  for  study,  and  when  these  distinctions  are  made  thoroughly 
familiar  the  student  will  be  able  to  form  distinctions  for  himself  when 
occasion  requires. 


Special     Spec3 
especial    Es2-Pee 

provide    PrefJ-Dee 
private    Per1 -Vet 

pursue     Pee3-Ray-Es 
oppress     Pers3 
peruse     Pee3 -Rays 

proportion     Per2-Peeshun 
appropriation     Per2-Pershun 

purport    Pee2-Ray-Pret 
appropriate     Per2-Pret 
prepare-d-ation     Per2-Pee-Ray 

Prussian     Pershun2 
Persian     Pee2-Ray-Ishn 
Parisan     Pee1-Rayshun 
portion     Pee2-Rayshun 
apportion     Pee3-Rayshun 
perfection     Pershun1 
operation     Pershun2 
oppression     Pershun3 

proffer  Pref^Ray 
prefer  Pref2-Ray 
approver  Pref3-Ray 

partner    Pret2-Ner 

part  owner    Pret3-Ner  (voc.) 

spread     Spret2 
separate     Spret2  (voc.) 
support     Spec2 -Ret 

power,  pure     Pee3 -Ray 
poor    Pee3-Ar 


appeal     Pee^L/ay 
compel     Pee2 -Lay 
comply     Pel1 
apply     Pel3 

prohibition     Per^Beeshun 
probation     Per2-Beeshuu 
approbation     Per3-Beeshun 

pertain     Pee2-Ret-En 
appertain     Per^-Ten 
patient     Peeshunt2 
passionate     Peeshun3-Tee 

perhaps,  propose     Per^-Pees 
purpose    Pee2 -Pees 

protect    Pret2-Kay 
product     Per2 -Dee 
perdition     Per'-Deeshuu 
production     Per2-Deeshun 
protection     Pret2-Kayshun 


persecute 
prosecute 


Pee2-Rays-Ket 
Pers^Ket 


persecution 
prosecution 


Pee  2 -Rays-Kayshuu 
Pers1-Kayshun 


completion  Pelshun1 
complexion  Pelshun2 
application  Pelshun3 
compilation  Pee^Lay-Shun 

prompt  Per1-Met 
permit  Per2 -Met 
promote  Per 3  -Met 

traitor    Ter2-Ter 
trader    Tred2-Ar 


170 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


breath     Ber2-Ith 
birth     Bee-Ray-"Ith 
situation     Steeshun1 
station     Steeshun2 
satisfaction     Steeshun3 

extension     Sten2 
extenuation    steu2-Ishn 

turn     Tee2 -Ren 
train    Treu2 

attainable    Ten3  Bee 
tenable    Tee2 -En-Bel 
terrible     Tee2 -Ray-Bel 
trouble     Ter2-Bel 

strife     Stref1 
starve     Stey3-Ref 

transfer    Ters2Ef 
transform     Ters2-Fer 

disease     Deeses1 
decease     Dees'-Es 


device 
advice     Vees1 

daughter     Dee1-Ter 
deter,  editor     Dee2-Ter 

doubter    Det3-Ar 
auditor    Det1-Ar 
duration     Dersnun3 
adoration     Dee2Rayshun 
distribute    Deester2-(Bet) 
disturbed    Dee2-Ster-Bet 
destine     Dee2-Sten 
destiny    Deest2En 
unavoidable     En-Ved^Bel 
inevitable    En-Vet2-Bel 
instead  of    Ens2-Def 
inside  of    Ens1-Def  (voc.) 
collision     Kelshun1 
calculation     Kelshun3 
coalition     Kay:-Layshun 
collusion    Kay3-L,ayshun 
accordance    Kred1 
credence    Ker-Dens2 
expert    Kays2-Pret 
export    Kays2-Pret  (voc) 
expired     Kays-Pee  J-Ard 


column     KeP-Em 
claim-Kel2-Em 

God    Ged1 
guide     Gay-Dee1 
good     Ged2 

greatly     Gret2-Lay 
gradually     Gred3-Lay 

favorite     Ef2-Vert 
favored    Ver3 

effect    Ef2-Kay 
affect    Ef3-Kay 

from    Fer1 
firm     Fer2 -Em 
farm     Ef3-Ar-Em 

finally    Ef'-Nel 
finely     Fen1:Lay 

valuable    Vel3Bel 
available     Vee2 -Lay-Bel 

theory     Ithx-Ray 
thorough     Ith2-Ray 
through    Ther3 
therefore     Ther2-Ef 
therefor    Ther2:Ef 
ascend    Es2-End 
assigned     Esnd1 
unsociable     Ins-Ish2-Bel 
insatiable     Ens2-Shay-Bel 
embarrass     Emb3-Rays 
embrace     Em2-Bers 
renewed     Ray3  En-Dee 
ruined     Ray3 -Ned 
repeat    Ray1 -Pet 
rapid     Ray2 -Pet 
repute     Ray3 -Pet 
diminish     Dee1  Men 
dominate     Dee2Men 
admonish     Dee3Men 
alcohol     El2 -Kay-El 
alkali     EPKel 
migrate    Em^Gret 
immigrate     Em^Gret  (voc.) 
emigrate    Em2Gret 
Mrs.     Em-Iss-Es2 
Misses    Emses1 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  171 


HOW  TO  FORM  CONTRACTIONS. 

347.  In  the  reporting  of  technical  matter  many  new,  and  often  long 
and  clumsy   outlines  will  be   encountered,  and  the  reporter  should,  if 
possible,  read  up  on  the  subject  to  become  somewhat  familiar  with  the 
vernacular,  and  to  construct  easy  outlines  for  frequently  recurring  words 
and  phrases.     Special  contractions  when  familiarized  in  connection  with 
certain  kinds  of  subject  matter  might  thus  be  allowable,  which  would 
not  be   safe  in   general   reporting.     In  the  formation  of  a  contraction 
regard  must  be  had  to  legibility,  brevity,  and  convenience  of  forming 
derivatives.     Merd,  for  instance,  would  be  a  legible,  brief  and  conven- 
ient outline  for  hemorrhoid  in  reporting  medical  matter,  because  it  may 
be  properly  vocalized,  and  the  derivative,  hemorrhoidal,  is  easily  formed 
by  adding  Lay.      The  word  or  phrase  which  it  is  proposed  to  contract 
must  first  be  correctly  analyzed,  and  then  such  parts  selected  as  will  be 
most  suggestive,  or  most  easily  made.      The   shorthand  initials  may  be 
used  for  a  phrase  of  frequent  occurrence,  but  these  shorthand  initials 
must  be  thoroughly  learned  as  word  signs ;  as,  Ar-Kav,  for  Roman  Cath- 
olic; Jay -En,   for  Jesus  of  Nazareth.      A  more  frequent  method  is  the 
employment  of  two  or  more  suggestive  stems  for  the  phrase  ;  as,  Spee- 
Kel,  for  spinal  column  ;  Ems-Enter  for  Michigan  Central. 

METHOD  OF  PRACTICE. 

348.  The  student   should    enter  upon  the  practice  and  study   of 
shorthand  with   enthusiasm.       He  cannot    become   too   interested   or 
too   enthusiastic,    and    his    mind  must    run    in    a   groove   until   the 
whole  theory  and  practice  is  mastered.     There  is  one  thing  about  short- 
hand which  cannot  be  said  of  any  other  science,  unless  perhaps  it  be 
arithmetic,  and  that  is,  that  it  is  a  complete  science,  and  the  end  of  its 
study  may  be  reached  in  a  comparatively  short  time.  It  does  not  require 
a  very  long  time  to  master  all  the  principles,  but  there  is  hardly  any 
limit  to  manual  dexterity.     The  mind  must  deal  constantly  with  short- 
hand characters  ;  it  must  think  in  outlines  all  during  the  progress  of  the 
study.     The  student  need  have  no  fear  that  it  will  narrow  his  mind ;  on 
the  contrary,  it  will  strengthen  and  intensify  it.     His  ear  becomes  more 
acute,   his  intelligence   more    on  the  qui  vive  to  -watch  ideas  and  their 
orderly  marshalling.     While  listening  to  a  conversation,  a  sermon,  or  a 
speech,  he  should  follow  in  his  mind  the  shorthand  characters  for  every 
word  uttered,  tracing  a  mental  image  of  the   same,  or  tracing  on  the 
thumb  the  shorthand  forms.    The  larger  part  of  the  student's  early  prac- 


172  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

tice  should  be  copying  engraved  exercises.  The  continued  copying  of 
well  written  matter  will  advance  one  much  more  surely  and  quickly  than 
the  careless  writing  of  many  volumes  of  new  matter  without  any  attempt 
at  correcting  and  improving  forms.  Every  time  an  error  is  detected  and 
corrected  the  student  may  feel  sure  he  has  made  some  progress.  Or,  if 
he  is  so  well  disciplined  as  to  write  correctly  from  the  start,  he  will  save 
himself  much  unnecessary  labor,  and  his  progress  will  be  sure. 

The  secret  of  expertness  in  shorthand  is  the  same  as  in  every  other 
line  of  manual  or  mental  skill.  It  lies  in  perfect  familiarity  with  the 
subject  matter  and  this  familiarity  is  reached  only  by  wise  and  intelli- 
gent practice.  Great  skill  is  reached  in  any  kind  of  manual  craft  only 
by  constant  and  thoughtful  practice,  a  practice  which  is  always  on  the 
alert  to  avoid  errors,  and  to  detect  and  correct  them  when  once  made. 
The  pianist,  in  acquiring  delicacy  of  touch,  the  painter  in  acquiring  a 
mastery  over  the  technique  of  his  art,  attains  it  only  by  long  continued 
practice.  Haphazard  and  unthinking  practice  is  productive  of  more 
harm  than  good.  One  short  selection,  it  matters  little  what,  if  practiced 
upon  unremittingly  until  every  outline  can  be  made  correctly,  easily  and 
swiftly  will  advance  the  student  much  more  than  days  and  days  of 
writing  from  a  too  rapid  dictation  on  new  matter.  The  correct  outlines 
of  the  selection  should  be  determined  before  it  is  practiced  upon,  and 
then  it  should  be  gone  over  and  over  again  until  every  phrase  is  im- 
proved upon  to  the  utmost,  and  the  writing  is  as  legible  as  longhand. 

The  student  will  find  in  beginning  to  read  shorthand  that  certain 
words  will  conflict  unless  made  with  extreme  accuracy,  and  the  young 
writer  must  guard  against  some  very  common  faults  of  outline,  such  as 
sloping  an  upright  letter,  as  Tee  or  Dee,  or  making  an  inclined  letter 
upright,  such  as  Pee  or  Bee.  Thus,  "  it  was  "  will  conflict  with  "  which 
was  "  unless  the  proper  slope  be  given  to  the  which,  or  it  be  made  per- 
fectly upright.  The  upright  letter  should  be  made  perfectly  upright, 
and  the  inclined  letter  should  be  given  its  due  slope.  The  student 
should  also  guard  against  lapsing  into  careless  habits  of  shading.  Give 
all  the  shaded  characters  their  proper  shading.  It  is  too  important  and 
distinctive  a  feature  of  shorthand  to  be  disregarded.  Plain  distinctions 
should  be  made  between  the  rounded  curves  of  the  brief  Ways  and  the 
Petoid  word  signs  with  a  final  tick.  Thus,  "  of  the  "  is  mistaken  for 
"what."  The  making  of  an  En  the  shape  of  an  Ef,  and  all  similiar 
deviations  from  the  ideal  form  will  cause  infinite  trouble  in  reading 
unless  corrected  by  constant  practice.  We  have  seen  notes  which  were 
marvels  of  illegibility  solely  because  of  slight  abberations  from  the 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  173 

standard  forms,  and  we  have  seen  these  same  students  continue  in  their 
old  way  of  reproducing  mistake  after  mistake  in  their  practice,  think- 
ing it  conscientious  practice,  and  wondering  why  their  progress  was 
unsatisfactory.  Such  practice  is  utterly  worthless.  Neither  should  the 
student  endeavor  to  draw  his  notes  accurately,  for  absolutely  painful 
copper-plate  notes  is  the  abomination  of  abominations,  as  they  preclude 
the  possibility  of  any  degree  of  speed.  Speed  must  be  attained,  as 
well  as  legibility,  and  the  two  must  go  hand  in  hand. 

'The  shorthand  writer  will  meet  with  all  sorts  of  awkward  expres- 
sions which  puzzle  him  to  read  unless  he  is  careful  to  make  proper  dis- 
tinctions in  his  notes,  and  his  judgment  must  be  constantly  exercised  in 
his  notes,  and  his  judgment  must  be  constantly  exercised  in  determin- 
ing whether  he  will  describe  the  exact  words  of  the  speaker  or  will 
change  the  words  or  vary  the  construction  without  changing  the  exact 
ideas  intended  by  the  speaker.  How  far  he  can  do  this  will  depend  upon 
circumstances.  In  reporting  a  trial  at  law  the  exact  words  of  the  wit- 
ness should  generally  be  transcribed.  It  is  not  for  the  stenographer  to 
put  a  construction  upon  the  words  of  the  witness.  Manifest  errors  and 
repetitions  should,  of  course,  be  eliminated.  Sometimes  the  tones  of 
the  speaker's  voice  will  express  more  than  his  words,  and  when  peculiar 
meanings  are  brought  out  by  the  speaker  by  emphasis  or  inflection,  and 
can  be  denoted  in  print  by  underscoring  or  other  marks,  they  should  be 
so  employed  in  transcribing. 

READING. 

349.  From  the  very  nature  and  character  of  shorthand  writing,  it 
follows  that  the  reading  of  shorthand  notes  is  not  as  easy  a  matter  as 
reading  print,  and  the  student  can  acquire  skill  in  reading  shorthand 
only  in  one  way,  and  that  is  by  a  vast  amount  of  practice  in  the  reading 
of  shorthand.  Of  course,  the  more  nearly  the  shorthand  outlines 
resemble  the  perfect  forms  of  the  engraved  characters,  the  easier  will 
the  reading  become,  and  to  make  easy  reading  the  student  should  strive 
to  make  accurate  notes.  As  soon  as  the  learner  begins  dictation  he 
should  make  it  a  rule  to  read  over  everything  he  writes.  Time  spent  on 
reading  shorthand  is  never  wasted,  though  the  student  is  too  prone  to 
think  so.  He  should  not  allow  himself  to  read  hastily  or  carelessly,  but 
carefully  and  accurately  at  every  step,  and  with  the  utmost  painstaking 
over  the  smallest  and  seemingly  most  unimportant  and  readily  supplied 
ticks.  This  habit  should  be  resolutely  adhered  to  throughout  his 
whole  study,  for  it  will  save  much  useless  labor.  It  is  not  judicious  and 


174  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

beneficial  practice  for  a  student  to  write  page  after  page  from  rapid 
dictation  which  he  knows  he  cannot  read  easily,  and  is  fearful  lest  he 
cannot  read  at  all,  but  he  should  write  slowly  and  with  a  confident  feel- 
ing of  his  ability  to  read  his  notes  fluently.  Shorthand  is  always  legible 
when  well  written,  though  easy  reading  requires  some  experience.  Both 
engraved  shorthand  and  notes  of  actual  work  should  be  used  in  reading 
practice.  It  may  almost  be  said  that  the  reading  of  shorthand  is  an  art 
in  itself,  and  can  be  mastered  in  no  other  way  than  by  much  practice  iu 
reading.  The  mind  must  be  on  the  alert  to  watch  the  meaning.  It  is  a 
mark  of  a  high  order  of  reporting  to  follow  all  the  ideas  closely,  and  to 
take  the  liberty  of  arranging  the  language  in  grammatical  form,  if  not  the 
thoughts  in  logical  order.  The  ability  to  read  shorthand  rapidly  tends 
to  increase  speed  in  writing  by  removing  the  hesitation  which  arises  from 
lack  of  confidence  in  reading  notes.  Going  over  the  same  ground  in 
any  kind  of  labor  is  of  the  utmost  importance.  Carlyle  says,  "  The  old 
Romans  plowed  their  fields  fourteen  times  because  fourteen  times  were 
better  than  thirteen."  And  it  is  so  in  shorthand ;  the  reading  of  a  pa_ge 
of  well-written  shorthand  notes  fourteen  times  is  better  than  the 
reading  of  it  once  or  the  reading  of  it  thirteen  times.  This  applies 
to  the  reading  of  one's  own  notes  as  well  as  to  engraved  exercises.  We 
cannot  too  often  reiterate  the  great  value  of  much  practice  in  reading 
shorthand  notes,  for  it  gives  that  intimate  acquaintance  with  shorthand 
forms  which  produces  speed.  The  ability  to  make  the  proper  outlines 
instantly  and  without  any  hesitation  in  writing  is  the  result  of  familiar- 
ity with  shorthand  material,  and  reading  becomes  valuable  as  an  aid  to 
speed  in  writing  because  it  brings  this  familiarity.  It  is  comparatively  an 
easy  matter  to  learn  to  write  one  hundred  words  a  minute,  but  to  go  be- 
yond that,  to  add  another  hundred  words  per  minute,  requires  an  outlay  of 
patient  study  and  practice  which  should  not  be  lightly  estimated.  Every 
writer  will  pass  through  a  stage  of  practice  when  an  unaccountable 
hesitation  will  possess  him,  and  seems  the  only  barrier  to  speed.  The 
outlines  are  tolerably  familiar,  but  the  mind  becomes  at  times  balky. 
Here,  again,  increased  familiarity  with  forms  and  outlines  is  the  only 
remedy,  and  further  practice  and  reading  the  only  means  of  obtaining  it. 
The  student  should  not  halt  or  pause  after  making  an  outline,  but 
should  go  on  with  the  next  outline  without  perceptible  loss  of  time. 
The  hand  should  move  over  the  paper  with  a  perfectly  steady,  uniform 
motion,  and  with  a  certain  rythm  which  has  been  called  the  balancing 
movement  of  the  hand,  similar  to  the  movement  of  the  body  of  a  swift 
skater  or  bicycle  rider. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


175 


A  JUST  JUDGE. 


176 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


--fc-t^1-^-— 


* 


-tr~7 

iVL      v 

X 

^_._! 

'•/  '  \  (   c 
•/-^->-k 

7 


JS-sJL.tL 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


177 


--?  _       /^    e  I  -  —  v 

J.  V^    o  _So  t 


178 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


.LIZl 


BUSINESS  AND  OFFICIAL   LETTERS. 


/T 


>r\ 


>  V 


^^v 


V^A; 


'; 


V 


__________  .....  L 

^ 


f  \   ..- 

.....  ........ 


_, 

-K 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


179 


180 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND, 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


181 


J 


i 


vi. 


^-/..f 

A   I 


* 


.I.... 


r\.l...l/..<u., 


182 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


^  --  1  ">V  /         -^S 

*  ^^ 


JS~ 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


183 


184 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


SOCIAL     LETTERS. 

/    U       \    x-> 


' 


y 


-^-H^ 

X/  '  .i^^rvJVi 


\^ 


i^JJi^i 

s*- 


J 
,^^-ov 

-// 


^     ^^<U 
~~A   ~"'~~~ 

^^     'ibr7 


-V-i.^. 


<ta.^X-I^\  ..^.  )j/__.....^. U|..../ 

'  ^  U  / 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


185 


«.  /?/0£fl  HAQGARD. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

ZLiLl.e** 


L.I. 


/ 

•1  yj  i "  f       "       ^  L    i     " 
-^-L ^^-^^fc^r 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


187 


THE  ACTION  OF  GLACIERS. 


,  i/»  °i 

J  .^^..  i/  —  ^... 


17 

V  > 


VI 


.L 


V 


188 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


^.^r^.L^l  --X.J- ^^J-vAr- 


v   *l 

\j      / 


/-«-j>^l  ........  .«=~V.L  ....... 

~^        c\  \  •  r 

_j9i  ______  I— 


•Vc 


.   /    No          "/- 


-VI 


- Ax 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


189 


:JL 


.Yl..,/ 


i 
""7J 


> ^r    c~ 

<i_^ -<?- "3s  \ 


>   ^.^^^,l.^.I.LC.^..^v. 
*    s  i 


THE    MAGIC  OF  MODERN    SCIENCE. 


u 


.O-. 


VI  "-^A/ 


^L 

<n 


K, -Lr,  Jl 


JL. 


190 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

CHARACTER    OF  ABRAHAM    LINCOLN. 


101 


^f- 

t 

JG 

j. .1.  ^-.A._... .i>  r\..-c^> jf-.^.^.s-^  vr. 

V  k       L— 


x:. 


192 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


<-rfi* 


;'- 


/  ; 


v±.L^ 


\ 


Y../.U.: 

/*~-4s —     .  — .  o 

......  P.  3.  -  JL-.  ff\       _-<-^  .  _\ 


j..c.x 


.-^-..-f-^C-'j: _./-:.. W^. 

^..f. I.A^^rx I   .. 

1^    -- 1  C         ^  x^ 
;.^ltJ:>..^V!».SL---cfc.«,\ai" 

v//15.  C.  BLAINE. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

ELEMENTARY    SCIENCE  IN   THE  PUBLIC  SCHOOLS. 


193 


u 


ri~Y /-i_      -\. 


194 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


=^X—  -*-9- 

vr_^ 
L^.^^..:i^...V^4.:r.f^n 

>^/u^ 


\>~ 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 
FACSIMILE  NOTES  BY  A.  R.  BAILEY. 


195 


^ 

I         /  ~7      ^ 


^     >fV/.?3^ 

y\      I      1 


-<c^ 


i          «r  / 

-9     / 

-  -&ft 

^4^0^^ 


^/l?..,^ 


196  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 

NOTES  OF  R.  S.  WRIGHT, — ENGRAVED 


^ 

•*-/    -.ft  (<?.  '  /O 


-#^a 


f 

iV 


1 

y  1 
I.U 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 


197 


FACSIMILE  NOTES  BY  FRED.  IRLAND. 
^-\        c---          (9  ^\ 


ft 


198  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 

NOTES  OF  EDMUND  DANIEL, — ENGRAVED  FACSIMILE. 


LX*jeJ 


FACSIMILE  NOTES  OF  LEI/AND  B.  CASE. 


199 


^/y^C/^ 


j/^A 


r  \    . 
*-/ 


lUni-k 


FACSIMILE  NOTES  BY  DAVID  WOI.FE  BROWN. 


L  !.., 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  201 


TRANSCRIPTS 

— OF — 

Advanced   Beading    Exercises,   and   Fac-Similo    Notes   of 
Prominent  Reporters. 


THE  STORY  OF  NARCISSUS. 

(Pages  134  and  135.) 

In  days  long  ago,  when  birds  and  flowers  and  trees  could  talk,  in  a 
country  far  over  the  sea,  there  was  a  beautiful  fountain.  It  was  in  an 
opening  in  the  forest  and  the  little  sunbeams  that  crept  between  the  leaves 
falling  upon  it,  made  it  shine  am}  sparkle  like  silver.  You  would  have 
thought  the  wind  was  playing  a  polka  among  the  trees,  so  gayly  did  the 
fountain  dance  and  bubble  over  the  rocks  while  it  was  sending  up  little 
showers  of  spray  that  made  tiny  rainbows.  But  between  its  banks 
further  down,  it  was  as  quiet  as  a  sleeping  child  and  the  ferns  bent  over 
and  bathed  themselves  in  it  and  the  cool  green  moss  crept  down  to  the 
water's  edge. 

The  mountain  goat  that  wandered  through  the  forest  had  never 
been  there  to  drink.  Even  the  wind  was  tenderly  careful  not  to  ruffle 
it  and  the  leaves  that  had  shaded  it  all  summer  long,  laid  themselves 
noiselessly  on  either  side  when  their  turn  came  to  fall,  but  they  never 
sullied  its  fair  surface.  One  day  a  youth  named  Narcissus  who  had  been 
hunting  in  the  forest,  lost  sight  of  his  companions,  and  while  looking 
for  them,  chanced  to  see  the  fountain  flashing  beneath  a  stray  sunbeam. 
He  at  once  turned  his  steps  toward  it,  much  delighted,  for  he  was  heated 
and  thirsty.  As  he  drew  nearer,  and  heard  the  plash  of  the  falliug  water 
and  saw  its  crystal  clearness,  he  thought  he  had  never  seen  so  beautiful 
a  place  and  he  hastened  to  bathe  his  burning  forehead  and  cool  his 
parched  lips. 

But  as  he  knelt  upon  the  mossy  bank  and  bent  over  the  water,  he 
saw  his  own  image,  as  in  a  glass.  He  thought  it  must  be  some  lovely 
water  sprite  that  lived  within  the  fountain  and  in  gazing  upon  it  he 
forgot  to  drink.  The  sparkling  eyes,  the  curling  locks,  the  blushing 
rounded  cheeks  and  the  parted  lips  rilled  him  with  admiration  and  he 
fell  in  love  with  that  image  of  himself,  but  he  knew  not  that  it  was  his 
own  image.  The  longer  he  looked,  the  more  beautiful  it  became  to  him, 
and  he  longed  to  embrace  it,  but  as  he  dipped  his  arms  in  the  water  and 
touched  it  with  his  lips  the  lovely  face  disappeared  as  though  its  owner 
had  been  frightened.  Narcissus  felt  himself  thrilled  with  alarm,  lest 
he  might  never  behold  it  again,  and  he  looked  around  in  vain  to  find  out 
where  it  had  fled.  What  was  his  delight  to  see  it  appearing  again  as 


202  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

the  surface  of  the  water  became  smooth.  It  gave  him  glance  for  glance, 
and  smile  for  smile,  but  although  the  lips  moved  as  if  they  were  speak- 
ing, they  gave  him  not  a  word.  He  begged  the  beautiful  creature  to 
come  out  of  the  fountain  and  live  with  him.  You  are  the  most  beautiful 
being  my  eyes  ever  looked  upon,  he  said,  and  I  love  you  with  all  my 
heart.  You  shall  have  all  that  is  mine,  and  I  will  forever  be  your  faith- 
ful friend,  if  you  will  only  come  with  me.  The  image  smiled,  and 
seemed  to  stretch  out  its  arms  to  him,  but  still  it  was  dumb.  This  only 
made  him  desire  all  the  more  to  hear  it  speak,  and  he  besought  it  for  a 
reply  until  saddened  by  continual  disappointment  his  tears  fell  upon  the 
water  and  disturbed  it.  This  made  the  face  look  wrinkled.  He 
thought  it  was  going  to  leave  him,  and  exclaimed,  "  Only  stay,  beauti- 
ful being,  and  let  me  gaze  upon  you  if  I  may  not  touch  you."  And  so 
he  hung  over  the  brink  of  the  fountain,  forgetting  his  food  and  rest, 
but  not  losing  sight  for  an  iustaut,of  the  lovely  face.  As  daylight  faded 
away,  and  the  moonbeams  crept  down  into  the  little  glade  to  bear  him 
company  he  still  kept  his  faithful  watch,  and  the  morning  sun  found 
him  where  it  had  said  good  night  to  him  the  evening  before.  Day  after 
day  and  night  after  night  he  stayed  there  gazing  and  grieving.  He 
grew  thin  and  pale  and  weak  until  worn  out  with  love  and  longing  he 
pined  away  and  died.  When  his  friends  found  the  poor  dead  Narcissus 
they  were  filled  with  sorrow  and  they  went  about  sadly  to  prepare  a 
funeral  pile,  for  it  was  the  custom  in  those  days  to  burn  the  dead.  But 
most  wonderful  to  tell !  when  they  returned  to  bear  away  the  body  it 
could  nowhere  be  found.  However,  before  their  astonished  eyes  a  little 
flower  rose  from  the  water's  edge  just  where  their  friend  had  died.  So 
they  named  the  flower  in  honor  of  him,  and  it  has  been  called  Narcissus 
unto  this  very  day. — Anna  M.  Pratt. 


A  JUST  JUDGE. 

(Pages  175-177.) 

A  gentleman  who  possessed  an  estate  worth  about  £500  a  year  in 
the  eastern  part  of  England  had  two  sons.  The  eldest  being  of  a 
rambling  disposition  went  abroad.  After  several  years  his  father  died, 
when  the  younger  son  destroyed  his  will  and  seized  upon  the  estate. 
He  gave  out  that  his  elder  brother  was  dead  and  bribed  false  witnesses 
to  attest  the  truth  of  it.  In  the  course  of  time  the  elder  brother 
returned  and  came  home  in  destitute  circumstances.  His  younger 
brother  repulsed  him  with  scorn  and  told  him  that  he  was  an  imposter 
and  cheat.  He  asserted  that  his  real  brother  was  dead  long  ago,  and  he 
could  bring  witnesses  to  prove  it.  The  poor  fellow,  having  neither 
money  nor  friends,  was  in  a  sad  situation.  He  went  round  the  neighbor- 
hood making  complaints  and  at  last  to  a  lawyer  who,  when  he  heard  the 
poor  man's  story,  replied,  "  you  have  nothing  to  give  me.  If  I  undertake 
the  case  and  lose  it,  it  will  bring  me  into  disgrace  as  all  the  wealth  and 
evidence  are  on  your  brother's  side  ;  however,  I  will  undertake  it  on  this 
condition :  You  shall  enter  into  an  obligation  to  pay  me  one  thousand 
guineas  if  I  gain  the  estate  for  you;  if  I  lose  it,  I  know  the  conse- 
quences and  I  venture  with  my  eyes  open."  Accordingly  he  entered  an 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  203 

action  against  the  younger  brother,  which  was  to  be  tried  at  the  next 
general  term  at  Kssex.  The  lawyer  having  engaged  in  the  cause  of 
the  young  man  and  being  stimulated  by  the  prospect  of  a  thousand 
guineas,  set  his  wits  to  work  to  contrive  the  best  method  to  gain  his 
end.  At  last  he  hit  upon  this  happy  thought,  that  he  would  consult  the 
first  judge  of  his  age,  Lord  Chief  Justice  Hale.  Accordingly  he 
hastened  up  to  London  and  laid  open  the  cause  and  all  its  circumstances. 
The  Judge,  who  was  a  great  lover  of  justice,  heard  the  case  attentively 
and  promised  him  all  the  assistance  in  his  power.  The  lawyer  having 
taken  leave,  the  judge  contrived  matters  so  as  to  finish  all  his  business 
at  the  King's  Bench  before  the  general  term  at  Essex.  When  within  a 
short  distance  of  the  place  he  dismissed  his  man  and  horses  and  sought 
a  single  house.  He  found  one  occupied  by  a  miller.  After  some  con- 
versation, and  making  himself  quite  agreeable,  he  proposed  to  the 
miller  to  change  clothes  with  him.  As  the  iudge  had  a  very  good  suit 
on,  the  man  had  no  reason  to  object.  Accordingly  the  judge  shifted 
from  top  to  toe  and  put  on  a  complete  suit  of  the  miller's  best.  Thus 
clothed  he  walked  to  Essex  and  procured  good  lodgings  suitable  for  the 
court  that  should  come  on  next  day.  When  the  trial  came  on  he  walked 
like  an  ignorant  country  fellow  backward  and  forward  along  the  county 
hall.  He  observed  narrowly  what  passed  around  him,  and  when  the 
hall  began  to  fill  he  found  out  the  poor  fellow  who  was  the  plaintiff. 
As  soon  as  he  came  into  the  hall  the  miller  drew  up  to  him.  "  Honest 
friend,"  said  he,  "how  is  your  cause  likely  to  go  to-day?"  "Why  my 
cause  is  in  a  very  precarious  situation  and  if  I  lose  it  I  am  ruined  for  life." 
"Well,  honest  friend,"  replied  the  miller,  "will  you  take  my  advice,  I 
will  let  you  into  a  secret  which  perhaps  you  do  not  know ;  every 
Englishman  has  the  right  and  privilege  to  except  against  any  one  jury- 
man out  of  the  whole  twelve  ;  now  you  must  insist  upon  your  privilege 
without  giving  a  reason  why,  and  if  possible  get  me  chosen  in  his  stead, 
and  I  will  do  you  all  the  service  in  my  power. "  Accordingly  when  the 
clerk  had  called  over  the  names  of  the  jurymen,  the  plaintiff  excepted 
to  one  of  them.  The  judge  on  the  bench  was  highly  offended  with  this 
liberty.  "What  do  you  mean,"  said  he,  "by  excepting  to  that  gentle- 
man ?"  "  I  mean,  my  lord,  to  assert  my  privilege  as  an  Englishman, 
without  giving  a  reason  why."  The  judge  who  had  been  highly  bribed, 
in  order  to  conceal  it  under  a  show  of  candor  and  having  a  confidence  in 
the  superiority  of  his  party,  said  :  "  Well,  sir,  as  you  claim  your  privil- 
ege in  one  instance,  I  will  grant  it.  Who  would  you  wish  to  have  in  the 
room  of  that  man  excepted  ?"  After  a  short  time  taken  in  consideration  : 
"My  lord,"  says  he,  "I  wish  to  have  an  honest  man  chosen  in,"  and 
looking  around  the  coxirt :  "my  lord,  there  is  that  miller  in  the  court, 
we  will  have  him  if  you  please."  Accordingly  the  miller  was  chosen  in. 
As  soon  as  the  clerk  of  the  court  had  given  them  all  their  oaths,  a  dex- 
terous fellow  came  into  the  apartment  and  slipped  ten  golden  guineas 
into  the  hands  of  the  eleven  jurymen  and  gave  the  miller  but  five.  He 
observed  that  they  were  all  bribed  as  well  as  himself,  and  said  to  his 
next  neighbor  in  a  soft  whisper,  "how  much  have  you  got?"  "Ten 
pieces,"  said  he.  But  he  concealed  what  he  had  got  himself.  The  cause 
was  opened  by  the  plaintiff 's  counsel,  and  all  the  scraps  of  evidence  that 
they  could  pick  up,  were  adduced  in  his  favor.  The  younger  brother 


204  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND, 

was  provided  with  a  great  number  of  witnesses  and  pleaders,  all  plenti 
fully  bribed  as  well  as  the  judge.  The  witnesses  deposed  that  they  were 
in  the  self-same  country  when  the  brother  died,  and  saw  him  buried. 
The  counsellors  pleaded  upon  this  accumulated  evidence,  and  every- 
thing went  with  a  full  tide  in  favor  of  the  younger  brother.  The  judge 
summed  up  the  evidence  with  great  gravity  and  deliberation.  "  And 
now,"  said  he,  "lay  your  heads  together  and  bring  in  your  verdict  as 
you  shall  deem  it  most  just."  They  waited  but  for  a  few  minutes  before 
they  determined  in  favor  of  the  younger  brother.  The  judge  said, 
"gentlemen,  are  you  agreed?"  "We  are  all  agreed,  my  lord,"  replied 
one.  "Hold,  my  lord,"  replied  the  miller,  "we  are  not  all  agreed." 
"  Why,"  said  the  judge  in  a  very  surly  manner,  "what's  the  matter  with 
you,  what  reasons  have  you  for  disagreeing?"  "  I  have  several  reasons, 
my  lord,"  replied  the  miller.  "  The  first  is,  they  have  given  to  all  these 
gentlemen  of  the  jury  ten  bright  pieces  of  gold  and  to  me  but  five, 
which  you  know  is  not  fair,  besides  I  have  many  objections  to  make  to 
the  false  reasonings  of  the  pleaders  and  the  contradictory  evidence  of 
the  witnesses."  Upon  this  the  miller  began  a  discourse  which  dis- 
closed such  avast  penetration  of  judgment,  such  extensive  knowledge  of 
law,  and  was  expressed  with  such  manly  and  energetic  eloquence  that  it 
astonished  the  judge  and  the  whole  court.  As  he  was  going  on  with 
his  powerful  demonstrations,  the  judge  in  great  surprise  stopped  him. 
"  Where  did  you  come  from  and  who  are  you ?"  "I  came  from  West- 
minster Hall,"  replied  the  miller,  "  my  name  is  Matthew  Hale.  I  am 
lord  chief  justice  of  the  King's  bench.  I  have  observed  the  iniquity  of 
your  proceedings  this  day,  therefore  come  down  from  a  seat  which  you 
are  in  no  wise  worthy  to  hold.  You  are  one  of  the  corrupt  parties  in 
this  iniquitous  business.  I  will  come  up  this  moment  and  try  the  cause 
all  over  again."  Accordingly  Sir  Matthew  went  up  with  his  miller's 
dress  and  hat  on,  began  the  trial  from  its  very  commencement  and 
searched  every  circumstance  of  truth  and  falsehood.  He  evinced  the 
elder  brother's  title  to  the  estate  from  the  contradictory  evidence  of  the 
witnesses  and  the  false  reasoning  of  the  pleaders,  unraveled  all  the 
sophistry  to  the  very  bottom  and  gained  a  complete  victory  in  favor  of 
truth  and  justice. 

IvETTER  OF  JOHN   RUSKIN, — ABOUT   BOOKS. 
(I- age  177.) 

SIR  :  Your  note  of  inquiry  as  to  what  books  have  most  influenced 
my  style  and  which  are  my  favorites,  has  lain  these  seven  days  in  my 
desk,  "becoming  less  answerable  the  more  I  thought  of  it.  Every  book 
that  I  like  influences  my  style,  and  fifty  years  of  constant  reading  have 
carried  me  through  more  pleasant  books  than  I  can  remember.  But 
what  I  suppose  to  be  best  in  my  own  manner  of  writing  has  been 
learned  chiefly  from  Byron  and  Scott.  Of  favorite  books  I  have  none. 
Every  book  on  niy  library  shelves  is  a  favorite  in  its  own  way  and  time. 
Some  are  the  guides  of  life,  others  its  solaces,  others  its  food  and 
strength;  nor  can  I  say  whether  I  like  best  to  be  taught  or  amused. 
The  book  oftenest  in  my  hand  of  late  years  is  certainly  Carlyle's 
"  Frederick." 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  205 

It  is  one  of  the  griefs  of  my  old  age  that  I  know  Scott  by  heart 
But  still  if  I  take  up  a  volume  of  him  it  is  not  laid  down  again  for  the 
next  hour,  and  I  am  always  extremely  grateful  to  any  friend  who  will 
tell  me  of  a*  cheerful  French  novel  or  a  pretty  French  play. 

There  is  little  difference,  as  far  as  I  can  see,  between  me  and  any 
other  well  trained  scholar  in  the  liking  of  books  of  high  caste  and 
cheerful  tone.  But  I  imagine  few  people  suffer  as  I  do  from  any  chance 
entanglement  in  a  foolish  or  dismal  fiction.  I  am,  sir, 

Your  faithful  servant, 

JOHN  RUSKIN. 

BUSINESS  AND  OFFICIAL,  LETTERS. 

(Pages  178-183.) 

GENTLEMEN  : 

Referring  to  your  letter  of  March  2,  we  beg  to  advise  you  that  our 
space  at  the  World's  Fair  will  be  in  the  Transportation  building. 
The  space  is  8  feet  wide  by  40  long. 

We  have  been  treated  with  the  utmost  courtesy  by  the  authorities 
in  this  matter,  and  although  there  has  been  great  delay  in  allotting 
space,  we  can  readily  see  that  it  is  unavoidable.  We  shall  endeavor  to 
arrange  this  exhibit  tastefully,  but  cannot  say  just  at  present  what  will 
be  put  into  it.  We  will  confine  ourselves,  however,  to  bicycles  and 
bicycle  sundries.  The  most  important  part  of  the  exhibit  will  be  the 
"  Ohio  King  "  wheel  and  the  "'Juniata."  Both  are  new  to' the  people, 
and  we  think  of  a  charactei  to  excite  their  interest,  and  also  show  them 
the  new  developments  in  bicycle  manufacture.  The  exhibit  will  also 
contain  smaller  goods,  such  as  Starr  Lamps,'  Samson  Lamps  and  an 
assortment  of  cheaper  lamps  of  great  merit 


DEAR  SIR: 

I  enclose  herewith  the  application  of  the  Cleveland  Electric  Railway 
Co.  for  permits  to  run  certain  feed  wires  from  the  power-house  on  Second 
avenue,  and  respectfully  recommend  that  the  same  be  not  granted. 

After  examination  of  the  question  I  am  of  the  opinion  heretofore 
verbally  expressed,  that  the  city  council  has  the  power  to  fix  the  terms 
and  conditions  upon  which  street  railways  within  the  city  may  be  con 
solidated.  Until  the  matter  has  been  submitted  to  the  council  and 
action  taken  by  it  in  respect  to  such  terms  and  conditions,  I  think  that 
the  executive  officers  of  the  city  should  not  in  any  manner  recognize 
the  alleged  consolidation  of  the  several  lines  of  street  railways  now 
claimed  to  be  represented  by  the  Cleveland  Electric  Railway  Co. 


DEAR  SIR  : 

I  have  been  absent  for  a  week  in  Cleveland  and  Cincinnati  which 
will  account  for  the  delay  in  replying  to  your  letters. 

I  would  say  in  reference  to  the  cargo  cf  coal  that  your  order  for  the 
same  has  been  cancelled.  It  would  require  five  thousand  dollars  im- 
mediately to  pay  for  this  coal  and  the  freights  on  it,  which  sum  must  of 


206  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

course  be  advanced  by  Moore,  Benjamin  &  Co.,  and  as  it  seems  that  the 
consolidated  company  will  take  possession  of  the  mines  in  about  two 
months,  there  will  be  considerable  coal  on  hand,  which  under  the  terms 
of  the  contract  would  be  a  loss  to  the  present  stockholders.  The  burden 
of  meeting  the  monthly  expenses  of  the  mines  has  been  very  great  to 
Moore,  Benjamin  &  Co.,  and  on  that  account  and  for  other  reasons,  it 
was  thought  best  that  the  mines  should  buy  their  fuel  a  little  at  a  time 
even  though  it  cost  something  extra  until  they  are  in  better  financial 
condition  than  at  present.  You  must  not  feel  that  the  cancellation  of 
this  order  is  any  reflection  on  your  judgment  in  purchasing  the  coal ; 
it  was  siniply  because  we  could  not  advance  the  money  at  present  to  pay 
for  it. 

I  found  in  Cleveland  that  the  steamer  had  left  there  on  Saturday 
last  and  made  an  arrangment  to  have  the  cargo  shipped  to  Duluth 
instead  of  to  Ashland. 


WAR  DEPARTMENT,     \ 
WASHINGTON,  SEPT.  21.  / 

SIR: — I  have  the  honor  to  transmit  herewith  a  letter  from  Messrs. 
Murphy  Bros,  of  Detroit,  Mich.,  proffering  the  sum  of  $100  in  the  settle- 
ment of  a  claim  for  damages  against  their  tug,  Onaping,  done  the 
St.  Clair  Flats  canal,  and  beg  to  invite  your  attention  to  the  suggestion 
of  the  chief  of  engineers  indorsed  thereon.  Very  respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servant, 
THE  HONORABLE,  GEORGE  W.  McCREARY, 

THE  ATTORNEY  GENERAL.  ACTING  SEC.  OF  WAR. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  JUSTICE,     \ 

S.  M.  CUTCHEON,  Esq.,  WASHINGTON,  SEPT.  26,  '87.  / 

U.  S.  Attorney, 

Detroit,  Midi. 

SIR: — I  enclose  herewith  copy  of  a  letter  of  the  2ist  directed  to 
this  department  by  the  Sec.  of  War  relative  to  the  settlement  of  a  claim 
against  Murphy  Bros,  for  damages  done  the  St.  Clair  Flats  canal  by 
their  tug  Onaping.  Your  attention  is  called  to  the  documents  accom- 
panying the  Secretary's  letter,  and  you  are  instructed  to  take  such 
action  as  you  may  think  proper  in  relation  thereto. 

Very  respectfully, 

S.  F.  PHILLIPS, 

ACTING  ATTY.  GEN. 

DEPARTMENT  OF  JUSTICE,  1 
SEPT.  29,  '87.  ] 

SIR  :— Acknowledging  your  letter  in  reference  to  the  offer  of  $100 
made  by  Murphy  Bros,  for  damages  done  the  St.  Clair  Flats  canal  by 
their  tug  Onaping,  you  are  hereby  directed  to  accept  this  offer  of 
settlement.  Vefy  respectfully, 

CHARLES  DEVENS, 

ATTY.  GEN'L. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  207 

DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  INTERIOR  \ 
JANUARY  19,  '89.  / 

HON.  CHARLES  DEVENS, 

Attorney  General. 

SIR  : — I  have  the  honor  to  acknowledge  the  receipt  of  your  letter  of 
the  I2th  inst.,  enclosing  copy  of  a  letter  dated  the  ist  inst.,  from  the 
United  States  Attorney  for  the  Eastern  District  of  Michigan,  in  relation 
to  a  quantity  of  logs  alleged  to  have  been  cut  from  a  tract  of  land 
therein  described,  embraced  in  the  Isabella  Reservation  in  said  State, 
and  suggesting  that  the  Registrar  of  the  Land  Office,  iu  whose  district 
said  logs  are,  be  instructed  to  seize  the  same  and  make  sale  thereof  as 
iu  other  similar  cases. 

In  reply  I  have  to  state,  that  I  have  this  day  instructed  the  Com- 
missioner of  the  General  Land  Office,  to  direct  the  Registrar  of  the  United 
States  Land  Office  at  Reed  City,  to  take  possession  of  said  logs,  make 
sale  thereof,  and  pay  the  proceeds  arising  therefrom  to  the  P.eceiver  01 
the  United  States  Land  Office  at  Reed  City,  who  will  be  instructed  to 
cover  the  same  into  the  Treasury  of  the  United  States  as  other  moneys 
received  from  the  sale  of  timber  cut  and  removed  from  the  public  lands. 

Very  respectfully, 

CARL  SCHURZ, 

SECRETARY. 


WASHINGTON,  APRII/  3,  89. 
S.  M.  CUTCHEON,  ESQ., 

U.  S.  Attorney, 

Detroit,  Mich. 

SIR  : — The  stenographic  account  of  Whittaker,  Maitland  &  Co.  for 
services  iu  the  case  of  the  United  States  vs.  O.  F.  Lockhead,  amounting 
to  $50  is  approved  because  of  the  endorsement  of  Judge  H.  B.  Brown, 
that  he  suggested  the  employment.  Otherwise  it  would  have  been  dis- 
allowed, because  it  had  not  been  previously  authorized  by  this  depart- 
ment which  must  be  considered  a  condition  precedent. 


DEAR  SIR: — The  case  of  Tillyer  versus  Eureka  Mining  Co.  is 
assigned  for  trial  and  is  likely  to  be  reached  by  the  court  during  the 
next  ten  days.  I  send  you  this  advice  in  order  that  you  may  have  your 
witnesses  in  position  to  respond  to  our  call  upon  telegram.  If  there  is  any 
change  in  your  address,  or  if  you  are  likely  to  be  absent  from  your  present 
place  of  residence  during  the  next  ten  days  for  any  considerable  length 
of  time,  kindly  advise  us  of  that  fact,  so  that  we  may  be  in  a  position  to 
communicate  promptly  by  wire.  We  will  undertake  to  give  you  one  or 
two  days  notice  besides  the  time  required  for  you  to  get  from  Meadville 
here.  It  is  impossible  at  this  time  to  state  definitely  that  the  case  will 
oe  tried  at  the  expiration  often  days  or  at  the  expiration  of  any  number 
of  days,  for  the  reason  that  there  are  six  or  eight  cases  ahead  of  this 
md  they  may  be  tried  rapidly  or  they  may  consume  a  greater  amount  of 
time. 


208  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

DEAR  SIR  : — In  response  to  your  letter  of  recent  date,  we  quote  you 
Nitrous  Oxide  Gas  at  $1.40  per  hundred  gallons,  f.  o.  b.  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

We  will  fill  any  standard  make  of  cylinders.  The  freight  rate 
between  Cleveland  and  Denver  will  be  very  little,  if  any,  more  than 
from  Chicago.  As  to  that  matter  we  will  equalize  freight  between  here 
and  Chicago,  provided  you  purchase  goods  in  half  dozen  cylinder  lots. 
We  guarantee  our  goods  to  be  as  pure  as  any  on  the  market,  and  our 
increasing  demands  convince  us  that  it  is  as  we  guarantee. 

With  regard  to  the  outfits  for  the  manufacture  of  gas,  would  say, 
our  outfits  are  larger  than  the  one  you  inquire  about,  as  their  capacity 
is  about  250  gallons.  The  prices  of  these  are  as  follows : 

Retort  f  10,  one  gallon  Wolfe  bottles  $2,  glass  tubing  and  rubber 
stoppers  5oc.  a  set,  gas  stoves  $3.50  each. 

Hoping  to  hear  from  you  by  way  of  a  trial  order,  we  are, 
Very  truly  yours, 


DEAR  SIR  : — The  Atlantic  Iron  Mining  Co.  obtained  its  right  to  the 
So  acres  of  land  upon  which  the  mine  is  situated  from  Edward  Ryan  of 
Hancock,  Michigan.  We  have  always  understood  that  this  mine  was 
owned  by  the  Wisconsin  Central  Railroad  Co.  But  when  we  came  to 
negotiate  definitely  for  a  lease  on  the  property,  we  found  that  the  north 
forty  acres — that  is  to  say  the  south-west  quarter  of  the  north-west 
quarter  of  section  i,  township  45,  range  I  east,  is  owned  by  the  Wis- 
consin Central  Railroad  Co.,  and  that  the  south  forty  acres,  being  the 
north-east  quarter  of  the  south-east  quarter  of  section  12,  is  owned  by 
another  corporation  called  the  Penokee  and  Gogebic  Development  Co. 
This  makes  complications  of  a  very  serious  character,  because  if  we  op- 
erate on  two  separate  leases,  we  must  report  separately  the  ore  which  is 
mined  from  each  piece  of  laud  and  pay  royalties  to  two  different  com- 
panies. The  difficulties  that  this  will  entail  will  suggest  themselves  to 
you.  I  have  therefore  opened  negotiations  looking  to  the  consolidation 
of  the  interests  of  the  railroad  company  and  the  development  company 
on  these  two  pieces  of  land,  but  so  far  have  not  met  with  any  encour- 
agement. Before  we  do  anything  further  in  the  matter,  will  you  kindly 
let  us  know  upon  which  of  these  two  tracks  the  ore  is  now  found,  and 
whether  in  your  opinion  both  pieces  of  land  are  necessary  to  the  mine, 
for  if  the  ore  is  found  upon  one  piece  and  not  upon  the  other  piece, 
we  might  abandon  one  or  the  other  of  them.  In  order  that  you  may 
be  better  informed  of  the  true  condition  of  affairs,  we  enclose  here- 
with copies  of  the  leases  as  far  as  they  relate  to  the  two  tracts  in 
question.  We  have  not  yet  made  any  definite  contract  between  the 
aiining  company,  the  railroad  company  and  the  development  company. 

Your  early  and  careful  reply  will  be  appreciated. 


DEAR  SIR: — Referring  to  the  attached  papers  concerning  the  short- 
age of  Red  Line  cars  at  Ludington.  During  the  month  of  December 
we  gave  them  397  M.  T.  Red  Lines,  during  January  it  has  been  light  on 
account  of  the  weather  and  the  demand  for  Red  Lines  at  Chicago  and 
vicinity.  About  a  week  ago  I  asked  the  F.  P.  M.  if  they  could  not  use 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  209 

200  N.  Y.  C.  cars  to  be  loaded  for  N.  Y.  C.  and  New  England  points. 
They  replied  that  they  had  no  shipments  for  these  points  but  could  load 
them  for  Buffalo  and  Philadelphia.  I  would  add  that  prospects  are  not 
very  flattering  for  line  cars  for  them  until  the  weather  moderates. 

Yours  truly, 


Mr.  T.  W. 

DIVISION  FREIGHT  AGENT, 

Buffalo,  N.  Y. 

DEAR  SIR  :— Mr.  Jackson,  commercial  agent  Santa  Fe  line  at 
Buffalo,  writes  that  the  New  York  Central  and  P.  &  R.  will  place  orders 
with  us  for  refrigerator  cars  via  these  lines  and  that  he  has  placed  orders 
with  you  accordingly.  Advises  3  for  Knowlesville,  10  for  Bloomfield 
and  2  for  Gasport,  all  on  the  N.  Y.  C.,  and  4  for  Victor  on  the  P.  &  R. 
You  can  use  California  fruit  cars  on  these  orders  provided  you  received 
the  orders  from  the  above  named  companies  for  the  same. 

Please  mail  me  the  number  of  the  cars  you  deliver,  also  send  same 
to  Mr.  Jackson  so  that  he  can  protect  shipments  for  our  line  and 
Santa  Fe. 


DEAR  SIRS  : — We  are  in  receipt  of  your  letter  of  the  isth  and  in 
reply  would  say  we  are  well  aware  of  the  fact  that  there  is  no  such 
thing  as  perfection  in  any  line  of  business,  still  at  the  same  time  we 
think  that  we  are  entitled  to  the  proceeds  of  this  sale.  If  it  were  nec- 
essary for  us  to  enforce  payment,  and  we  do  not  think  it  is,  we  should 
place  the  matter  in  the  hands  of  the  proper  officer  of  this  company  and 
allow  him  to  do  as  he  thinks  best.  We  trust  it  will  not  be  necessary  for 
us  to  proceed  to  such  extreme  measures,  but  should  it  become  our  duty 
we  shall  most  certainly  do  as  above  stated. 

Our  manager  starts  for  your  place  to-morrow,  and  we  trust  you  will 
be  able  to'  arrange  matters  satisfactorily  to  all  parties  concerned. 

Yours  respectfully, 


EXECUTIVE  MANSION,     \ 
WASHINGTON,  July  13,  '63.  j 
MAJOR  GENERAL  GRANT. 

My  dear  General : — I  do  not  remember  that  you  and  I  ever  met  per- 
sonally. I  write  this  now  as  a  grateful  acknowledgment  for  the  almost 
inestimable  service  you  have  done  the  country.  I  write  to  say  a  word 
further.  When  you  first  reached  the  vicinity  of  Vicksburg,  I  thought 
you  should  do  what  you  finally  did — march  the  troops  across  the  neck, 
run  the  batteries  with  the  transports,  and  thus  go  below,  and  I  never 
had  any  faith  except  a  general  hope  that  you  knew  better  than  I  that  the 
Yazoo  Pass  expedition  and  the  like  could  succeed.  When  you  got 
below  and  took  Port  Gibson,  Grand  Gulf  and  the  vicinity,  I  thought  you 
should  go  down  the  river  and  join  Gen.  Banks,  and  when  you  turned 
northward,  east  of  the  Big  Black,  I  feared  it  was  a  mistake.  I  now  wish 
to  make  the  personal  acknowledgment  that  you  were  right  and  I  was 
wrong.  Yours  truly, 

A.  LINCOLN. 


210  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

TREASURY  DEPARTMENT,  OFFICE  OF  SECRETARY,  ) 
WASHINGTON,  D.  C.,  October  9,  '90.  \ 

SIR: — I  have  the  honor  to  recommend  that  the  Board  of  Examiners 
of  this  department  be  authorized  to  add  to  the  general  average 
obtained  by  candidates  under  examination  for  promotion  in  this 
department,  an  additional  credit  of  five  per  centum  when  the  candidates 
have,  under  section  1754  of  the  Revised  Statutes,  claim  of  preference  in 
civil  appointments;  that  is  to  the  general  average  of  those  persons 
honorably  discharged  from  the  military  or  navai  service  by  reason  of 
disability  resulting  from  wounds  or  sickness  incurred  in  the  line  of  duty. 

Yours  respectfully, 
HON.  WM.  WINDOM,  (JAMES  BROOKS,) 

Secretary  of  Treasury.  Chief  Clerk  and  Member  of  the 

Board  of  Examiners. 


HON.  WM.  P.  FRY, 

Washington,  D.  C. 

SIR  : — I  have  the  honor  to  respectfully  acknowledge  receipt  of  your 
letter  dated  the  23d  inst.,  inclosing  Senate  Bill  No.  1104,  making  an  ap- 
propriation and  providing  for  the  constrnction  of  two  revenue  cutters 
for  service  on  the  Pacific  coast,  and  requesting  this  department  to 
furnish  your  committee  with  such  suggestions  as  it  may  deem  proper, 
touching  on  the  merits  of  the  bill  and  the  propriety  of  its  passage. 

In  reply  thereto,  I  would  say  that  the  department  has  considered  the 
necessity  for  two  new  cutters  on  the  Pacific  coast  so  urgent  that  it  has 
included  in  the  regular  estimates  the  sums  of  $175,000  and  $150,000  for 
the  construction  of  two  vessels,  the  former  sum  for  a  vessel  for  sen-ice 
at  San  Francisco  and,  during  the  summer  months,  in  the  Behring  Sea 
for  the  protection  of  the  seal  islands  and  the  government  interests  in 
Alaska,  and  the  latter  for  a  vessel  for  service  in  Puget  Sound  and  the 
waters  adjacent  in  Washington  state.  The  revenue  cutters  now  on  the 
Pacific  coast  were  built  many  years  ago  and  have  been  kept  steadily  at 
work  in  the  performance  of  the  multifarious  duties  required  of  them. 
They  are  of  the  age  when  vessels  require  frequent  repairs,  and  they 
should  gradually  be  replaced  by  new  vessels  of  more  modern  type  of 
hull'  and  machinery  which  will  give  greater  power  and  speed. 

I  earnestly  recommend  to  your  committee  the  passage  of  this  bill 
and  name  the  amounts  herein  mentioned  respectively,  as  necessary  to 
properly  build  and  equip  the  new  vessels. 

Senate  Bill  No.  1 104  is  herewith  returned, 

Yours  respectfully, 


MY  DEAR  SIR  : — I  found  your  letter  of  February  3  awaiting  me  on 
my  return  from  New  York.  I  am  very  much  interested  in  the  subject 
of  rapid  transit,  and  while  in  New  York  made  an  investigation  of  that 
adopted  by  the  Fourth  Avenue  Railway  Co.,  known  as  the  Julian 
system.  The  difficulty  is  that  all  these  parties  interested  in  storage 
batteries  are  spending  so  much  time  and  money  in  litigation  among 
themselves,  that  they  seem  to  lose  sight  of  the  advantages  of  using 
storage  batteries.  For  instance,  the  Fourth  Avenue  road,  running  down 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  211 ' 

town  from  the  Grand  Central  Depot,  is  using  the  Julian  system  of 
storage  batteries.  The  Electric  Accumulator  Co.  got  an  injunction 
against  them,  and  now  claims  to  control  the  market  and  to  monopolize 
the  whole  system  of  storage  batteries.  I  see  they  have  brought  suit  in 
our  court  against  the  Woodward  Co.  in  this  city.  On  the  other  hand 
the  Brush  Co.  claims  that  all  these  patents,  including  those  used  by  the 
Accumulator  Co.,  and  the  Woodward  Co.,  and  the  Julian  Co.  are  in- 
fringements upon  theirs,  so  that  it  seems  unsafe  for  us  to  take  hold  of 
anything.  I  saw  one  car  on  Fourth  avenue  operated  by  the  Julian 
system  and  the  superintendent  seemed  to  be  satisfied  that  he  would 
have  put  a  large  number  of  cars  upon  his  road  had  it  not  been 
for  the  injunction  of  the  Accumulator  Co.  The  Accumulator  Co. 
run  no  cars  of  their  own,  except  perhaps  one  in  Philadelphia,  but  have 
succeeded  in  putting  a  stop  to  everything  in  the  nature  of  storage  bat- 
teries, and  have  destroyed  a  business  which  they  ought  to  be  building 
up.  I  tried  to  convince  them  that  they  were  cutting  their  own  throats 
by  enjoining  all  storage  batteries.  The  better  plan  to  me  would  seem  to 
be  to  allow  them  to  run  and  recover  pecuniary  damages  for  the  infringe- 
ment of  their  patent.  I  am  not  informed  what  machine  is  used  by 
your  company,  but  if  it  is  anything  in  the  nature  of  that  used  by 
storage  companies  in  general,  you  will  probably  have  a  suit  on  your 
hands  before  a  great  while;  judging  from  what  I  heard  in  New  York 
city.  I  shall  be  glad  to  look  at  your  car  when  it  is  in  operation. 

Very  truly  yours, 

DEAR  SIR  : — Your  favor  of  the  8th  inst.  is  before  us.  Would  the 
Ohio  Central  standard  box  car  built  in  accordance  with  the  last  lot  we 
constructed  for  that  company  during  the  early  part  of  this  year,  be 
such  a  car  as  you  would  require  ?  We  presume  it  would  as  it  is  a 
60,000  pound  capacity  car.  Just  what  volume  of  grain  can  be  loaded 
into  it,  we  cannot  say,  but  presume  it  would  not  be  far  from  what  you 
want.  If  this  car  would  suit  you,  I  will  name  you  a  price  at  which  we 
could  build  you  a  similar  lot.  From  what  you  say  concerning  air 
brakes,  etc.,  we  would  simply  take  the  Ohio  Central  car  complete  and 
omit  the  air  brakes,  using  automatic  couplers,  however. 

Yours  truly, 

DEAR  SIR  : — I  beg  to  acknowledge  receipt  of  your  favor  of  the  yth 
inst.  I  will  look  into  this  matter  and  see  that  you  are  promptly  advised. 
1  was  under  the  impression  that  advices  were  going  forward  every  day, 
and  know  no  reason  why  this  should  not  have  been. 


SOCIAL,  LETTERS. 

(Pages  184-186.) 

MY  DEAR  SIR: — I  have  to  acknowledge  receipt  of  your  letter  of 
the  yth  inst.,  which  I  have  found  upon  my  return  from  New  York.  I 
judge  from  what  I  heard  there  that  there  is  a  possibility  that  my  ambition 
may  yet  be  gratified  as  you  say,  but  it  is  only  a  mere  possibility,and  while, 
of  course,  if  I  removed  to  Washington,  I  should  wish  to  dispose  of  my 


213  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

house,  I  do  not  allow  myself  to  look  so  far  ahead  as  to  determine  how 
this  ought  to  be  done.  Two  or  three  persons  have  already  spoken  to 
me  with  regard  to  it,  and  expressed  a  wish  to  purchase,  but  the  contin- 
gency of  my  selling  is  so  remote  that  I  have  not  deemed  it  necessary  to 
give  it  serious  consideration.  It  is  quite  probable  that  if  I  ever  wish 
to  dispose  of  my  place,  my  brother-in-law,  Major  Warren,  would  feel  as 
though  he  was  entitled  to  the  refusal  of  it,  though  he  has  not  spoken  to 
me  on  the  subject. 

The  judicial  celebration  in  New  York  was  a  grand  affair.  Indeed 
I  have  never  seen  such  a  distinguished  and  intellectual  body  of  men 
assembled  together  as  there  was  at  the  banquet  on  Wednesday.  I  met 
all  the  judges  of  the  Supreme  Court,  who  were  very  kind  to  me,  and 
two  or  three  expressed  a  wish  that  I  might  be  one  of  their  number,  and 
to  some  of  them  Judge  Gray's  appointment  seems  to  have  been  some- 
what of  a  surprise.  At  the  same  time  he  is  an  excellent  man,  and  if  I 
am  not  to  have  it  myself,  I  prefer  that  it  should  go  to  him. 


MY  DEAR  JUDGE: — I  did  not  receive  your  letter  of  the  ist  until  my 
return  from  New  York  on  Saturday,  where  I  went  to  attend  the  Cen- 
tennial Judicial  Celebration.  I  hoped  and  rather  expected  to  meet  you 
there.  It  was  a  grand  affair  and  I  could  not  forego  the  pleasure  of 
making  the  acquaintance  of  some  of  my  brother  judges  and  seeing  the 
distinguished  gentlemen  who  were  gathered  there.  A  larger  number  of 
refined  and  intellectual  men  I  never  saw  assembled  in  one  place. 

I  have  been  so  very  busy  with  admiralty  cases  this  winter  that  I 
have  not  found  time  to  take  up  the  patent  cases  from  Jackson,  but  will 
do  so  at  the  earliest  opportunity,  as  I  know  they  are  anxious  for  a 
decision.  I  have  never  had  so  many  and  so  important  admiralty  cases 
as  I  have  had  this  wnnter,  and  the  term  bids  fair  to  last  till  March.  I 
hope,  however,  within  a  week  or  ten  days  to  at  least  come  to  a  conclusion 
in  the  patent  cases. 

I  shall  be  very  glad  to  see  you  in  June,  although  I  do  not  think  the 
business  will  detain  you  a  great  while.  I  have  reserved  two  or  three 
cases  for  a  conference  with  you  and  it  is  possible  there  will  be  as  many 
admiralty  appeals.  I  think  you  had  better,  if  it  is  equally  convenient  to 
you,  postpone  your  visit  until  the  latter  half  of  the  mouth,  particularly 
if  you  decide  to  bring  Mrs.  and  Miss  Field  with  you.  It  is  needless  to 
say  that  we  should  be  delighted  to  see  either  of  them.  I  did  intend 
to  go  to  Cuba  this  month,  but  I  have  so  much  business  on  hand  it  is 
impossible  to  leave,  and  the  wreather  has  been  so  warm  that  there  really 
is  little  temptation.  Very  truly  yours, 


MY  DEAR  SIR: — You  are  so  good  as  to  ask  me  to  tell  you  what 
books  have  influenced  me.  Now  to  be  frank  I  have  never  been  a  very 
great  reader  unless  the  reading  was  in  some  way  connected  with  a  sub- 
ject in  which  I  take  an  interest.  My  days  have  been  too  busy  to  allow 
of  it,  and  besides  I  have  always  preferred  to  try  to  study  human  char- 
acter from  life  rather  than  in  the  pages  of  books  which,  if  they  be  true 
to  art,  must  to  some  extent  idealize  and  exaggerate  nature.  I  think 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  213 

that  to  those  who  have  eyes  to  see — although  the  doctrine  is  a  perilous 
one  for  a  novelist  to  preach — the  tangled  drama  of  existence,  as  it  is 
from  day  to  day  revealed  to  us  in  every  drawing-room  and  street,  has 
more  fascination  and  appeals  more  largely  to  the  sympathies  than  any 
novel.  But  as  to  books,wheu  a  boy  I  loved  those  books  that  other  boys  love 
and  I  love  them  still.  I  well  remember  a  little  scene  which  took  place 
when  I  was  a  child  of  eight  or  nine.  Robinson  Crusoe  held  me  in  his 
golden  thrall,  and  I  was  expected  to  go  to  church.  I  hid  beneath  a  bed 
with  Robinson  Crusoe,  and  was  in  due  course  discovered  by  an  elder 
sister  and  the  governess  who,  on  my  refusing  to  come  out,  resorted  to 
force.  Then  followed  a  struggle  that  was  quite  Homeric.  The  two 
ladies  tugged  as  best  they  might  but  I  clung  to  Crusoe  and  the  legs  of 
ihe  bed,  and  kicked  until  perfectly  exhausted;  they  took  their  departure 
in  no  very  Christian  frame  of  mind,  leaving  me  panting  indeed  but  trium- 
phant. Next  to  Robinson  Crusoe  I  think  I  liked  the  Arabian  Nights, 
the  Three  Musketeers  and  the  poems  of  Edgar  Allen  Poeand  Macaulay. 
My  two  favorite  novels  are  Dickens'  "  Tale  of  Two  Cities  "  and  Lytton's 
"  Coming  Race."  Both  these  books  I  can  read  again  and  again  and 
with  an  added  pleasure.  Only  my  delight  in  the  last  is  always  marred 
afresh  by  disgust  at  the  behavior  of  the  hero  who,  in  Order  to  return  to 
this  dull  earth,  put  away  the  queenly  Zoe's  love. 

I  think,  however,  that  I  have  always  been  more  stirred  by  poetry 
than  by  prose,  except  indeed  by  some  passages  where  prose  in  the 
hands  of  a  perfect  master,  rises  to  a  poetry  of  its  own,  which  to  my 
mind  surpasses  even  the  dignity  of  worthy  verse.  And  there  is  one 
immortal  work  that  moves  me  still  more — a  work  that  utters  all  the 
world's  yearning  anguish  and  disillusionment  in  one  sorrow-laden  and 
bitter  cry,  and  whose  stately  music  thrills  like  the  voice  of  pines  heard 
in  the  darkness  of  a  midnight  gale,  and  that  is  the  book  of  Ecclesiastes. 

H.  RIDER  HAGGARD. 


DEAR  SIB  : — I  received  your  kind  letter  with  your  excellent  advice 
to  the  people  of  the  United  States  which  I  read  with  great  pleasure  and 
hope  it  will  ,be  duly  regarded.  Such  writings,  though  they  may  be 
lightly  passed  over  by  many  readers,  yet  if  they  make  a  deep  impression 
on  one  active  mind  in  a  hundred,  the  effects  may  be  considerable.  Per- 
mit me  to  mention  one  little  instance  which,  though  it  relates  to  myself 
will  not  be  quite  uninteresting  to  you.  When  I  was  a  boy  I  met  with  a 
book,  •'  Essays  to  do  Good,"  which  I  think  was  written  by  your  father. 
It  had  been  so  little  regarded  by  a  former  possessor  that  several  leaves 
were  torn  out,  but  the  remainder  gave  me  such  a  turn  of  thinking  as  to 
have  an  influence  on  my  conduct  through  life,  for  I  have  always  set  a 
greater  value  on  the  character  of  the  doer  of  good  than  on  any  other 
kind  of  reputation,  and  if  I  have  been,  as  you  seem  to  think,  a  useful 
citizen,  the  public  owes  the  advantage  of  it  to  that  book. 

You  mention  your  being  in  your  y8th  year ;  I  am  in  my  79th ;  we 
are  grown  old  together.  It  is  now  more  than  sixty  years  since  I  left 
Boston,  but  I  remember  well  both  your  father  and  grandfather,  having 
heard  them  both  in  the  pulpit  and  seen  them  in  their  houses.  The  last 
time  I  saw  your  father  was  in  the  beginning  of  1724,  when  I  visited  him 


214  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

after  my  first  trip  to  Pennsylvania.  He  received  me  in  his  library,  and 
on  my  taking  leave,  showed  me  a  shorter  way  out  of  the  house  through  a 
narrow  passage  which  was  crossed  by  a  beam  overhead.  We  were  still 
talking  as  I  withdrew,  he  accompanying  me  behind  and  I  turning  partly 
towards  him,  when  he  said  hastily,  "  Stoop,  stoop."  I  did  not  under- 
stand him  until  I  felt  my  head  hit  against  the  beam.  He  was  a  man 
that  never  missed  any  occasion  of  giving  instruction,  and  upon  this  he 
said  to  me,  "  You  are  young  and  have  the  world  before  you,  stoop  as  you 
go  through  it  and  you  will  miss  many  hard  thumps."  This  advice  thus 
beat  into  my  head,  has  frequently  been  of  use  to  me,  and  I  often  think 
of  it  when  I  see  pride  mortified  and  misfortunes  brought  upon  people 
by  their  carrying  their  heads  too  high.  B.  FRANKLIN. 

1 2th  May,  1784. 

AN  ANECDOTE  OF  THE  REVOLUTION. 

Mrs.  Daniel  Hall,  having  obtained  permission  to  pay  a  visit  to  her 
mother  on  John's  Island,  was  on  the  point  of  embarking  when  an  officer 
stepping  forward  in  the  most  authoritative  manner,  demanded  the  key  of 
her  trunk. 

"  What  do  you  expect  to  find  there,"  said  the  lady. 

"  I  seek  for  treason,"  was  the  reply. 

"  You  may  save  yourself  the  trouble  of  searching  then,"  said  Mrs. 
Hall.  "  You  may  find  plenty  of  it  at  my  tongue's  end." 


THE  ACTION  OF  GLACIERS. 

(Pages  187-189.) 

The  observer  who  attentively  considers  the  mode  of  action  of  the 
rain  on  the  surface  of  the  land  readily  perceives  that  this  work  is 
accomplished  by  the  action  of  the  solar  forces  which  come  in  the  form 
of  heat  to  the  surface  of  the  oceans  and  other  water  areas,  lifting  the 
fluid  in  the  form  of  vapor  and  dropping  it  on  the  land.  He  has  per- 
ceived that  the  work  of  rain  water,  whether  it  speedily,  flows  over  the 
surface  or  slowly  courses  within  the  ground,  operates  to  sink  down  the 
land  and  chisel  the  surface  into  hills  and  valleys,  thereby  giving  the 
parts  of  the  earth  which  are  above  the  level  of  the  sea  {he  peculiar 
diversity  of  surface  which  is  of  such  importance  not  only  to  its  external 
shape  but  the  physiographic  condition  of  the  life  of  the  land. 

To  complete  his  survey  of  the  action  of  rain  water,  the  student 
must  now  turn  his  attention  to  the  work  done  by  glaciers,  or  the  action 
of  the  water  when  it  falls  in  the  form  of  snow  and  remains  unmelted 
while  it  flows  over  the  land  areas  on  its  path  toward  the  sea.  There  is  a 
common  though  erroneous  notion  that  glaciers  demand  for  their  exist- 
ence certain  very  peculiar  conditions,  and  that  an  ice  period  such  as 
characterized  the  Northern  Hemisphere  in  very  recent  geological  times 
represents*  very  unique  circumstances  in  the  history  of  the  earth.  There 
can  be  no  question  that  the  physiographic  effect  of  the  glacial  period  is 
very  great.  When  the  ice  lav  over  the  surface  of  North  America  to  the 
depth  of  thousands  of  feet  as  far  south  as  about  the  parallel  of  40  degrees 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  215 

in  the  region  east  of  the  Mississippi,  and  when  it  at  the  same  time  occu- 
pied a  large  part  of  Northern  Europe  and  Asia,  it  is  easy  to  see  that  the 
conditions  of  land  locked  in  this  enduring  coat  of  ice  were  far  other 
than  we  now  find  them.  It  is  important,  however,  that  the  reader 
should  disabuse  his  mind  as  to  the  singularity  of  the  causes  which  bring 
about  a  glacial  period.  There  can  be  but  little  question  that  these  ice 
periods  have  again  and  again  recurred  in  the  history  of  the  earth.  If 
they  represent  something  out  of  the  ordinary  order  of  nature,  we  shall 
have  to  change  the  rooted  beliefs  of  modern  geologists  to  the  effect  that 
the  earth,  from  the  most  remote  ages,  has  been  controlled  by  the  forces 
which  are  now  operating  upon  it.  To  secure  a  good  notion  of  the 
glacial  action  the  student  should  avail  himself  of  observations  on  his 
field,  which  he  can  readily  make  in  the  winter  season.  Going  into  the 
field  at  the  beginning  of  a  snow  storm  he  may  see  the  snow  fall  flake 
by  flake  on  the  earth.  Unlike  the  fluid  water,  which  falls  with  a  sensible 
force,  these  snow-flakes  strike  no  blow.  The  snow  crystals  come  down 
in  the  gentlest  possible  manner.  The  first  point  to  note  is  that  whether 
the  water  falls  as  rain  or  snow,  depends  on  a  very  slight  difference  of 
temperature.  It  will  often  happen  that  within  the  limits  of  a  line  a  few 
hundred  feet  in  length,  that  at  one  point  the  water  falls  as  snow  and  at 
another  point  as  a  cold  rain.  The  fact  is  that  the  difference  between 
the  heat  which  brings  the  water  down  as  rain  drops  and  that  which 
sends  it  to  the  earth  as  snow  is  infinitely  small. 

While  drops  of  rain  are  as  they  fall  little  irregular  spheres,  which  at 
once  splash  and  commingle  with  the  water  already  on  the  surface,  the  snow 
flakes  are  each  aggregations,  the  crystals  of  which  assume  a  wonderful 
variety  of  form  and  contain  a  great  deal  of  air  in  their  interstices.  It  is 
this  divided  character  of  the  ice  in  snow  flakes  which  gives  snow  its 
white  appearance.  We  can  imitate  the  result  by  powdering  ice.  Even 
transparent  glass  has  a  whitish  hue  when  broken  into  fine  bits. 

When  the  frozen  water  first  comes  to  the  earth  its  crystals  inter, 
mingle  with  each  other,  the  whole  mass  being  so  spongy  that  a  foot  in 
thickness  will  sometimes  not  give  more  than  half  an  inch  of  water 
when  melted.  But  this  feature  of  the  snow  rapidly  undergoes  a  change. 
As  the  thickness  of  the  snow  increases  the  flakes  press  upon  each  other, 
the  delicate  crystals  are  melted  by  this  pressure  and  the  sheet  becomes 
consolidated.  At  first  each  flake  tends  to  gather  into  the  form  of  a  little 
ball,  so  that  after  lying  on  the  ground  a  few  weeks,  we  observe  that 
the  snow  is  not  only  more  compact,  but  that  it  has  a  granular  appear- 
ance. If  the  snow  endure  on  the  ground,  if  occasional  rain  storms  fill 
the  interstices  between  the  grains  with  water  which  freezes  in  its  place, 
the  mass  may  change  into  a  whitish  ice  so  solid  that  the  foot  will  not 
sink  into  it — often,  indeed,  so  compact  that  it  can  be  broken  with  hardl} 
less  ease  than  ordinary  ice. 

As  soon  as  such  a  covering  of  snow,  however  trifling  its  depth,  is  ac- 
cumulated on  the  surface  of  the  field,  the  student  is  observing  a  glacial 
sheet  and  for  a  time  he  is  living  in  a  glacial  period.  The  more  import- 
ant phenomena  which  are  now  exhibited  in  the  glaciers  of  Greenland 
and  which  were  present  in  this  country  in  the  last  ice  period  are  shown 
in  a  small  way  on  the  hillsides  of  all  countries  which  are  snow-bound  in 
the  winter  part  of  the  year.  The  most  important  action  of  the  glaciers 


216  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

consists  in  the  downward  movement  of  the  ice  of  which  it  is  composed 
over  the  slopes  on  which  it  rests.  When  the  ice  sheet  is  thousands  of 
feet  in  thickness  and  creeps  over  a  lofty  country  to  the  sea  it  drags  over 
the  rocks  rending  them  by  its  movement,  grinding  the  fragrants  to 
pieces  and  conveying  the  mass  forward  to  the  margin  of  the  glacier. 
There  are  other  features  connected  with  the  great  ice  sheet,  but  this  is 
the  only  one  of  much  geological  importance.  In  the  temporary  glaciers 
of  our  northern  snow- field,  we  may  observe  that  the  movement  of  the 
compact  snow  is  precisely  like  that  which  occurs  in  all  glaciers  whatso- 
ever. The  sheet  when  it  begins  to  creep  down  the  hillsides,  moves  very 
slowly,  but  with  sufficient  energy'  often  to  produce  noteworthy  effects. 
In  a  cemetery  near  Augusta,  Maine,  the  burial  places  are  on  a  tolerably 
steep  hillside,  where  the  snow  accumulates  to  a  depth  of  several  feet 
and  remains  for  several  months.  It  has  more  than  once  happened  that 
the  downward  movement  of  this  snow,  not  in  the  form  of  an  avalanche, 
but  by  slow  glacial  creeping,  has  broken  off  the  monuments  and 
iron  fences  about  the  graves,  conveying  them  a  few  feet  down  the 
declivity.  If  the  observer  will  closely  note  the  condition  of  the  surface 
of  the  hillside  after  the  snow  has  gone  away,  he  will  often  see  that  the 
stems  of  plants  are  bent  downward  and  that  small  stones  have  been 
slipped  from  their  original  bedding -places  and  carried  a  little  ways  on 
their  glacial  journey. — Prof.  JV.  S.  Shaler,  in  The  Chautauqiian. 

THE  MAGIC  OF  MODERN  SCIENCE- 

(Page  189.) 

This  is  pre-eminently  the  age  of  physical  science,  of  machinery, 
electricity  and  chemistry.  These  wonderful  agencies  are  enabling  the 
human  race  to  realize  the  wild  dream  of  that  ancient  period  when  men 
were  supposed  to  be  able  to  wield  the  powers  of  magic.  We  do  not 
possess  Alladin's  lamp,  nor  do  we  seek  to  unfold  the  secrets  of  the 
philosopher's  stone,  but  we  work  with  our  science  wonders  more  aston- 
ishing and  vastly  more  valuable  than  were  attributed  to  ancient  magic. 
When  we  consider  that  the  potentialities  of  science  are  merely  in  their 
infancy  we  are  brought  to  realize  that  the  greatest  sphere  of  usefullness 
and  profit  possible  for  human  intelligence,  is  in  the  stud}-  and  elucida- 
tion of  the  secrets  of  machinery,  electricity  and  chemistry.  With  the 
greatest  respect  for  the  legal  profession,  it  is  doubtful  if  there  is  a  lawyer 
in  the  whole  world  whose  name  is  as  widely  known  as  that  of  Edison, 
the  electrician  ;  of  Watt,  the  steam  engineer;  or  of  Farraday,  the  chemist. 
But  what  has  been  done  in  these  branches  of  science  is  but  the  sugges- 
tion of  what  is  to  be  done.  The  telephone,  the  telegraph,  the  phono- 
graph,electric  illumination  and  propulsion,  are  the  loose  ends  of  industrial 
economics  of  the  most  far-reaching  power  and  stupendous  importance. 
The  secrets  of  chemistry,  so  far  as  they  have  been  developed,  have 
exercised  an  enormous  influence  on  human  progress.  The  refining  of 
crude  medical  and  food  products,  the  purification  of  oils  and  metals,  the 
discovery  of  dye-stuffs,  the  compounding  of  explosives,  the  elaboration 
of  methods  of  analysis  by  which  the  composition  of  all  substances  may 
be  ascertained  and  distinguished,  are  splendid  achievements,  but  they 
onlv  indicate  how  much  more  is  to  be  done. — New.  Orleans  Picayune. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  217 

LETTER  OF  JOHN  BRIGHT. 

(Page  190.) 

LONDON,  March  29,  'Si. 

DEAR  SIR  : — I  have  not  time  to  answer  your  letter  at  length.  If  you 
will  read  the  little  book  to  which  I  referred  in  my  letter  on  the  speech 
of  the  member  for  Preston,  you  may  learn  much  from  it — more  than  I 
can  tell  you  in  any  letter  I  can  write. 

We  all  regret  that  France,  the  United  States  of  America,  and  other 
countries  continue  their  high  tariffs,  and  it  is,  we  believe,  a  misfortune  to 
them  and  injurious  to  us ;  but  we  can  only  legislate  for  our  own  country 
and  not  for  them.  If  you  think  that  not  being  able  to  sell  freely  we 
should  mend  ourselves  by  giving  up  the  power  to  buy  freely,  I  may  as 
well  leave  you  to  that  opinion,  only  expressing  wonder  at  it.  But  you 
will  perhaps  say  that  we  can  force  other  nations  to  reduce  their  tariff  if 
we  enforce  a  tariff  against  them.  You  forget  probably  that  we  have 
tried  this  in  times  past,  and  that  it  has  wholly  failed.  Sir  Robert  Peel 
taught  this  nearly  forty  years  ago,  and  he  believed,  as  I  believe,  that 
the  best  defense  we  can  have  against  the  evils  of  foreign  tariffs  is  to 
have  no  tariff  of  our  own. 

You  speak  of  France :  the  French  senate  is  in  favor  of  more  pro- 
tection. The  Chamber  of  Deputies  is  disposed  to  free  trade,  and  to  a 
more  liberal  policy.  The  free  trade  party  in  France  is  more  powerful 
than  in  times  past,  and  it  is  not  certain  that  the  proposed  treaty  will  be 
less  favorable  to  trade  between  the  two  countries.  As  to  America,  how 
will  you  compel  its  government  to  reduce  their  tariff?  By  placing 
duties  on  American  exports  to  England  ?  If  so,  on  what  exports,  on 
cotton  for  the  mills  of  Lancashire,  or  on  corn  for  the  food  of  all  our 
people?  The  American  protective  tariff  makes  it  difficult  or  impossible 
for  Americans  to  become  great  exporters  of  manufactures.  If  you  fight 
them  at  the  custom-house  you  can  only  assail  them  by  duties  on  cotton, 
or  on  corn,  and  this  surely  will  not  benefit  Lancashire,  or  the  West 
Riding.  When  the  debt  of  the  United  States  is  much  reduced,  when 
the  revenue  is  in  excess  of  their  wants,  then  their  tariff  will  be  reformed, 
and  their  import  duties  will  be  reduced. 

If  you  doubt  what  free  trade  has  done  for  England,  go  back  to  your 
histories  and  read  what  was  the  condition  of  our  workmen  and  their 
families  for  the  first  forty  years  of  this  century  when  everything  was 
supposed  to  be  protected,  and  compare  it  with  what  it  is  now. 

For  some  years  past  manufacturers  and  farmers  have  suffered 
greatly  and  workmen  have  suffered  much,  but  they  have  not  seen  one 
tenth  part  of  the  distress  which  afflicted  them  during  the  forty  years  of 
the  high  duties  from  1800  to  1840.  The  country  suffers  now,  not  from  our 
purified  tariff,  and  not  wholly  or  in  chief  part  from  foreign  tariffs.  It 
suffers  from  want  of  sunshine — from  the  short  harvests  of  several  years ; 
and  till  we  Ime  good  harvests  we  must  suffer  and  endure^  Parliament 
cannot  give  sun  and  heat  for  our  fields,  and  it  will  be  no  compensation 
to  reimpose  import  duties  and  to  deny  us  the  right  to  purchase  freely 
what  we  need  from  foreign  nations. 

I  am  respectfully  yours, 

JOHN  BRIGHT. 


218  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

THE  CHARACTER  OF  ABRAHAM  LINCOLN. 

(Pages  191  and  192.) 

Six  days  after  the  surrender  of  Lee,  the  nation  was  thrown  into  the 
deepest  grief  by  the  assassination  of  the  President.  The  gloom  which 
enshrouded  the  country  was  as  thick  darkness.  The  people  had  come 
through  many  alternations  of  fear  and  hope  to  repose  the  most  absolute 
trust  in  Mr.  Lincoln.  They  realized  that  he  had  seen  clearly  where  they 
were  blind,  that  he  had  known  fully  where  they  were  ignorant.  He  had 
been  patient,  faithful  and  far-seeing.  Religious  people  regarded  him  as 
one  divinely  appointed,  like  the  prophet  of  old,  to  a  great  work,  and 
they  found  comfort  in  the  parallel  which  they  saw  in  his  death  with  that 
of  the  leader  of  Israel.  He,  too,  had  reached  the  mountain's  top  and 
had  seen  the  land  of  the  redeemed  unto  the  utmost  sea,  and  had  then 
died. 

Mr.  Lincoln  had  been  for  some  time  in  the  presidency  before  the 
public  esteem  of  him  was  correct  or  appreciative.  The  people  did  not 
at  first  understand  him;  in  the  glamour  of  the  presidential  canvass  they 
had  idealized  him,  attributing  to  him  some  traits  above  and  many  below 
his  essential  qualities.  After  his  election  and  before  his  iuaguration  there 
was  a  general  disposition  to  depreciate  him.  He  became  associated  in 
the  public  mind  with  an  impending  calamity,  and  tens  of  thousands 
who  had  voted  for  him  heartily  repented  the  act,  and  inwardly  execrated 
the  day  that  had  committed  the  destinies  of  the  Union  to  his  keeping. 

The  first  strong  test  brought  upon  Mr.  Lincoln  was  this  depressing 
reaction  among  so  many  of  his  supporters.  A  man  with  a  less  resolute 
purpose  would  have  been  cast  down  by  it,  but  Mr.  Lincoln  preserved 
the  "  metis  equa  zw  ardms."  Through  the  gloom  of  weeks  preceding 
his  iuaguration  he  held  his  even  way.  Perhaps  in  a  more  terrible  crisis 
through  which  he  was  afterwards  called  to  pass,  a  firmer  nerve  was 
required,  but  not  so  rare  a  combination  of  qualities  as  he  had  shown  in 
the  dismal  months  with  which  the  year  1861  opened. 

Mr.  Lincoln  united  firmness  and  gentleness  in  a  singular  degree  ;  he 
rarely  spoke  a  harsh  word.  Ready  to  hear  argument  and  always  open  to 
conviction  he  adhered  tenaciously  to  the  conclusions  which  he  had  finally 
reached.  Altogether  he  had  confidence  in  himself,  trusted  to  the 
reasoning  of  his  own  mind,  believed  in  the  correctness  of  his  own 
judgment.  Many  popular  conceptions  concerning  him  are  erroneous. 
No  man  was  further  than  he  from  the  easy  familiar  jocose  character  in 
which  he  is  often  painted. 

While  he  paid  little  attention  to  form  and  ceremony,  he  was  not  a 
man  with  whom  liberties  could  be  taken.  There  was  but  one  person  in 
Illinois,  outside  of  his  own  household  who  ventured  to  address  him  by 
vhis  first  name.  There  was  no  one  in  Washington  who  even  attempted 
it.  He  appreciated  wit  and  humor,  and  relished  a  good  story,  especially 
if  it  illustrated  a  truth  or  strengthened  an  argument ;  he  had  a  vast 
fund  of  illustrative  anecdotes  which  he  used  with  the  best  effect.  But 
the  long  list  of  vulgar,  salacious  stories  attributed  to  him  were  retailed 
only  by  those  who  never  enjoyed  the  privilege  of  exchanging  a  word 
with  him.  His  life  was  altogether  a  serious  one,  inspired  by  the  noblest 
spirit,  devoted  to  the  highest  aims.  Humor  was  but  an  incident  with 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  219 

him,  a  partial  relief  to  the  melancholy  which  tinged  all  his  years.  He, 
presented  an  extraordinary  combination  of  mental  and  moral  qualities.. 
As  a  statesman  he  had  the  loftiest  ideal,  and  it  fell  to  his  lot  to 
inaugurate  measures  which  changed  the  fate  of  millions  of  living  nxen,, 
of  tens  of  millions  yet  to  be  born.  As  a  manager  of  political  issues 
and  master  of  the  art  of  presenting  them  he  had  no  rival  in  this 
country,  unless  one  to  be  found  in  Jefferson. 

The  complete  discomfiture  of  his  most  formidable  assailants  in  1863, 
especially  those  who  sought  to  prejudice  him  before  the  people  on  account 
of  the  arrest  of  Vallandingham  cannot  easily  be  paralleled  for  shrewd- 
ness of  treatment  and  for  keen  appreciation  of  the  reactionary  influence 
which  are  certain  to  control  public  opinion.  There  was  not  the  slightest 
lack  of  candor  or  fairness  in  his  methods ;  he  sought  to  control  men 
through  their  reason  and  their  conscience.  The  only  art  he  employed 
was  that  of  presenting  his  views  so  convincingly  as  to  force  conviction 
on  the  minds  of  his  hearers  and  his  readers. 

The  executive  talent  of  Mr.  Lincoln  was  remarkable — he  Was 
emphatically  the  head  of  his  own  administration,  the  ultimate  judge  at 
all  points  and  on  all  occasions,  when  questions  of  weight  were  to  be 
decided.  He  had  not  only  full  trust  in  his  own  capacity,  but  a  deep 
sense  of  his  own  responsibility — a  responsibility  which  could  not  be 
transferred,  and  for  which  he  felt  answerable  to  his  conscience  and  to 
God. 

There  has  been  a  discussion  as  to  Mr.  Lincoln's  religious  belief. 
He  was  silent  as  to  his  own  preference  among  creeds.  Prejudice 
against  any  particular  religion  he  did  not  entertain.  Allied  all  his  life 
with  Protestant  Christianity,  he  thankfully  availed  himself  of  the  services 
of  an  eminent  Catholic  Prelate,  Archbishop  Hughes,  of  New  York,  in  a 
personal  mission  to  England  of  great  importance  at  a  crisis  when  the 
relations  between  the  two  countries  were  disturbed  and  threatening. 
Throughout  the  whole  period  of  the  war  he  constantly  directed  the 
attention  of  the  nation  to  dependence  upon  God.  It  may  indeed  be 
doubted  whether  he  omitted  this  in  a  single  state-paper.  In  every 
message  to  Congress,  in  every  proclamation  to  the  people,  he  made  it 
prominent. 

In  July,  '63,  after  the  battle  of  Gettysburg,  he  called  upon  the  people 
to  give  thanks,  because  "it  has  pleased  Almighty  God  to  hearken  to  the 
supplications  and  prayers  of  an  afflicted  people,  and  to  vouchsafe  signal 
and  effective  victories  to  the  Army  and  Navy  of  the  United  States,"  and 
he  asked  the  people  "to  render  homage  to  the  Divine  Majesty,  and  to^ 
invoke  the  influence  of  His  Holy  Spirit  to  subdue  the  auger  which  has 
produced  and  so  long  sustained  a  needless  and  cruel  rebellion."  OH' 
another  occasion,  recounting  the  blessings  which  had  come  to  the  Union,; 
he  said,  "No  human  counsel  hath  devised,  nor  hath  any  mortal  hand 
worked  out  these  things."  They  are  the  gracious  gifts  of  the  most  High 
God,  who  while  dealing  with  us  in  anger  for  our  sins,  hath  nevertheless 
remembered  mercy."  Throughout  his  entire  official  career  attending 
at  all  times  with  exacting  duty  and  painful  responsibility  he  never 
forgot  his  own  dependence  or  the  dependence  of  the  people  upon  a 
higher  power.  In  his  last  public  address  delivered  to  an  immense 


220  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

crowd  assembled  at  the  White  House  on  the  nth  of  April,  to  congratu- 
late him  on  the  victories  of  the  Union,  the  President  standing  as  he 
unconsciously  was  in  the  very  shadow  of  death,  said  reverently  to  his 
hearers,  "In  the  midst  of  your  joyous  expression,  He  from  whom  all 
blessings  flow  must  first  be  remembered."  —Jas.  G.  Elaine. 


ELEMENTARY  SCIENCE  IN  THE  PUBLIC  SCHOOLS. 

(Pages  193  and  194.) 

The  question,  should  science  be  taught  in  the  public  or  common 
schools,  I  answer  in  the  affirmative,  most  decidedly  yes.  Which  of  the 
sciences?  Should  it  be  chemistry  or  physics  or  zoology  or  mineralogy 
or  botany  or  physiology  or  geology?  I  answer  all  of  them  as  one  sub- 
ject— the  study  of  nature.  Specialization,  differentiation  or  the  division 
of  labor  characterizes  civilization.  It  is  forced  upon  us  in  the  higher 
studies.  This  is  simply  a  matter  of  necessity  due  to  the  vastness  of  the 
field  of  higher  learning,  the  shortness  of  life  and  the  limits  of  the 
human  mind.  But  it  is  possible  to  specialize  only  in  the  maturity  of 
manhood  and  womanhood.  It  is  not  possible  in  childhood.  The  youth- 
ful mind  is  not  capable  of  such  work.  The  young  mind  is  unable  to  fix 
attention  or  concentrate  thought  upon  a  subject,  and  particularly  if  the 
subject  be  studied  in  an  isolated  and  disconnected  manner.  Add  to 
this  a  method  that  is  both  systematic  and  abstract,  and  the  avenues  to 
learning  are  completely  closed.  In  very  early  years,  say  before  the  age 
of  eleven  or  twelve,  the  average  child  cannot  readily  or  profitably  study 
anything  in  an  isolated,  a  systematic  or  abstract  manner,  and  he  can 
do  it  but  very  feebly  at  this  age. 

The  study  of  a  subject  systematically,  by  classification,  the  study  of 
the  abstract  and  the  cultivation  of  the  reasoning  faculty  should  not  be 
attempted  early.  Nature  rebels  against  it.  It  is  the  faculty  of  percep- 
tion which  appears  first.  This  is  the  faculty  which  should  receive  the 
attention  of  the  teacher  of  children.  To  the  cultivation  of  observation, 
expression  and  memory,  along  with  the  full  physical  development  of  the 
child,  all  the  best  energies  of  the  teacher  should  be  given.  It  is  not  a 
question  then  of  dividing  and  classifying  the  natural  and  physical 
sciences  and  choosing  one  or  more  of  them  to  be  placed  on  the  curriculum 
of  schools.  This  is  necessary  and  proper  in  the  later  years  of  the  high 
school  courses  and  in  the  higher  institutions,  but  not  in  the  common 
school  or  to  any  great  extent  in  the  lower  classes  of  the  high  school. 
System,  method  and  classification  in  study  are  exceedingly  important 
for  matured  persons ;  but  they  do  not  belong  to  early  life.  As  soon  as 
the  mind  is  prepared  to  undertake  such  work,  it  should  be  begun  and 
it  should  be  increased  very  slowly,  gradually  and  almost  imperceptibly. 
I  repeat  it,  common  school  pupils  should  not  be  taught  zoology  as  a 
distinct  science,  nor  botany,  nor  physics,  nor  geology  as  such. 

All  systems  of  classification,  even  to  the  division  of  these,  are  arti- 
ficial. Chemistry,  physics,  mineralogy,  botany,  zoology,  physiology  and 
geology  should  not  be  separated.  These  sciences  come  naturally 
together  when  studied  in  this  way.  Let  the  child  see  the  fish  swim  in 
the  water,  the  bird  fly  through  the  air,  the  duck  swim  and  sail  on  the 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  221 

pond.  Let  him  see  the  sand,  gravel,  grass,  trees,  flowers,  butterflies, 
beetles,  worms,  crops,  streams,  hills,  ravines,  bees,  squirrels,  ants, 
crickets,  birds,  snow,  rain,  stones,  rocks  and  fossils,  just  as  they  occur 
in  nature.  In  any  case,  even  to  adult  persons,  the  associations  are  of 
vital  significance.  Many  a  time  it  happens  that  a  mineral  sample  or  a 
bit  of  rock  or  fossil  by  itself  is  of  little  use  in  helping  us  to  understand 
some  question  of  moment.  Again,  an  extract  from  a  book  may  be 
unintelligible  or  ambiguous.  But  in  the  one  instance  permit  us  to  see 
the  associated  mineral  and  rocks  in  position,  and  in  the  other  to  read 
the  context,  and  what  a  flood  of  light  is  let  in  upon  us.  The  relations 
which  objects  of  the  three  kingdoms  of  nature  bear  toward  one  another 
are  of  the  utmost  importance.  But  in  addition  to  the  importance  of  the 
associations  and  relations,  the  ease  with  which  children  are  enabled  to 
comprehend  the  characteristic  structure,  habits  and  uses  of  anything 
when  studied  as  it  occurs  in  nature  is  something  the  teacher  and  parent 
connot  afford  to  ignore. — Prof.  Montgomery. 

TRANSCRIPT  OP  A.  R.  BAILEY'S  NOTES. 

(Page  195.) 

Testimony  taken  Saturday,  April  25,  1891,  before  Hon. 
Grover  Cleveland  as  referee,  in  the  case  of  McHugh  vs.  The 
Manhattan  Elevated  Railway  Co.,  in  New  York  City,  by  A. 
R.  Bailey,  official  stenographer  in  the  Elevated  Railroad  liti- 
gation : 

Q.     Mr.  Davis,  what  is  your  business  ? 

A.     Real  estate  broker  and  appraiser. 

Q.  For  how  many  years  have  you  been  engaged  in  the  real  estate 
business  ? 

A.     Twenty  years  and  over. 

Q.  During  that  time  have  you  carried  on  the  real  estate  business 
in  the  city  of  New  York  ? 

A.    Yes,  sir,  in  different  parts  of  the  city  of  New  York. 

Q.  Have  you  also  had  charge  of  estates  and  collected  rents  of  prop- 
erty during  that  time  ? 

A.     Well,  to  a  limited  extent  I  have  collected  rents. 

Q.  Have  you  also  appraised  property  for  different  parties  during 
that  time  ? 

A.  I  have  appraised  quite  a  number  of  parcels ;  I  am  appraising 
all  the  time. 

Q.  Are  you  regularly  employed  as  an  appraiser  bv  any  companies 
or  firms  ? 

A.    Yes,  sir,  two  or  three  of  them. 

Q.     Are  you  at  present  so  employed  ? 

A.    Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Do  you  take  the  publications  that  contain  the  transfers  of  prop- 
erty ? 

A.  I  have  taken  the  Record  and  Guide  for  a  number  of  years ;  I 
can't  say  how  many,  but  I  think  nearly  twenty. 

Q.    Are  you  a  membeer  of  the  Real  Estate  Exchange  ? 


222  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

A.    I  am,  sir. 

Q.  And  have  you  frequently  attended  auction  sales  at  the  Real 
Estate  Exchange  ? 

A.  Yes,  sir,  sometimes  every  day  and  sometimes  twice  a  week,  just 
as  I  have  the  opportunity  and  time  or  disposition  to  know  what  any  par- 
ticular sale  brings  that  takes  place. 

Q.     Are  you  familiar  with  34th  street  east  of  Third  avenue  ? 

A.    I  am  acquainted  with  the  premises  around  there,  yes,  sir. 

Q.     Have  you  been  acquainted  with  that  locality  for  several  years  ? 

A.    Yes,  sir. 

Q.    And  have  you  had  actual  transactions  there  ? 

A.  I  have  sold  two  or  three  pieces  of  property  at  different  times  in 
34th  street 

Q.  And  have  you  kept  yourself  informed  as  to  the  condition  of  real 
estate  in  that  section  for  a  number  of  years  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir,  I  have  had  property  for  sale  in  different  parts. 

Q.  Have  you  viewed  the  premises  in  suit,  No.  327,  East  34th  street, 
for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  information  upon  which  you  could  esti- 
mate the  value  of  those  premises  ? 

A.    Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Have  you  visited  those  premises  more  than  once  for  that  pur- 
pose? 

A.    Yes,  sir. 

Q.     When  did  you  last  visit  those  premises  ? 

A.     This  morning. 

Q.  Will  you  describe  the  location  of  the  premises  327  East  34th 
street  ? 

A.  Those  premises  are  on  the  northerly  side  of  34th  street,  about 
the  middle  of  the  block,  and  contain  600  feet.  There  is  a  four-story 
tenement  on  the  property,  with  a  store  and  sub-cellar,  and  it  is  in  very 
poor  condition,  without  improvements  of  any  kind.  There  are  eight 
rooms  on  the  floor  over  the  store,  and  these  rooms  are  rather  small  and 
uninviting. 

Q.     What  is  the  condition  of  the  hallway  ? 

A.  It  is  a  dilapidated  affair.  The  doors  were  all  open  when  I  went 
there  and  there  was  a  stone  against  the  door  to  keep  it  open,  and  it  had 
every  appearance  of  a  house  that  no  one  cared  about. 

Q.  What,  in  your  opinion,  is  the  present  fee  value  of  the  lot  and 
building  of  the  premises  in  suit  ? 

A.  I  placed  the  lot  at  $8,000  and  the  building  at  $13,000.  The  lot  is 
more  valuable  in  proportion  to  the  building  upon  it.  A  full  lot  there 
would  be  worth  $10,000. 

Q.     What  was  the  value  of  the  premises  in  1872  to  1874  ? 

A.     I  place  it  at  $i  1,000. 

Q.     What  do  you  consider  the  rental  value  of  these  premises  ? 

A.     About  $800. 

Q.     Has  there  been  a  change  in  this  block  in  the  last  twenty  years  ? 

A.  I  don't  think  there  has  been  an  improvement  of  any  kind  on 
this  block  in  the  last  twenty  years. 

Q.  Have  there  not  been  more  improvements  in  buildings  on  other 
streets  in  that  vicinity? 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  223 

A.  Thirty-third  street  has  improved  materially  by  modern  tene- 
ment houses,  called  "  cold-water  flats,"  which  gives  the  street  a  very 
desirable  appearance. 

Q.  Is  there  any  other  block  on  the  side  streets  similar  in  all  res- 
pects, having  a  series  of  old-fashioned  tenement  houses  with  no 
improvements  ? 

A.  Well,  Thirty-third  street,  between  First  and  Second  avenue, 
and  3  ad  street  also,  are  about  the  same.  There  are  some  private  houses 
in  32d  street. 

Q.    Have  there  not  been  some  modern  tenement  houses  built  there? 

A.  I  don't  think  there  has  been  any  modern  tenements  between 
First  and  Second  avenues. 

Q.  Have  you  been  familiar  with  the  general  character  of  34th  street 
for  a  number  of  years  and  the  reputation  of  the  street. 

A.  The  entire  surroundings  from  3oth  street  to  36th  street  has 
always  been  considered  a  very  hard  neighborhood,  mostly  occupied  by 
ruffians,  but  in  latter  years  since  this  good  class  of  factories  has  gone  up 
on  First  avenue  it  has  somewhat  improved  the  tone  of  it. 


TRANSCRIPT  OF  R.  S.  WRIGHT'S  REPORTING  NOTES. 

(Page  196.) 

Extract  from  an  address  by  Mr.  B.  P.  Roberts,  on  The 
Use  of  the  Storage  Battery  for  lighting  Purposes,  delivered 
at  a  meeting  of  the  Civil  Engineers  of  Cleveland,  O.,  Oct.  4, 
1892. 

Mr.  Roberts — Mr.  President : — In  incandescent  lighting  it  is  neces- 
sary to  have  constant  E.  M.  F.  (electro  motive  force.)  Unfortunately  the 
batteries  drop  in  voltage,  also  there  seems  to  be  line  loss  of  not  less  than 
three  or  four  per  cent,  at  full  load.  When  at  light  load,  the  line  loss  being 
practically  nothing,  the  lamps  are  strained  to  that  extent,  and  moreover 
this  is  aggravated  by  the  fact  that  the  time  of  light  load  commencement 
is  when  the  E.  M.  F.  is  two  volts  per  cell ,  giving  five  per  cent,  m  ore  voltage 
than  when  the  battery  has  reached  its  normal  condition.  Another  diffi- 
culty arises  from  the  fact  that  two  and  a  quarter  volts  per  cell  are  neces- 
sary when  charging;  and,  if  it  is  desired  to  tnrn  on  the  lamps  while  the 
battery  is  charging,  it  is  necessary  to  insert  resistance  in  the  lamp  cir- 
cuit, or  to  use  lewer  cells  for  the  same.  This  can  be  accomplished 
automatically,  but  it  is  extremely  difficult  to  construct  automatic  ap- 
paratus which  can  always  be  relied  upon  for  this  purpose.  Probably  the 
best  arrangement  is  merely  an  automatic  device  which  will  cut  out  the 
light  circuit  while  the  battery  is  charging.  There  are  three  mtthods  for 
using  the  storage  battery  for  lighting  purposes.  The  first  is  locating 
the  batteries  at  the  power  house.  The  second  is  locating  them  in  sub- 
stations which  are  the  center  of  distribution  for  a  small  district.  The 
third,  locating  them  in  each  building  where  the  light  is  desired.  The 
first  has  the  following  advantage:  The  E.  M.  F.  on  the  line  can  be  con- 
trolled in  the  same  manner  as  it  would  be  if  dynamos  were  operating. 
The  batteries  are  under  constant  inspection,  and  it  would  seem  easier 


224  PRACTICAL  SHOR'l HAND. 

to  keep  constant  load  on  the  engines  than  when  using  either  of  the 
other  plans.  The  second  plan  has  some  of  the  advantages  of  the  first 
and  some  of  the  disadvautagt s  of  the  third.  The  third  has  the  disad- 
vantages incident  to  installing  a  large  number  of  cells  in  each  house  in 
order  to  supply  the  maximum  output,  if  required,  which  would  proba- 
bly be  ten  times  or  more  the  general  output.  The  first  plan  is,  there- 
fore, the  most  debirable  when  the  lamps  are  not  situated  too  far  from 
the  station,  the  line  loss  in  such  a  case  being  a  large  factor.  The  sec- 
ond plan  can  be  resorted  to  when  the  lamps  are  at  a  great  distance  from 
the  station  and  therefore  the  current  can  be  sent  over  the  line  at  a 
higher  E.  M.  F.  than  would  be  used  when  the  batteries  are  charged  in 
series.  The  third  plan  is  seldom  advisable.  One  great  advantage  ob- 
tained from  using  the  storage  battery  is  that  the  engines  can  be  kept 
on  their  most  economical  load  all  the  time  while  operating,  and  this  is 
especially  advantageous  when  using  compound-engines.  In  large  sta- 
tions not  using  batteries  there  are  generally  so  many  engines  that  the 
same  result  can  be  accomplished,  but  in  the  smaller  stations  having 
only  two  or  three  engines,  it  is  probable  that  for  a  considerable  portion 
of  the  time  one  or  two  engines  will  be  operating  under  very  light  load, 
and  consequent  inefficiency.  The  batteries  can  be  charged  either  from 
a  constant  potential  and  varying  current  system  or  from  a  constant 
current  and  varying  potenial.  The  first  is  used  if  they  are  located  at 
not  too  great  a  distance  from  the  station.  If,  however,  the  lamps  are 
at  a  great  distance  from  the  station,  the  second  system  can  be  used 
with  an  arc  dynamo  for  charging,  and  the  line  loss  will  be  very 
small.  This  was  the  system  exploited  by  the  Brush  Company.  One 
trouble  with  this  method  is  that  the  charging  current  is  of  such  high 
E.  M.  F.  that  it  is  not  safe  to  have  the  batteries  connected  with  the 
house  wires  when  the  battery  is  charging.  Automatic  devices  to  dis- 
connect the  house  wires  are  therefore  desirable,  but  owing  to  their  un- 
certainty it  is  probably  better  to  use  hand-switches. 

Mr.  Barber — Mr.  President: — I  think  there  is  one  fundamental 
trouble  with  the  storage  battery,  and  that  is  that  when  the  battery  is 
charged  and  discharged  and  charged  again,  it  does  not  return  to'  its 
former  condition.  There  is  a  difference.  There  is  a  deterioration  which 
takes  place  every  time.  Of  course  it  is  very  slight  in  the  best  batteries; 
that  of  itself,  I  think,  is  iatal  to  the  battery. 


TRANSCRIPT  OP  NOTES  BY  FRED.  IRLAND, 

OFFICAI,  REPORTER,  UNITED  STATES  HOUSE   OF   REPRESENTATIVES. 

(Page  197.) 

MR.  WILKINSON.  Now,  Mr.  Speaker,  when  these  individual 
conferees  were  such  indifferent  listeners,  as  I  have  described,  and 
protested  that  the  information  that  was  offered  them  was  alreadv 
possessed  by  them,  I  could  not  help  being  astounded  at  the  extent  and 
variety  of  the  knowledge  that  must  be  possessed  by  any  one  man  to 
master  in  such  a  complete  manner  all  the  vast  and  varied  interests 
affected  by  this  bill — I  felt  as  Goldsmith  says  the  villagers  felt  about 
their  schoolmaster: 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  225 

And  still  they  gazed,  and  still  the  wonder  grew 
That  one  small  head  could  carry  all  he  knew. 

[Laughter.] 

I  have  said,  Mr.  Speaker,  that  this  was  a  sectional  bill.  The  gentle- 
man from  Ohio  [MR.  McKiNLEY]  told  us  the  other  day  that  this  bill  was 
not  sectional  because  it  placed  a  duty  on  yellow  pine  higher  than  the 
duty  on  white  pine.  So  far  as  yellow  pine  is  concerned,  there  is  an 
enormous  quantity  of  it  shipped  abroad  from  the  Gulf  States — Louisiana, 
Mississippi,  Alabama  and  Florida.  They  are  large  exporters  of  it,  but 
import  none  whatever,  and  none  of  the  people  interested  in  the  business 
to  whom  I  ever  spoke  on  the  subject  seemed  to  care  one  whit  what  the 
duty  on  yellow  pine  was. 

But,  Mr.  Speaker,  the  sectionalism  of  which  I  have  spoken  has  not 
been  omitted  in  the  sugar  schedule.  Maple  syrup  is  given  a  duty  of  20 
cents  a  gallon  in  addition  to  the  bounty  on  maple  sugar,  but  cane  syrup 
and  cane  molasses,  all  the  products  of  the  cane  up  to  1 6  Dutch  standard, 
are  made  free. 

MR.  DINGLEY.  The  gentleman  is  mistaken  as  to  maple  syrup. 
It  was  struck  out  in  conference. 


REPORTING  NOTES  OF  EDMUND  DANIEL, 

STENOGRAPHER    OF  THE   WAYNE   CIRCUIT  COURT,    DETROIT,  MICHIGAN. 

(Page  198.) 
CROSS-EXAMINATION  BY  MR.  CONELY. 

Q.  Will  you  give  us  the  date,  Mr.  Clark,  of  the  very  commence- 
ment of  your  employment  with  the  George  T.  Smith  Middlings  Purifier 
Company  ? 

A.  As  I  remember  it,  Mr.  Conely,  I  was  there  eight  years  and  a 
little  over  with  the  company,  being  apart — I  quit  there  in  January,  1887, 
and  I  began  eight  years  and  something  like  three  months  as  I  remember 
it,  before  that.  The  first  three  months  that  I  worked  was  in  the  latter 
part  of  1878,  I  should  think  it  was. 

Q.  I  notice  in  your  testimony  given  in  a  case  which  you  had  against 
the  company  you  say:  "  I  think  that  employment  began  the  latter  part 
of  1878?" 

A.     No. 

Q.  "A.  My  active  employment  continued  to  the  loth  of  January. 
1887."  Is  that  correct? 

A.     I  think  that  is  right. 

Q.     You  first  commenced  under  an  oral  contract,  didn't  you,  verbal  ? 

A.    Yes,  sir. 

Q.     Then  you  had  a  written  contract  ? 

A.    Yes,  sir. 

Q.    Will  you  let  me  have  the  first  written  contract  ? 

A.     If  it  is  in  the  files. 

Q.     What  files?    • 

A.     The  files  in  this  case. 

Q.  It  does  not  have  to  be.  It  ought  not  to  be,  but  it  may  be.  I 
will  read  this  contract,  and  if  it  is  correct,  as  copied,  you  can  say  so. 


226  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

(Reading)  "  The  George  T.  Smith  Middlings  Purifier  Company,  a  cor- 
poration duly  organized  under  the  laws  of  the  state  of  Michigan,  doing 
business  at  the  City  of  Jackson,  Michigan,  party  of  the  first  part,  and 
Myron  W.  Clark,  of  Parma,  Jackson  Co.,  Mich.,  party  of  the  second 
part,  agree  and  contract  as  follows  :  Party  of  the  second  part  is  to  act  as 
general  and  collecting  agent  for  said  Purifier  Company  during  ihe  year 
1883  at  a  yearly  salary  of  $4,500,  and  his  necessary  and  reasonable  travel- 
ing expenses,  which  salary  the  party  of  the  first  part  agrees  to  pay. 
Provided,  however,  that  if  the  gross  amount  of  sales  of  machines  by 
said  Purifier  Company  during  said  1883  is  as  large  as  the  gross  amount 
of  such  sales  for  such  company  in  the  year  1882,  then,  in  consideration 
of  such  sales,  the  salary  of  the  party  of  the  second  part  shall  be  $5,000 
instead  of  $4,500,  and  the  party  of  the  first  part  agrees  to  pay  him 
accordingly.  This  contract  to  expire  by  limitation  on  the  3ist  day  of 
December,  1883.  (Signed)  George  T.  Smith,  President,  M.  W.  Clark." 

A.     So  far  as  I  remember  it  that  is  a  correct  copy. 

Q.     Prior  to  that  you  had  only  a  verbal  contract  ? 

A.     That  is  all,  yes,  sir. 

Q.     What  was  your  salary  when  you  first  went  into  the  employment 
of  the  George  P.  Smith  Middlings  Purifier  Co.  ? 

A.    $75  a  month. 

Q.     How  soon  was  it  raised  ? 

A.     At  the  beginning  of  January  of  the  next  year  ;  of  the  first  year. 

Q.     What  was  it  for  that  year  ? 

A.     $1200  I  think. 

Q.     And  when  was  it  raised  again  ? 

A.     The  next  year  it  was  raised  to  $2,500. 

Q.     That  would  be — when  was  it  next  raised  ?   Give  us  the  raises. 
We  will  go  right  along. 

A.     The  next  year  to  $3,500.     The  next  year  to  $4,500. 

Q.     Is  that  the  first  of  the  written  contract  ? 
,    A.     No,  I  think  that  $4,500  was  prior  to  that  contract. 

Q.     So  you  received  $4,500  for  one  year  before  the  written  contract  ? 

A.     Please  follow  these  years  along  to  see  if  I  am  correct.      I  give 
this  entirely  from  memory,  and  I  may  be  wrong. 

Q.    Your  present  memory  is  that  you  received  $4,500  at  least  one 
year  before  the  term  of  the  written  contract  ? 

A.     Before  the  contract,  yes,  sir,  but  it  may  be  that  is  not  so.     It 
may  be  that  $3,500  was  the  last  before  that. 

REPORTING  NOTES  BY  L.  B.  CASE, 

STENOGRAPHER  OF  UNITED   STATES  COURT,   DETROIT,   MICHIGAN. 

Page  199. 

CLINTON  BENTLEY,  after  being  duly  sworn  on  behalf  of  the  libelant, 
testified  as  follows: 
Examined  by  MR.  CANFIEUX 
Q.     Where  do  you  live  ? 
A.     Ashtabula,  O. 
Q.     What  is  your  business  ? 
A.     Sailor. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  227 

Q.     How  long  have  you  sailed? 

A,     About  six  years. 

Q-    What  vessel  were  you  on  in  1891? 

A.     The  C.  H.  Green. 

Q.     In  what  capacity? 

A.     Wheelsman. 

Q.     Do  you  remember  a  collision  that  occurred  between  the  Japan 
and  the  Whitaker  up  near  White  Rock,  on  Lake  Superior  ? 

A.     I  remember  some  incidents  of  it,  yes,  sir. 

Q.     Were  you  on  watch  on  your  vesssel  at  the  time  ? 
I  was. 

At  the  wheel? 
Yes,  sir. 

Q.     Do  you  remember  the  Whitaker  and  tow  passing  your  tow? 

A.     I  do. 

Q.    And  according  to  your  judgment  how  far  from  your  tow  dia 
she  pass.     How  far  to  the  westward  did  she  pass  you  ? 

A.     From  half  a  mile  to  a  mile. 

Q.     Do  you  remember  seeing  a  steamer  coming  up  the  lake? 

A.     I  do. 

Q.     Do  you  remember  the  squall  that  set  in  ? 

A.     I  do. 

Q.     Did  you  see  that  steamer  before  the  squall  ? 

A.     The  one  down  the  lake  ? 

Q.    Yes,  sir,  the  one  that  was  coming  up  down  below. 

A.    Yes,  sir. 

Q.     And  how  did  she  seem  to  be  from  you  ? 

A.     She  seemed  to  be  very  near  ahead,  if  anything  aport  a  trifle,  on 
our  port  bow. 

Q.     Have  you  an  idea  of  the  distance  she  was  when  you  first  sav; 
her? 

A.     Well,  judging  as  I  saw  her,  off  about  ten  miles ;  eight  or  ten 
miles. 

Q.     And  when  you  last  saw  her  before  the  squall  how  far  did  she 
seem  to  be  ? 

A.     In  the  neighborhood  of  three  miles,  more  or  less. 

Q.     On  which  bow  was  she  when  you  last  saw  her  ? 

A.     Trifle  on  our  port  bow. 

Q.     When  the  squall  shut  in  I  suppose  you  lost  sight  of  her? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     Do  yon  remember  whether  you  got  any  order  after  the  squall 
set  in  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir,  I  did. 

Q.     What  was  that  order  ? 

A.     To  port  a  half. 

Q.    Who  communicated  that  order  to  you? 

A.    The  first  mate. 

Q.     When  you  saw  the  Japan,  you  say  a  little  on  your  port  bow,  on 
which  side  did  you  expect  her  to  pass  you? 

A.     I  expected  she  would  pass  us  ou  the  port  side. 


228  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

Q.     Now  do  you  know  what  kind  of  a  boat  that  was  that  you  saw? 

A.     Yes,  I  do,  some  features  of  her. 

Q.    What  line  did  she  belong  to  ? 

A.  She  was  a  Lake  Superior  Liner,  the  Lake  Superior  Transpor- 
tation Co. 

Q.     And  as  to  being  a  passenger  boat? 

A.     Yes,  with  one  closed  cabin. 

Q,     Did  you  obey  that  order  to  port  at  that  point? 

A.     I  did  immediately. 

Q.     Well,  it  was  thick,  I  suppose,  objects  were  obscured? 

A.    Yes,  sir. 

Q.     Now,  how  soon  did  it  brighten  up  again  after  it  got  thick? 

A.  From  the  time  it  first  set  in  to  from  four  to  six  or  eight  minutes, 
I  should  think,  I  could  not  tell  exactly. 

Q.     When  it  brightened  up  what  did  you  see  ahead  of  you  ? 

A.  I  saw  the  Unadilla  and  the  Watson,  making  them  out  to  be  the 
Whitaker's  consorts. 

Q.     What  did  you  see  of  the  Japan  ? 

A.  The  Japan  was  as  near  as  I  could  judge  in  under  the  Whitaker's 
stern. 

Q.     And  the  Whitaker  was  heading  which  way  ? 

A.     The  Whitaker  was  heading  well  in  towards  the  shore? 

Q.  Will  you  state  whether  you  passed  the  Whitaker's  tow  after  this 
collision,  after  the  squall  cleared  up? 

A.     We  did  pass  it,  yes,  sir. 

Q.     How  did  the  tow  seem  to  be  in  respect  to  their  course  ? 

A.  As  near  as  I  could  judge  they  were  well  on  their  course  down 
the  lake. 

Q.  Did  you  see  any  other  steamer  before  the  squall  coming  up 
besides  this  one  you  saw  on  your  port  bow,  which  you  have  designated 
as  the  japan  ? 

A.     No,  sir,  nothing  to  attract  my  attention. 

Q.  Did  you  at  any  time  see  a  steamer  coming  up  before  the  squall 
on  your  starboard  bow  ? 

A.     I  did  not. 

Q.  Was  there  anything  to  prevent  you  from  seeing  it  if  one  had 
been  over  there? 

A.     There  was  nothing  to  prevent  me  from  seeing  it,  no,  sir. 

CROSS   EXAMINATION   BY   MR.    GOUI.DER. 

Q.     You  say  you  would  have  noticed  it? 

A.     Noticed  which  ? 

Q.     Any  other  boat  that  had  been  around  there  ? 

MR.  CANFIEUX  I  guess  you  misunderstood  him.  He  said  if  there 
had  been  any,  there  was  nothing  to  prevent  him  from  seeing  it. 

Q.     Then  you  think  you  may  have  seen  it  ? 

A.     I  might  have. 

Q.     That  is  as  strong  as  you  can  put  that? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  When  the  collision  had  occurred,  the  squall  cleared  up,  you 
could  see  all  about  this  boat,  on  her 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  229 

REPORTING  NOTES  OP  DAVID  WOLFE  BROWN, 

CHIEF    OF   CORPS    OF    STENOGRAPHERS,    UNITED    STATES     HOUSE     OF 
REPRESENTATIVES. 

(Page  200.) 

MR.  DAIvZELL.  Mr.  Speaker,  I  shall  assume  that  the  facts  con- 
nected with  this  case  have  already  been  sufficiently  discussed  to  put 
them  entirely  into  the  possession  of  the  House,  so  that  it  will  be 
unnecessary  for  me  to  make  any  recital  of  them.  The  question 

under  discussion  has  no  relation  to  the  ultimate  right  of  either  of  these 
parties  to  a  seat  in  this  House.  The  question  at  present  is  simply  as  to 
a.prima  facie  right;  or,  in  other  words,  as  to  what  the  Clerk  ought  to 
have  done,  in  making  up  the  roll  of  this  House,  with  respect  to  these 
two  applicants  for  membership. 

Now,  the  Revised  Statutes  (section  31)  provide  that  "  in  making  up 
the  roll  of  members  at  the  first  meeting  of  a  Congress,  the  Clerk  of  the 
next  preceding  House  shall  place  thereon  the  names  of  such  persons 
and  of  those  persons  only  whose  credentials  show  that  they  were 
regularly  elected  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  their  States,  respectively, 
or  the  laws  of  the  United  States." 

Now,  it  will  be  observed  that  this  statute  points  out  the  party  who 
shall  make  up  the  roll,  to-wit,  the  Clerk  of  the  House;  it  designates  the 
parties  who  shall  be  put  on  that  roll,  tp-wit,  those  whose  credentials 
show  that  they  were  regularly  elected  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of 
their  respective  States  or  of  the  United  States.  It  prescribes,  further- 
more, impliedly  at  least,  the  time  at  which  the  Clerk  of  the  House  shall 
make  up  the  roll  in  accordance  with  the  credentials  of  its  members, 
to-wit,  upon  the  assembling  of  Congress. 

I  pause  here  to  say  that  nobody,  therefore,  can  be  deceived  by 
the  claim  that  because  the  Clerk,  upon  the  receipt. 


230  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

CHAPTER  ON  PHONETICS, 

With  Special  Beference  to  Shorthand. 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES. 

350.  Language,  which  is  defined  in  the  treatises  on  grammar  as 
the  medium  for  the  communication  of  thought,  is  made  up  of  sentences, 
clauses,  phrases,  words,  syllables  and  letters.     The  last  analysis  to  which 
written  language  is  susceptible  is  letters.      Letters   represent  sounds, 
ard  sounds  form  the  ultimate  analysis  of  spoken  language,  and  the  basis 
of  modern  shorthand  writing.     As  a  valuable  aid  to  the  study  of  short- 
hand we  present  a  rather  full  chapter  on  the  study  of  the  elementary 
sounds.     While  theoretically  it  is  true  that  we  have  to  deal  only  with 
sounds  in  shorthand,  yet  practically  it  is  true  only  in  a  limited  sense. 
Quite  as  many  sounds  are  omitted  as  are  expressed. 

To  some  students  who  have  been  imperfectly  trained  in  English, 
and  to  others  who  may  desire  to  refer  occasionally  to  the  first  principles 
of  language  this  chapter  will  be  helpful.  Language  existed  before 
letters.  In  other  words,  sounds  were  used  in  speech  long  before  letters 
grew  to  represent  them.  Our  present  letters  had  their  origin  in  the 
ancient  picture  writing  or  hieroglyphics  of  the  Phoenicians.  Their 
history  can  be  distinctly  traced,  and  however  pleasant  and  tempting  a 
field  of  inquiry  opens  before  us  in  this  historical  study  of  language,  we 
will  confine  our  present  inquiry  to  language  as  we  find  it.  If  the  student 
discovers  the  relation  between  letters  and  sounds  he  will  have  little  dif- 
ficulty in  the  study  of  phonetics  and  it  will  pave  the  way  to  an  easier 
mastery  of  shorthand.  Let  us  look  for  a  moment  at  the  first  principles 
of  language. 

351.  The  sounds  of  human  speech  are  produced  by  the  breath  pas- 
sing over  the  organs  of  speech, — the  lips, teeth, tongue,  and  palate.     The 
infinite  modifications  of  articulate  sounds  found  in  language  are  produced 
by  the  vibration  of  the  breath  while  the  organs  of  speech  are  held  in  dif- 
ferent positions. 

VOWELS  AND  CONSONANTS. 

352.  An  elementary  sound  is  one  that  cannot  be  divided,  and  is 
produced  by  a  single  impulse  of  the  voice.     As,  the  word  ebb  has  two 
elementary  sounds,  that  of  e  and  of  b- 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  231 

There  are  forty  elementary  sounds  of  the  English  language  of 
which  twelve  are  called  vowels,  twenty-four  consonants,  and  four 
diphthongs. 

353.  A  Vowel  is  an  open,  unobstructed  tone  which  may  be  pro- 
longed at  will.      The  word  vowel  comes  from  a  Latin  word  meaning 
open. 

354.  A  Consonant  (from  the  Latin  con,  with,  and  sonant,  sound- 
ing) is  a  tone  more  or  less  obstructed  by  the  organs  of  speech,  and  must 
be  sounded  with  a  vowel  to  form  a  syllable. 

The  sound  of  a  consonant  may  be  given  without  the  aid  of  a  vowel, 
as  it  has  a  distinct  and  independent  sound  of  its  own,  but  a  consonant 
cannot  be  named  without  the  aid  of  a  vowel.  The  student  will  note  the 
distinction  between  the  sound  of  a  consonant  and  the  name  of  the  con- 
conant.  Thus,  the  name  of  h  is  aitch,  while  the  sound  is  whispered  or 
rustling  utterance  produced  by  the  breath  passing  over  the  partly  closed 
organs  of  speech. 

355.  The  Vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  o,  and  u.    JFand  y  are  sometimes  vowels, 
or  substitutes  for  vowel  sounds. 

The  distinction  between  vowels  and  consonants  is  not  always  sharply 
defined.  One  of  the  distinguishing  characteristics  of  a  vowel  is  that  it 
may  form  a  syllable  when  standing  alone,  while  a  consonant  must  be 
sounded  with  a  vowel  to  form  a  syllable.  But  even  this  distinction  does 
not  always  obtain,  as  n  in  the  words  reckon,  ripen  forms  a  complete 
syllable,  the  e  being  entirely  silent.  So,  the  letter  /  in  such  words  as 
riddle,  etc. 

356.  Vowels  have  what  are  called  long  and  short  sounds  accord- 
ing to  their  quality  and  the  relative  time  which  is  occupied  in  uttering 
the  sound.     There  are  also  other  variations  of  vowel  sounds  produced 
by  the  organs  being  put  in  different  positions,  and  are  called  broad, 
slender,  medial,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  sound. 

A  SUBSTITUTE. 

357.  The  elementary  sounds  are  not  always  represented  by  their 
appropriate  letters.     For  instance,  the  long  sound  of  a  is  sometimes  re- 
presented by  ey  and  ei  as  in  they  and  weight.    When  one  letter  thus 
performs  the  functions  of  another  it  is  said  to  be  a  substitute  for  it. 
Thus,  *  is  a  substitute  for  e  long  in  the  word  machine.  This  irregularity 
is  what  makes  our  English  spelling  and  pronunciation  so  difficult. 

358.  A  long  (a),  the  open  or  vowel  sound  in  make,  airfreight,  they, 
is  produced  by  speaking  the  letter  a  as  heard  in  the  alphabet.     It  is 
most  frequently  represented  by  a  and  is  therefore  called  a.     A  letter 
which  most  frequently  represents  a  sound  gives  the  name  to  the  sound. 
It  will  be  seen  by  the  examples  above  that  this  sound  is  not  always  re- 
presented by  this  letter.    The  same  sound  is  represented  by  ei  in  weight 
and  ey  in  they. 

359.  A  short  (a).   This  is  the  vowel  sound  heard  in  man,  latch,  etc., 


232  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

and  is  always  represented  by  a.  It  is  called  a  short.  This  sound  may 
be  produced  by  trying  to  pronounce  the  word  at  without  touching  the 
tongue  to  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

360.  A  medial  (a).   This  sound  always  occurs  before  the  letter  r  as 
air,  fair,  prayer.    Considerable  difference  of  opinion  exists  as  to  the 
exact  quality  of  this  sound.     It  is  so  nearly  like  short  a  (In  most  sections 
of  the  country)  that  in  shorthand  it  is  represented  by  the  same  character 
as  a  short.    Graham  and  the  English  phonographers  consider  this  sound 
so  nearly  like  a  long  that  they  represent  it  by  the  same  shorthand  sign, 
that  is,  a  heavy  dot  in  the  second  position.    In  the  Western  sections  of 
this  country  the  phonographer  will  represent  this  sound  by  the  same 
sign  as  used  for  a  short. 

361.  A  slender  (a).    This  sound  is  heard  in  ah,  far,  calm,  and  has 
no  substitute.     It  is  always  represented  by  the  letter  a,  and  is  produced 
by  pronouncing  the  word  ah. 

362.  A  broad  (a).    The  vowel  sound  of  call,  law.    The  letter  o  is 
sometimes  found  representing  this  sound,  as  in  for,  but  it  is  most  frequ- 
ently represented  by  a.     It  is  produced  by  speaking  the  word  awe. 

363.  E  long  {§).     The  vowel  sound  of  me.     Its  distinct  sound  may 
be  produced  by  sounding  e  as  heard  in  the  alphabet.    It  has  f  for  a 
substitute,  and  is  a  member  of  several  digraphs. 

This  letter,  together  with  its  short  sound,  occurs  more  frequently 
than  any  other  letter  in  the  alphabet.  At  the  end  of  words  it  is  usually 
silent,  but  serves  to  indicate  that  the  preceding  vowel  has  the  long  sound, 
as  mane,  cane,  mete,  etc. 

364.  E  short  (e),  the  vowel  sound  as  heard  in  met,  any,  bury.    It  is 
usually  represented  by  e  but  sometimes  by  a  and  u  as  in  the  above 
examples. 

365.  I  long  (i)   is  properly  a  diphthong  and  is  treated  of  under 
that  head. 

366.  I  short  ( i).  This  is  the  vowel  sound  heard  in  the  words  hymn, 
English,  city,  women,  etc.    O,  e,  u,  and  y  are  often  used  to  represent  this 
sound.     The  simplest  specific  direction  for  producing  this  sound  is  to 
endeavor  to  pronounce  the  word  it  without  allowing  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  to  touch  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

367.  O  long  (o).    This  is  the  vowel  sound  heard  in  the  words  oak, 
beau,  sew.     Eau  and  ew  are  the  only  substitutes  for  this  letter.     To  pro- 
duce the  sound  utter  the  sound  of  o  as  heard  in  the  alphabet. 

368.  O  short  { 5 ).  The  vowel  sound  heard  in  doll, on,  and  what,  is  the 
short  sound  of  o.     Its  only  substitute  is  a  as  in  what.     To  make  this 
elementary  sound,  hold  the  tougue  perfectly  still  and  endeavor  to  pro- 
nounce the  word  on,  taking  care  to  prolong  the  sound. 

369.  O  slender  (o).  This  is  the  vowel  sound  heard  in  the  words 
do,  cool.     It  is  always  represented  by  o  or  oo. 

370.  U  long  (u).  This  is  a  diphthong  and  will  be  treated  under  its 
appropriate  head. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  233 

371.  U  short  (ft).    This  is  the  vowel  sound  heard  in#/>,  and  is  gener- 
ally represented  by  u  and  hence  is  called  the  short  sound  of  u.     It  has  for 
substitutes  e,  i,  o,  oo,  and  ou,  as  in  son,  blood,  young,  etc. 

There  are  two  distinct  shades  of  this  sound  which  have  given  rise 
to  endless  dispute  among  phoneticians,  and  the  sound  of  this  vowel  in 
but,  flood,  earn,  etc.  is  called  a  neutral  vowel,  "because  of  the  virtual 
absence  in  its  utterance  of  a  positive  determining  position  of  the  organs, 
it  being  rather  the  product  of  their  different  position  in  breathing  and 
the  form  towards  which  vowels  excessively  slighted  in  pronounciation 
tend." 

372.  U  medial  (ij).  This  is  the  sound  of  u  as  heard  in  pull,  full, 
etc.     It  has  a  sound  midway  between  u  long  and  u  short,  and  hence  is 
called  a  medial  sound  of  u.     It  is  often  represented  by  the  letter  o  as  in 
wolf,  foot,  etc. 

The  Century  Dictionary  has  called  this  the  real  short  sound  of  u. 
aud  the  so-called  short  sound  is  in  fact  a  neutral  vowel. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

373.  A  Diphthong  is  the  union  of  two  vowels  sounded  in  the  same 
syllable..    There  are  six  diphthongs  in  English  and  four  diphthongal 
sounds;  as,  oi,  oy;  ou,  ow;  i  and  u. 

In  the  utterance  of  a  diphthong  neither  vowel  has  its  usual  sound, 
but  both  are  so  blended  as  to  form  one  syllable. 

374.  Oi,  oy,  as  in  oil  and  boy  represents  a  perfect  diphthong.    It  is 
composed  of   the   sounds   of  broad   a  and    short  i   uttered  in   rapid 
succession. 

375.  Ou,  ow,  as  in  out,  cow,  form  a  distinct  diphthong. 

376.  I.  The  so-called  long  sound  of  *  is  a  blending  of  the  sound  of  a 
and  e.    The  sound  is  sometimes  represented  by  the  sound  of  y  as  in 
rhyme. 

377.  What  is  called  u  long  has  a  distinct  y  sound  preceding  the 
sound  of  oo,  and  is  hence  a  diphthong.  It  has  a  substitute  as  ew  in  new. 

378.  A  digraph  is  the  use  of  two  letters  to  rspresent  one  sound,  as 
ea  in  mean. 

379.  A  Triphthong  is  a  union  of  three  vowels  in  the  same  syllable, 
two  of  which  are  silent :  as,  eau  in  beauty,  iew  in  view. 

380.  Consonants  are  divided  into  two  great  classes,  spirants  and 
subvocals. 

381.  Spirants  are  consonant  sounds  produced  by  the  breath  pas- 
sing over  the  partly  closed  organs  of  speech,  resulting  in  a  fricative  or 
rustling  utterance  like  the  sounds  of  p  and  /  in  the  syllables  per,  ter. 
They  are  mere  whispers,  having  no  vocal  tone.     S  and  h  are  examples  of 
pure  spirants.     They  are  also  called  aspirates  or  sibilants. 

382.  The  Subvocals  are  the  consonants  which  have  an  undertone 
or  sort  of  murmer  in  the  throat  or  nasal  passages.     They  are  heard  in 
the  first  letters  of  bay,  day,  woe. 


234  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

383.  Cognate   Letters   are  those  which  are  made  by  the  same 
organs  of  speech  held  in  the  same  position,  one  being  a  sub  vocal  and 
the   other   a  spirant.     Thus,  p  is  a  cognate  of  b.     The  following  are 
cognate  letters:   p,  b;    t,  d;    ch,  j;    k  (c  hard)  g;    f,  v;    th,  th\  s,  z;  sh, 
zh ;  wh,  w. 

NOTE:— C1  soft  is  equivalent  to  «,  g  soft  to  j,  and  chard  to  k,  as  seen  in  the 
following  words :  cent,  George,  cat. 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  MAKING  THE  CONSONANT  SOUNDS. 

384.  p.     The  sound  of  p  is  made  by  closing  the  lips  and  forcing  them 
abruptly  apart  with  the  breath.      The  result  will  be  a  whispered  utter- 
ance. 

b.  The  sound  of  b  is  made  in  the  same  manner  as  p  but  in  connec- 
tion with  the  undertone  or  sub-vocal.  The  undertone  or  murmur  in  the 
air  passages  must  cease  as  soon  as  the  lips  are  opened. 

t.  Place  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth  and 
force  it  suddenly  away  with  the  breath. 

d.  As  this  letter  is  the  cognate  of  /  it  is  made  in  the  same  manner 
with  the  addition  of  the  sub-vocal. 

ch.  Close  the  teeth  and  suddenly  force  them  apart  with  the  breath. 
In  making  this  sound  it  will  be  seen  that  the  breath  is  deliberately  held 
for  an  instant. 

j.  (And  g  soft  as  in  George)  is  made  like  that  of  ch  in  connection 
with  the  sub-vocal. 

k.  (And  c  as  in  cat)  is  made  by  blocking  the  air  passage  from  the 
mouth  to  the  throat  with  the  tongue,  or  closing  the  palate  and  suddenly 
forcing  out  the  breath. 

g.  The  cognate  of  k  is  made  in  the  same  manner  in  connection 
with  the  subvocal. 

f .  Place  the  upper  teeth  upon  the  lower  lip,  and  let  the  breath  pass 
between  them. 

v.  Its  cognate  is  made  in  the  same  manner  in  connection  with  the 
subvocal. 

th.  Place  the  tongue  loosely  against  the  upper  teeth  and  emit  the 
breath  with  sufficient  force  to  produce  a  rustling  sound. 

th.  The  heavy  sound  represented  by  th  is  made  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  above,  in  connection  with  the  subvocal. 

385.  36.    L,  r,  n,  and  m  are  called  Liquids  because  their  sounds 
unite  smoothly  with  other  consonants. 

I.  Place  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth,  make 
the  undertone  or  nasal  murmur  by  letting  the  breath  escape  on  both 
sides  of  the  tongue.  Or  try  to  pronounce  the  word  lo  without  sounding 
theo. 

r.    Try  to  pronounce  the  word  ray  without  sounding  the  a. 

NOTE:— The  letter  r  has  a  peculiar  power  of  influencing  and  modifying  the 
sound  of  the  vowel  preceding  it.  For  instance,  the  sound  of  u  in  hut  is  distinctly 
different  from  u  in  hurt. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  235 

m.  Close  the  lips  and  emit  the  subvocal  through  the  upper  nasal 
passages. 

n.  Place  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth  and 
emit  the  undertone  through  the  nasal  passages. 

ng.  Close  the  palate  (or  prevent  all  breath  from  escaping  through 
the  mouth)  and  emit  the  undertone  through  the  nose ;  or,  separate  the 
sound  of  ng  from  si  in  sing.  , 

NOTE: — Observe  that  this  is  an  elementary  sound  and  differs  from  the  two 
distinct  sounds  represented  by  ng  in  the  word  singe. 

y.  Place  the  sides  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  back  teeth, 
leaving  the  tip  free,  and  emit  the  subvocal. 

w.     Try  to  pronounce  the  word  way  without  sounding  a. 

s.  (And  c  soft  as  in  cent.)  Place  the  tip  of  the  tongue  looselj 
against  the  closed  teeth  and  emit  the  breath  with  a  slight  force. 

Z.     This  sound  is  made  in  the  same  manner  with  the  subvocal. 

sh.  Close  the  teeth,  bring  the  middle  of  the  tongue  against  the 
roof  of  the  mouth,  and  emit  the  breath  with  a  slight  force.  Or,  try  to 
pronounce  the'  word  show  without  sounding  the  o. 

zh.  As  this  is  the  cognate  of  sh  it  is  made  in  the  same  manner  in 
connection  with  the  undertone  or  subvocal. 

wh.  The  vowel  sound  represented  by  wh  is  made  by  contracting 
the  lips  to  a  round  position,  and  abruptly  relaxing  them  while  the 
breath  is  rushing  out. 

386.  Mutes  and  Semivowels.     Consonants  are  naturally  divided 
into  two  classes,  called  mutes  and  semivowels.    This  division  is  founded 
on  the  fact  that  the  organs  of  speech  are  more  closely  connected  in 
pronouncing  the  one  class  than  the  other.     A  mute  or  close  consonant 
admits  of  no  escape  of  breath  while  the  organs  are  in  contact.     A  semi- 
vowel, as  its  name  implies,  does  admit  of  the  escape  of  breath  while  the 
organs  are  in  contact.     The  mutes  or  pure  consonants  are  p,  b.  t,  d,  k, 
g  hard,  and  c  hard.    The  semivowels  are  c  soft,  f,  v,  th,  th,  s,  z,  sh,  zht 
I,  r,  m,  n,  ng  and  wh. 

The  four  semivowels  /,  m,  n  and  r  are  called  liquids.  (Century 
Dictionary)  S  and  z  are  sometimes  called  sibilants. 

The  teacher  may  require  the  student  to  point  out  the  mutes  and 
semivowels  in  the  following  words: — teach,  make,  permit,  relative, 
student,  game. 

SYLLABICATION. 

387.  Syllabication  is  the  correct  division  of  a  word  into  its  con- 
stituent syllables  in  writing  and  printing. 

The  division  of  words  into  syllables  is  founded  on  correct  pronun- 
ciation, that  is,  the  letters  of  a  word  must  be  arranged  into  syllables 
exactly  as  they  are  heard  when  correctly  pronounced.  But  this  rule  is 
not  always  a  reliable  guide.  The  breaking  of  a  word  at  the  end  of  a  line 
in  writing  and  printing  is  not  dependent  on  any  real  principles,  but 
largely  a  matter  of  conventional  usage,  and  it  is  sometimes  difficult  to 
determine  where  to  divide  a  word.  Printers  have  established  the  custom 


236  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 

of  making  ure  and  ing  a  syllable  in  such  words  as  rag-ing  and  junct-ure, 
instead  of  ra-ging  aud  junc-ture,  which  is  a  plain  violation  of  true  pro- 
nunciation. It  is  largely  a  matter  of  taste. 

388.  Derivatives  are  generally  divided  between  the  primitive  parts 
and  terminations:  as,  fear-less. 

Compound  words  should  be  divided  into  the  simple  words  which 
compose  them.  The  student  may  exercise  his  skill  and  taste  in  separat- 
ing the  following  words  into  proper  syllables:  Farmer,  worthy,  cornice, 
juncture,  opportunity,  aerial,  laborious,  ratan,  regret,  transmit,  result, 
return. 

ACCENT. 

389.  Accent  is  an  increased  stress  or  force  of  voice  on  a  particular 
syllable.     As  the  very  nature  of  accent  implies  a  comparison  of  syllables, 
monosyllables  cannot  be  accented,  but  every  word  of  more  than  one  sylla- 
ble has  one  of  its  syllables  accented,  and  the  accent,  of  course,  falls 
upon  the  vowel.     Words  of  three  or  more  syllables  have  frequently  two 
accents,  viz:  a  primary  or  principal  accent,  and  a  secondary  or  lighter 
accent.     The  primary  accent  is  indicated  in  dictionaries  with  an  accent 
mark.     The  secondary  accent  is  indicated  by  a  lighter  mark  or  by  a 
double  accent  mark. 

In  unaccented  syllables,  when  a  vowel  is  followed  by  r,  the  vowel 
has  frequently  an  obscure  sound  as  of  u  in  but.  This  obscure  sound 
is  exemplified  in  the  following  words,  tender,  mayor,  martyr,  abundant, 
republican, — pronounced,  tendur,  mayur,  abundunt,  republicun.  This 
seems  to  be  the  latest  teaching  of  the  authorities  as  exemplified  in  the 
Cent  Die.  (p.  xviii).  $ut  it  seems  to  us  better  to  preserve  the  vowel's 
own  sound  in  all  cases  if  possible.  We  think  great  care  should  be  taken 
in  pronunciation  not  to  run  these  accented  vowels  into  this  sound  if  it 
can  be  avoided,  and  we  see  no  reason  why  it  cannot  be.  The  custom  of 
so-called  good  speakers  is  not  always  a  safe  guide,  for  great  speakers 
are  likely  to  have  some  favorite  lapsus  linguae.  It  is  well  here  to  recall 
words  of  Walker,  written  a  hundred  years  ago:  "There  is  scarcely  any- 
thing more  distinguishes  a  person  of  mean  or  good  education  than  the 
pronunciation  of  the  unaccented  vowels.  When  the  vowels  are  under  the 
accent,  the  learned  and  the  ignorant,  with  very  few  exceptions,  pro- 
nounce them  in  the  same  manner,  but  the  unaccented  vowels  in  the 
mouth  of  the  former  have  a  distinct,  open  and  specific  sound,  while  the 
latter  often  totally  sink  them,  or  change  them  into  some  other  sound. 
Those  therefore  who  wish  to  pronounce  elegantly,  must  be  particularly 
attentive  to  the  unaccented  vowels,  as  a  neat  pronunciation  of  these 
forms  one  of  the  greatest  beauties  of  speaking." 

390.  Words  are  either  primitive  or  derivative.     A  primitive  word 
is  one  that  is  not  derived  from  another  word  and  which  can  be  reduced 
to  no  fewer  letters  without  destroying  or  changing  its  meaning:  as, 
bring,  kind,  be. 

A  derivative  word  is  one  formed  from  a  primitive,  generally  by  the 
addition  of  a  prefix  or  suffix :  as,  unkind,  brought,  was. 

When  the  meaning  of  a  word  is  entirely  changed  by  the  addition  of 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


237 


a  prefix  or  suffix  it  is,  notwithstanding  the  addition,  a  primitive  word: 
as,  reproof,  in  which  the  meaning  of  re  nor  proof  is  retained. 

In  accordance  with  the  specific  directions  which  have  been  given 
for  the  production  of  the  elementary  sounds,  let  the  student  separate 
the  following  words  into  their  elementary  sounds,  pronouncing  each 
separately. 


SPELLED. 

PRONOUNCED. 

SPEIyl^ED. 

PRONOUNCED. 

me, 

m-e, 

shun, 

sh-u-ii, 

bay, 

b-a, 

bright, 

b-r-I-t, 

calm, 

c-a-m, 

thoroughfares, 

th-u-r-6-f-a-r-z, 

paw, 

P-a» 

sail, 

s-a-1, 

oak, 

6-k, 

castle, 

k-a-s-1, 

cool, 

k-g-1, 

thistle, 

th-i-s-1, 

it, 

I-t, 

success, 

s-u-k-s-e-s, 

met, 

m-e-t, 

plum, 

p-l-u-m, 

at, 

a-t, 

plume, 

p-l-ii-m, 

not, 

n-o-t, 

raised, 

r-a-z-d, 

up, 
full, 

u-p, 
f-9-1, 

possessed, 
illness, 

p-o-s-T'-s-t, 
i-1-n-e-s. 

shrine, 

sh-r-i-n, 

funny, 

f-u-n-I, 

thin, 

th-i-n, 

lily, 

l-i-l-I, 

month, 

ui-ii-ii-lli. 

massy, 

m-a-s-i, 

stretched, 

s-t-r-e-ch-t, 

duty, 

d-u-t-I, 

mouth, 

m-ou-th, 

teach, 

t-e-ch, 

mouths, 

m-ou-th-z, 

china, 

ch-I-n-a, 

whisps, 

wh-i-s-p-s, 

theme, 

th-e-m, 

ghosts, 
worlds, 

g-o-s-t-s, 
w-ft-r-1-d-z, 

wring, 
sing, 

r-I-ng, 
s-i-ng, 

sixth, 

s-i-k-s-th, 

cherry, 

ch-e-r-y. 

Analyze  in  a  similar  manner,  the  following  words :  Ache,  oak,  eke, 
key,  caw,  easy,  gnaw,  check,  ship,  calm,  tithe,  loth,  loathe,  damage, 
quell,  choir,  dilate,  priest,  shrink,  gifts,  still,  lax,  box,  fox,  extra,  deputy, 
interest,  compliment,  church,  exchange,  embezzlement,  illustrate,  tem- 
pest, syllable,  avoirdupoise. 


238 


PRACTICAL  S 


GLOSSARY. 


391.    A  list  of  of  several  hundred  frequently  recurring  words  wit 
their  outlines,  for  convenient  reference. 


Abandon    Ben3 -Den 
abate    Bee2-Tee 
abode    Bee2 -Dee 
abominable    Bee  ^Men-Bee 
abomination    Bee^Men-Eshun 
abrupt-ness    Bee-Ray-Pet 
absorb     Bees2 -Ray-Bee 
abstemious    Bees  ^Tee-Ems 
abstract    Bee3-Ster 
absurd-ity    Bees2-Ard 
accountant    Kent3-Ent 
accumulate    Kay3-Em-Let 
acid    Es3-Dee 
ascetic  acid    Est3 -Kays-Dee 
actuary     Ket3-Ray 
actor    Kay-Ter3 
adjacent    Jays2-Net 
adhesion    Deeshun1 
adversary    Def2 -Rays-Ray 
aesthetic    Es2-Thet :  Kay 
agriculture     Ger2-Kel  (Ter) 
ah     Hay3 
alien    Len2  (voc.) 
altitude     Let2 -Tee-Dee 
ambiguity    Emb2 -Gay-Tee 
anatomy    En-.Tee2-Em 
ancestor    En-Esster3 
ancient    En-Ishnt2 
annihilate    En1 -Let 
antecedent    Nets-Dent2 
apparatus    Per2 -Tees 
arbitrary    Ar3-Bet  (Ray) 
architect    Ar2-Ket  (w.  s.) 
artist     Ray3-Teest 
ascertain    Es2-Ret-En 


assault    Es^Let 

assets    Es2-Tees 

asylum    Es2-Lay-Em 

Atlantic  Ocean       Tee2 -Lent-Kay- 

shun 

atmosphere    Tee2-Ems-Fer 
attorney    Ter2-En 
audacity    Dees1 -Tee 
audience    Dens1 
auspicious    Es^Pee  (w.  s.) 
avail    Vee2-El 
avarice    Vee3-Rays 
avocation    Vee3-Kayshun 

B 

Balance    Blens3 
bankrupt-cy     Bee3 -Ing-Ray-Pet 
baptise-d    Bee2 -Pee  (w.  s.) 
baptism     Bee2-Pees-Em 
barometer     Ber2-Emter 
barometrical     Ber2Emter-Kel 
Benjamin     Ben2-Jay-Men 
barrack    Bee3-Ray-Kay 
benefactor    Ben2-Ef-Kayter 
benefactress     Ben2-Ef-Kay-Terf 
beneficent    Ben2-Efs-Net 
beneficial    Ben2-Ef-Shel 
beneficiary    Ben2-Ef-Sher 
benevolent    Ben2-Vee-Lent 
between     Bet1 -Wen 
biography    Bee^Ger-Ef 
belladonna    Bee2 -Lay-Dee-En 
belligerent    Bel2-Jrent 
bequeath    Bee^Kay-Ith 
biennial     Bee^Nel 
bombastic    Bee3-Embs-Kay 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


239 


brilliant    Ber2-Lent 
Buffalo    Bee2 -Pel 
bulletin     Bee2 -Lay-Ten 
bouyant    Bee  ^En-Tee 

c 

Calendar    KeP-Ender 
California    Kief l  -Ray  (En) 
captain     Kay2-Pet  (w.  s.) 
casual     Kays3 -Lay 
catalogue    Ket3 -Lay-Gay 
catastrophe     Ket-Ster3-El 
-ategory    Ket3-Ger 
centrifugal     Sent-Ef2-Gel 
centripetal    Sent-Pee2-Tel 
certificate     Iss-Ret2-Ef 
challenge    Chel2-Jay  (w.  s.) 
character    Ker2-Kay  (Ter) 
characteristic     Ker2-Kayst 
characterize     Ker2-Kaj'S 
characterizes     Ker2-Kayses 
chattels    Chay3-Tels 
chemistry    Kay-Ems-Ter2 
circular    Iss-Ray2-Kler 
collateral     Kay2-Layter 
commercial     Kay2-Mer-Shel 
community    Corn-dot:  En-Tee3 
conscientious     Ish2-En-Ishes 
consequent     Con-dot:    Iss-Kent1 
conservative     Iss-Ray2-Vee-Tef 
conspicuous     Spec '  -Kays 
covenant     Kay-Ven2-Ent 
courteous     Kret-Es2 
criterion    Kret^Ren 

D 

December    Dees2 -Em  (w.  s.) 
deceptive     Dees2 -Pee  (w.  s.) 
deficient    Dee  2-Ef- Shay 
delegate     Del2 -Get 
deliberate     Del2 -Bret 
delicacy    Del2-Kay-Es 
delight    Diet1 

demurrage     Dee2 -En-Ray-Jay 
denounce     Dee3-En-Ens 
deponent    Dee2-Pen-Ent 
derange     Der2-En-jay 
destination    Deest2-Enshun 
detest    Deds2-Tee 
devolve    Def2-Vee 
dilapidate    Del2 -Pet  (w.  s.) 
diligent    Dee2-Lay-Jent 


discrepancy    Dees2-Kay-Pen  (Es) 
discriminate  Dees'--Kay-Men  (Tee) 
distinguish    DeestMng  (w.  s.) 
distribute     Deester'-Bet 
District  of  Columbia  Dees2Kel(ws) 
divulge    Def2-Jay 
domestic     Dees2-Em-Kay 
dwindle     Dee l  -Wen-Dee-Lay 
dyspectic-sia    Dees2-Pee-Pee 

E 

Earnestly    Ray2  Ens-El 
eccentric     Kays2-Enter  (Kay) 
economical    Ken^Em-Kel 
educate     Dee2 -Ket 
effectual    Ef2  -Kay-Tee-Lay 
efficient    Ef2-Shay 
embezzle    Embs-2-Lay 
emergency    Em2-Ray-Jen-Es 
emphatic    Em-Fet2  :  Kay 
encounter    En-Kent2-Ar 
enforce    En-EP-Ars 
engagement    En- Gay- Jay2 -Men  t 
enormity    Ner^-Em  (Tee) 
enthusiast    En-Ith3-Ses-Tee 
envelope    En-Vee2-Peell  omitted) 
equivalent    Kay- Vee2 -Lent 
erroneous    Kay2-Ens 
essential    Es2-En  (Shel) 
estimate    Est2-Met 
eventual    Vee2 -Net-El 
exhaust    Kay-Ses-Tee1 
exorbitant    Kays2-Ray-Bet  (w.  s.) 
expedient     Spet1  (w.  s.) 
experiment    Sper2-Ment 
extinct-ion     Kays-Tee1 
extinguish     Kays-Tee2  (w.  s.) 
extraordinary    Ster2-Ard  (w.  s.J 

F 

Facetious     Efs2-Shay 
faculty    Ef2-Kel-Tee 
fainthearted     Fent2-Art 
falsehood    Fels1-Dee 
falsification    Felseshun1 
fanatic    Ef3 -Net-Kay 
fantastic    Fent3-Est :  Kay 
farewell    Ef2-Ar-Lay 
fertile    Fret2 -Lay 
figurative     Ef2-Gertive 
financial     EP-En-Shel 
fluctuate    Fel2-Kay-Tet 


240 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


forge    Ef  2jay 
forger    Ef2-Jer 
fragment     Fer3-Gay-Ment 
Frank     Fer3-Kay 
frankly     Eer3-Kel 
Franklin     Fer3-Klen 
frustrate    Fers2-Tret 
furnace    Ff2 -Ray-Ens 

Q 

Garrulous     Ger2-Lays 
generous    Jay2-Ners 
genuine    Jen2-En 
gigantic    Jay-Gent3-Kay 
good-humored    Ged2-Merd 
gradual     Gred3-Lay 
graduate    Gred-Tee2 
gravity- ate     Ger2-Ved  (w.  s.) 
gratuitous    Gret2-Tees 
Great  Britain     Gret-Bret2 
grotesque     Grets2-Kay 
guarantee    Ger1 -En-Tee 

H 

Habitual     Bet3 -Lay 
habitation    Bee3-Teeshun 
habeas  corpus     Hay2-Ker  (w.  s.) 
handle    Ned2  El 
handwriting    Nert3-Ing 
hazard    Zee2-Ard 
healthy    Lay2-Ith 
heartily    Art3 -Lay 
henceforth    Ens3-Ef 
hereditary     Hay2-Ray-Det-Ray 
hieroglyphic     Ar1-Glef  (Kay) 
history    Estx-Ray 
homeopathy     Em-Pee  2-Ith 
homicide    Em-Iss-Dee1 
honesty    Ens1 -Tee 
hopeful    Pef3 
horticulture     Art2-Kel  (Ter) 
hospital    Hays2 -Pet-Lay 
humanity    Men3 -Tee 
humiliation     Em3-Layshun 
hurricane     Ar2-Ken 
hypocrisy     Pee:-Ker-Es 
hypocrite    Pee^Kret 

I 

Identical     Ded  2  -Kel 


identification    Dent2-Efshun 
ignominious    Gen^Men-Es 
illustrate    Lay2-Stret 
imitate    Em-Tet2 
imperceptible    Em-Pers2-Pet 
impoverish    Emp^Ver-Ish 
impracticable    Em-Per3-Ket 
impropriety    Em-Per1  (voc  with  i) 
inauspicious    En-Es^Pee 
incredible     En2-Kred-Bel 
indefatigable     Ned-Fet2-Gay-Bel 
indefinite    En-Def2-Net 
indemnify    Ned^Em-Ef 
indenture    Ned2 -Net  (Ar) 
independent    Ned-Pend2  (Ent) 
indifferent    En-Def 2 
Indiana    NedJ-En 
indignant    Ned*-Gay-Nent 
individual    Ned1-Ved 
individuality    Ned1:  Ved 
indivisible    Ned-Vees^Bee 
infer    En-Ef2 
infers-ence    En-Efs2 
inferential     En-Ef  2-Shel 
inferior    En-Ef1  (Ray-Ray) 
infringe    En-Fren1  (Jay) 
ingredient    En^Gred-Net 
inhabit    En-Bet3 
inhabitant    En-Bet3:  Ent 
inherit    En-Art2 
inquire    EnJ-Wer 
inquisitive     En-Kays-Tef1 
insignificant    Ens1 -Gay 
insolvency    In-Slay^Ven-Es 
integrity    Ent2-Gret  (Tee) 
intellect-ual-ity    Ent2-Ket  (El) 
intemperate    En1-Tee-Emp 
interpret    Net-Pret2 
interpreter    Net-Pret  2-Ar 
intestate    Nets-Tet2 
intimidate     NetJ-Med  (Tee) 
intolerable     Net-El1 -Bel 
intrinsic    Enter1-Ens-Kay 
introduction    Net-Deeshun2 
inventor    En-Vent2 -Ray 
invisible    En-Vees1-Bee 
involve    En-Vee2-Vee 
irrelevancy    Ar2-Lay-Ven-Es 
irresistible     Ar2-Ses-Tee  (Bel) 
irrespective    Ars2-Pef  (w.  s.) 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


241 


January    jay2-En  (w.  s.) 
Jefferson    Jef2  (Rays-En) 
jealous    Jay2 -Lays 
Jesus    Jay2  (w.  s.) 
Jesus  of  Nazereth    Jay2 -En 
jovial    Jay2-Vel 
judicature    Jed2-Kay-(Ter) 
judicial    Jed2-Shel 
judiciary    Jed2-Sher 
judicious    Jed2-Ish 
junction    Jay2-Ingshun 
jurisprudence    Jers2-  Per  (Dens) 
justify    Jays2-Ef 
K 

kindly,  kindle     Kent1 -Lay 
kindred     Kent1 -Ret 

L 

landscape     Lends3-Kay-Pee 
languid    El3-Ing-Ged 
lassitude     Lays3-Ted 
lateral    Let3-Rel 
latterly    Layter3-Lay 
legacy    Lay2-Gay-Es 
legalize     Lay1 -Gels 
legitimate    Lay2-Jet-Met 
lengthwise    Ing3 -Ways  (w.  s.) 
lenient    Len2-Net 
license    El2 -Sens 
likelihood    Lay^Kel-Dee 
likewise     Lay^Kay-Weh-Iss 
liquid    Lay  ^Kay-Dee 
liquidate    Lay1-Kay-Det 
lithograph    Lay2Ith-Gref 
literature    Layter2-Ter 
locomotive    Lay2 -Kay-Met 
loquacity    Lay3 -Kays-Tee 
lubricate    Lay-Ber-Ket 
ludicrous     Led3-Kers 
luxury    Lay2 -Kays- Ray 

M 

Magazine     Em1 -Gays-En 
magnanimous     Em2-En-Ems 
magnet    Em2 -Gay-Net 
magnificent    Em1-Gay  (w.  s.) 
maintain     Ment2-En 
majesty    Em-Jays3  (Tee) 
majority    Em-Jert1 


malevolent    Mel-Veez  (Lent) 
malicious    Mel-Ish1 
malignant    MeP-Gay-Nent 
manuscript    Em3-Ens-Kay-Pet 
manifest    Em2-En-Efst 
manifestation    Em2-Ens-Eshun 
manufacture    Em2-En-Ef  (w.  s.) 
margin     Em2 -Ray-Jen 
marvellous    Mer2-Vels 
Massachusetts     Ems-Chays 
maximum     Em2-Kays-Em 
meanwhile    Em l  -Nel 
mechanic    Em2 -Ken-Kay 
mechanical     Em2-Key-Kel 
mechanism     Em2-Kays-Em 
Mediterranean    Med-Tren2   (w.  s.) 
melancholy    Mel2-Kel 
memoir    Em2-Em-Wer 
memory-anda-andum        Em2 -Em 

(w.  s.) 

merchandise    Em2 -Ray-Che  t-Zee 
meritorious    Em2 -Ray-Tee-Rays 
Methodist    Em-Thet2-Stey 
metropolitan     Emter-Pel2  (w.  s.) 
microscope    Em^Kers-Pee 
military    Melt2 -Ray 
minimum    Men1-Em 
ministerial    Men1 -Ester-Lay 
minority    Em-Nert1 
miscellaneous    Ems2-Len-Es 
mischievous    Ems-Chef  J-Es 
moderate    Emder-Teea 
modern    Emdern1 
modest    Med1-Stey 
modify    Med-Ef1 
modification     Med-Efshun1 
monstrous     Mens^Tees 
morbid    Em1 -Ray-Bed 
mortgage    Mer1-Gay 
mortgagee    Mer1-Gay-Jee 
muscular    Ems2-Kay-Lay-Ai 
mutilate    Met3 -Let 
mysterious    Ems-Ters1 

N 

Narrate    Ner-Tee2 
nautical    Net1-Kel 
neighborhood    En-Ber2-Dee 
neglect    En2-Gel-Kay  (Tee) 
neglectful    En2-Gef  (w.  s.) 
negligent    En2-Gel-Jent 


•J42 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


nervous  system    Ner-Vee2-Ses-Tee 
neutralize    Enter2 -Els 
Newfoundland    Ned2 -Fed-Eland 
New  Jersey    En 2  -Jay 
New  York    En2-Yay 
nocturnal    En2-Ket-Ren 
nondescript    Ned^Skay-Pee 
nonsense    Nen1 :  Sens2 
North  America     Ner^Em 
North  Star    Nerster1 
notary    En-Tee2 -Ray 
notification     Net-Efshun2 
nourish    NerMsh 
November    En-Vee2  (w.  s.) 
noxious    En-Kay-Ish1 
nugatory    En2 -Gay-Tee-Ray 
nuisance    En3-Sens 
numerous     En2-Mers 
nutriment    En2-Ter-Ment 


Obedient     Bed1  (voc.) 
obligatory    Bel2 -Get 
obliterate    Blet^Ret 
obstacle    Bees1-Kel 
obstinate    Bees1 -Net 
odorous    Ders2  (voc.) 
officious    EH-Ish 
oftentimes    Fent^Ems 
Ohio    Hay2 
ominous    Men1-Es 
omnipotent    Men1 -Pee 
omnipresent    Em1-Pers-Net 
opponent    Pen2 -Net 
ordinance    Ret  ^En-Ens 
original     Ray1 -Jen 
ornament    Ren^Ment 
ornamentation    Reneshun1  (w.  s.) 
orthodox     RayMth  (Dee. Kays) 
ostensible    Est2-Ens-Bee 
ostentatious    Est2-En-Ish 
outward    Tee3-Ard 
overturn    Vert2-Ren 
overwhelm    VerJ-El  (Em) 
.oxygen    Kays1 -Gen 


Pacific    Pees^Ef-Kay 
painful    Pen2-Ef 
palpitate    Pel2-Pee:Tet 
pantomime    Pent2-Men 


paradise     Pee2 -Ray-Dees 
paragraph     Per3-Gref 
paralytic    Per2-Let:Kay 
partisian     Prets2-En 
paternal     Pet2-Ren-Lay 
patronage     Pet3 -Ren  (Jay) 
pecuniary    Pee3 Ken  (Ray) 
pedantic    Pee2 -Dent-Kay 
pedantry    Pee2-Det-Ray 
penetrate    Pent2 -Ret 
penitential    Pent2-En-Shel 
Pennsylvania    Pees1Vee 
perennial     Pee2 -Ren-Lay 
perilous    Per2 -Lays 
periodical     Pred'-Kel 
perpendicular    Per2-Pen  (w.  s.) 
perpetual-ate-ion     Pee2 -Ray-Pet 

(w.  s.) 

perseverance    Pers2-Vee-Rens 
perspective     Pers2-Pef  (w.  s.) 
pertinacious     Pee2-Ret-En-Ish 
phenomena-on-al    Fen2 -Em 
Philadelphia    Felt2-Ef 
philosophy    Fels^Ef 
phosphorus    EfsJ-Ef-Rays 
photography    Fet2-Ger-Ef 
physiognomy    Efs^Gen-Em 
physiology     Efs 1  -jay 
piquant    Pee :  -Kent 
piquancy    Pee1-Ken-Es 
picturesque  Pee^Kays-Ters-Kay 
political    Plet^Kel 
popular    Pee1-Pee  (Lay-Ar) 
post-mortem     Pees2-Em-Ray-Tee- 

Em  (w.  s.  Pees-Em) 
precipitate    Pers^Pet  (w.  s.) 
prejudice     Per2-Jay 
prejudicial    Per2-Jed-Shel 
premature    Per3-Met-Ray 
prerogative    Per2-Ray-Gative 
presbytery    Pers2 -Bet-Ray 
Presbyterianism     Per2 -Bets-Em 
pretension    Per2-Ten  (w.  s.) 
prevaricate     Per3-Ver-Ket 
prima- facie     Per2-Ef 
privilege     Pref^-Jay 
prodigious    Perd^Jays 
product    Per2-Dee 
proficient    Per2-Ef-Shay 
property    PerJ-Pee 
propitious    Per^Pee-Ish 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


243 


proportion    Per2-Peeshun 
prospect    PersT-Pee 
prospective    Pers^Pef 
protestant    Prets2-Tent 
protraction     Per3-Tershun 
providential    Preft2-En-Shel 
provincial     Pref  1-En-Shel 
prudential    Per2-Den-Ish 
public-ish-ation  Pee2-Bee  (w.  s) 
pulpit    Pel2 :  Pet 
punctual     Pee2-Ing-Ket-I/ay 
pungency    Pen2-Jen-Es 
purgatory    Per2-Get-Ray 
pusillanimous    Pees3-L,en-Ems 
pyrotechnic    Pret1 -Kay-En-Kay 


Quadrangle        Kay2  Dee-Ray-Ing- 

Gel 

quadrant    Kay2-Drent 
quadruple    Kay2-Der-Pel 
quaint    Kay2-Went 
qualification     Kel-Efshun2 
quarantine    Kay  2  -  Wernt-En 
quarter    Kay2-Werter 

R 

Radical,  ridicule    Red3Kel 
rapture     Ray3-Pet-Ar 
ratification    Ret2-Efshun 
rebut    Ray2-Bet 
reciprocate    Rays2-Per-Ket 
rectify    Ray2-Ket-Ef 
redeemable    Ard1-Em-Bel 
redundance    Ret2-Ned-Ens 
redundant    Ret2-Ned-Net 
referee    Ray2-Ef-Ray 
reiterate     Ray2 -Tret 
reflect-ed     Ray2-Ef-Kay 
refund    Ray2-Fend 
reject-ed    Ray2-Jay-Ket 
rejection     Ray2-Jayshun 
relegate    Rel2-Get 
relevancy    ReP-Ven-Es 
reliant    ReP-Net 
relinquish     Rel2-Ing 
remittance    Ar1  -Met:  Ens 
remonstrate    Ar2-Ems-Stret 
remunerate    Ar2-Em-Nert 
reprehensible    Ray2-Prens-Bee 
republican    Ray2 -Pee-Ben 


resignation    Rays2-Gay-Enshvm 
retrospect    Art2-Ray-Spee 
return    Art2-Ren 
revenge     Ray2-Vee-jay 
revolver    ReP-Lay  (Ver) 
rhetorical    Ar^Ray-Kel 
rheumatism    Ar*-Mets-Em 
foval     Ray1 -El 
rudiment    Ray3-Dee-Ment 
rupture     Ray2-Pet-Ar 


Sacred    Scret2 
sacrifice    Sker2-Efs 
sagacity    Iss-Gays2-Tee 
sagacious    Iss-Gay^Ish 
salutary    Slet2-Ray 
sanctimonious     Iss-Ing2-Ket-En 

Ens 

satiate    Iss-Isht2  (voc) 
saturate    Stee3-Ret 
Sec.  of  State    Scret2-Stet 
Sec.  of  War    Scret2-Wer 
scarcity    Skers2-Tee 
schedule     Sked-El3 
scientific    Es^Net-Ef-Kay 
scoundrel    Sked2-Rel 
sculpture     SkeP-Pet  (Ar) 
scripture    Sker1  (w.  s.) 
sedentary    Iss-Det2-Ray 
separate    Spret2  (voc.) 
September    Spet2-Em 
signature    Iss-Gay1  (Net) 
sincere    Iss1 -Ens-Ray 
social    Iss-SheP 
South  America    Iss-Ith3-Em 
South  Carolina    Iss-Ith3-Ker 
southeastern    Iss-Thes3-Ren 
southwestern    Iss-Ways2-Ren 
southwest    Iss-Wayst2 
speculate    Spee2-Klet 
spendthrift    Sped2-Ther-Fet 
splendid    Splen2-Ded 
start     Stret2 
standard    Sted2-Ard 
stimulate    Stem1 -Let 
stipulate    Stey-Pee1-Let 
strengthen     Ster2-Then 
structure    Ster2-Ter 
solemn    Slay1 -Em 
subterfuge    Iss-Bet2-Ray-Ef-Jay 


244 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND, 


summary    Iss-Em2-R.ay 
superficial    Sper2-Ei-Shel 
supernaturalism    Spers3-Em  (w.  s.) 
superstitious    Sper^-Stee-Shay 
surrender    Iss-Ray2-Ender 
suspension    Ses-Pen2  (w.  s.) 
swindle    Iss-Way2-Del 
sympathetic  Iss-Emp-Thet2 :  Kay 


Talent    Tlent3 
technical    Tee2-Kav  (Nel) 
telegraph    Tel2-Gref 
tenement    Tee2-Ment 
testament    Tees2 -Merit 
testify    Tees2-Ef 
testimony    Tees2 -Em 
testimonial    Tees*-Em-Nel 
Texas    Teeses2 
texture    Tees2-Ter 
thenceforth     Thees*-Ef 
tragedy    Ter2-Jay  (Dee) 
tranquil     Terming  (Kel) 
transatlantic    Ter-3-  Lent-Kay 
transfer    Ters2-E?  (Ar) 
transgress    Tp.rs3-Oays 
transparent    Ters* -Fee-Rent 
tyranny    Tee*-Rav-En 

t 
Unanimous 


universalism     (En)  Vers2-Em 
university    (En)Vers*-Tee 
useless    Es3-Lays 
usurp    Es2  -Ray-Pee 
utilitarianism    Tel2-Ters-Em 


Valediction    VeP-Deeshun 
valid    Viet3 
validity    Viet1 
vanquish     v*en3-Kay-Ish 
variation     Vee2-Rayshun 
vegetable    Vee2-Jet-Bel 
vengeance    Vee2-Jens 
ventilate    Vent2-Let 
verify    Vee2-Ray-Ef 
vice  versa    Vees  :  :  Ver-Es 
Virginia    Vee2-Jay-En 
voluntary    Vlent^Ray 

W 

Warfare    Wers-Ef-Ar 
warm     Wem1  (w.  s.) 
worship    Wer2-Ish 
wretched    Ray2-Chet 

Y 

Yield-ed    Yeld1 
yonder    Yeh'-Ender 
younger    Yeh3-Inger 
youth    Ith3 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


AUG 


Form  L9-25/H-9,'47(A5618)444 


UNIVERSITY  of 
AT 
LOS  ANGELES 


T  Tt>I>  A  r>Tr 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000  564  840     7 


